100% found this document useful (4 votes)

1K views

Oracle Material

This document is a letter from Sathish Yellanki discussing his experience training students over many years. He expresses gratitude for his students' patience and for inspiring him to share his knowledge and experiences. He notes that a teacher can only be successful when students are receptive to learning. He wishes students success in their careers and hopes they do not neglect the final months of their database classes, as that will help make them confident and successful professionals.

Uploaded by

tejeshhasan

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (4 votes)

1K views

Oracle Material

Uploaded by

tejeshhasan

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.

Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

De a r S t u de nt F ri en d s,
It Wa s A L on g J ou r ne y i n My C a re e r W it h Y o u r C om m unity , E ve n Th o u gh I Wa s A
St u de nt A t S om e St a ge i n My L if e, I Re a ll y St a rt e d Un de r st a n di ng T he C o nv en ie nc e s
A n d In- C o nv e n ie nce s o f The S tu d en t s L i f e On ly Af te r I St a rt e d T r ai ni n g T hem .
I Re al l y F e el E l at e d A n d En er g e t ic Whe n Y o u P e o p le B e ar Me Wi th S o Muc h P a t ie nc e
in Th e Cl a s se s, M y St u de nt s A re My Re a l In spi r a ti o n An d E ne r g y i n My Da y - T o- Da y
L if e. My St u de nt s K ee p My C o nsc i ou sne s s A liv e A nd Ma k e Me M o re Re s p o ns i bl e i n
Ev er y Ev e nt I E xec ut e Th ro ug h o ut My Day , A s T he y R e al ly Te ac h Me Ho w A H um an
Be in g Sh o u l d B e P a t ie nce A nd Sh o u l d Ge t R e a dy F o r T he H a rd sh i p s Fo r Ga i ni ng A nd
Ac hi ev i ng K n o w le d g e F o r S uc ce ss f u l Id e n tif ic at i o n A nd E x i st e nce i n Thi s C om peti tiv e
Wo r l d.
I R e a l ly S al ut e Wi t h Ho n o r A l l T ho se St ud e nt s Wh o Ga ve Me A Di a s T o S h a re My
E x p e ri e nce s A n d Kn o w le d ge Wit h Th em i n A l l The se Y e ar s i n My C a ree r, A s If Y o u
Nev e r H a d A Mi n d i n R e ce i vi n g T he K n o wl e d g e T h en I C ou l d n t H a ve Do ne A ny T h ing
Gr e at i n My L if e A s A F a c ul ty. My I d en tif ic at i o n A s A T e a c he r O R F ac ul ty i s Onl y
Be c au se of A ll T h o se S tu d en ts Wh o H a d T h e Re c ei v i n g He a rt of Ac c e pt i ng Me T o B e
T he i r T e ac he r. I S tr o n gl y Be l ie v e T h at A T e a che r C an E nj o y H i s S u cce ss Onl y W he n
T he re is A St u de n t Wh o i s in T he Mo o d of R e c eiv i n g A n d A c ce pt i n g The St a n d a r d s o f
K n o wl e d g e T he Te ac he r De liv e rs.
De a r F ri en d I Re a l l y F o r ge t The Wh ol e W orld of Eve nt s Whe n I F in d Y o u Si tt in g i n
F r on t of Me, J u st Wi t h A n E x pec t at i o n of B ui ld i n g Y o ur C ar ee r. T h a t C om m i tm e nt of
Y o urs Re a lly Driv e s Me De e p i n t o Em o ti o ns A s I S t art S h ari n g My K no wl e d g e Wi t h Y o u.
B ut Som et im e s it P i nc he s Me in My C o ns ci o us ne s s Wh e n I Fi n d F ew St ud e nt s Wh o
Re a ll y Don o t C a re T he ir C a ree r An d Le a ve T he S e nse s F or a F ai l ur e T hat T he y Wi ll
E nc o un te r J ust Be c aus e The y Do n o t C on ce nt r at e o n T h e Iss ue s Se ri o u s ly.
Ev er y Obj ec t T h a t i s o n Th i s E a rth C a n Ha v e A S t at e o f Suc c es s i n Th ei r P r oce ss of
L if e, Bu t T he B i g Dif f ere nc e is T he Dif f e re nc e of De nsi ty in T he S ucc ess Wh a t Th ey
Ac hi eve . T he L a w of N at u re S a ys T h a t S ucc e ss On ly F o ll o w s T h o se P e o p le W ho H av e A
T en d en cy T o Wa l k T o w a r ds it , S uc ce ss C a n not B e P a rt of Ou r L if e Whe n We Re al ly
Do n o t H av e A T h o u g ht of H av in g i t. I St r o n gl y B el ie v e T ha t Suc ce s s Ne v e r F ol l o ws A
H um an B e in g , H um an Be in g S h o ul d F ol l ow T he P at h I de nt if y i ng T he Pr o p er L a w s T hat
C a n M a k e Him R e ac h T he Suc c es s Wh a t H e Re a l ly E x p ec ts.
Ev er y J o u rn ey H as i t s Ow n Dis t a nce T o T r a ve l, B ut E ve ry St e p We T a ke i n Th e J o urn ey
Ma k e s Us Dec re a se T he Di st a nc e T o R e a ch T he F in a l P o i nt i n T he J o u rn ey , Th e
H a p p in es s We C a n E x p er ie nce Onc e We Re a c h Ou r De st in a ti o n in T he J o u rne y S ho ul d
Be Self E x pe ri en ce d Bu t C a nn o t B e E x p l a i ne d By Som eb o dy E l se . I H o p e Y o u A ll H av e
Al r e a d y C ro ss e d T he G re a t J ou rne y T o Ac hi e v e Y o ur S uc c e s s i n C a re e r B y T ra ve l i ng
F o r S i xt e e n Ye a rs, B ut M y Onl y Su g g es ti o n i s No t T o Ne g le c t T he L a st F e w Mo n t h s of
T he J o u rney Wh a t Y o u A re S pe n d in g i n Y o ur Da t a b a se C l a ss es, As T hi s is Y ou r F i na l
De st in y T o Ma k e Y o u Mo re C onf i de nt An d Suc c es sf ul i n Ke e pi n g Y o urs el f A he a d o f
Ot he r s i n T he Wo rl d of C om pet i ti o n.
Fi n a l ly I Wi ll Bl es s Yo u F r om T he B ot t o m of My H e a r t, Th a t Y o u Wi l l F i n d A
Wo n de rf ul Pl a ce in Y o ur C a re e r, W it h A ll Th e R i c h ne ss A n d Th e Gr ea t L i fe st yle Y o u
Dr e am ed B ef or e Y o u We re P a rt of My Or a c le S essi o n s
H o p in g T o B e Mo r e C l o se r in Y ou r Th o u g ht s A n d F an t a si es of Be in g S ucc e ssf ul i n Y o u r
C a ree r

Y o urs C or d i al l y
S at hi s h Y e l l an k i

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

First Steps Towards Oracle Database

Let us Make Database Practical

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

What is Data Actually?

Data:
It is Stored Representation of OBJECTS and EVENTS That Have Meaning and
Importance in the Users Environment. Data Can be Structure OR Unstructured.
Structured Student Name, Address..
Unstructured StudPhoto, AddrMap..

Representation of Data :
King

5500

10-02-06

Blake

4500

02-03-05

Clark

3500

15-05-04

Smith

1800

06-10-00

Miller

1100

22-12-03

Taylor

3500

24-09-98

What is Information Actually?

Information:
It is Data that is in Processed Form, Such That It Increases the Knowledge of
the Person Who Uses the Data.

Representation of Information:

Employees Information
Organization :
Date : 11 March 2015.
SkyEss Techno Solutions Place : Hyderabad.
Name
King
Blake
Clark
Smith
Miller
Taylor

Department Salary
10
5500
10
4500
20
3500
30
1800
20
1100
30
3500

DOJ
10-02-06
02-03-05
15-05-04
06-10-00
22-12-03
24-09-98

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

What is Metadata Actually?

Metadata:
It is the Data Which Describes the Properties OR Characteristics of End Users
Data and the Context of the Data.
Metadata Properties Can Include Information Such as:

Data Name.

Definitions.

Length OR Size.

Values Allowed.

Source of Data.

Ownership.

Metadata and Data are always separate.

Metadata Enables The Database Designers and Programmers to Understand
Exactly in Which Form The Data Should Exist Within The System.

Metadata for Employees Information

Data Item Specification

Value

Field Name

Type

Length Min

Empname
DeptNo
EmpSal
HireDate

Alpha Numeric
Integer
Decimal
Date

30
2
7

Max

90
10
1500 50000

Database Management Systems

Database Management Systems is Software that is Used to Create, Maintain,
and Provide Controlled Access to User Databases.
Database Management Systems Should Provide Systematic Method of

Creating the Database.

Updating the Database.

Storing the Database.

Retrieving of Data from Database.

Expected Features of DBMS Software

Enable End Users and Application Programmers to Share the Data.

Enable Data Shared Among Multiple Applications.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Should not Propagate and Store Data in New Files for Every New
Application.

Should Provide Facility for

Controlling Data Access.

Enforce Data Integrity.

Manage Concurrency Control.

Restoring the Data in System Failures.

Database Management Systems Evolution

First Time Introduced During 1960s.

Relational Model First Defined By E.F. Codd (IBM) in 1970.

Objectives Behind Evolution

Provide Greater Independence Between Programs and Data.

Reduce The Maintenance Cost of Software.

Manage Complex Data Types and Structures.

Provide Easier and Faster Access to Data Even for Novice Users.

Provide Future Sensation for Powerful Platforms for Decision Support

Systems and Expert Systems.

Different Database Models

Flat File DBMS.

Hierarchical DBMS.

Network DBMS.

Relational DBMS.

Object-Oriented DBMS.

Object-Relational DBMS.

Data Warehousing.

Web-Enabled DBMS.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Database Models and Their Timelines

1960

1970

1980

1990

2000

Flat File
Hierarchical
Network
Relational
Object-Oriented
Object-Relational
Data Warehousing
Web-Enabled

Active Development

Legacy Systems

What is Meant By Database Application

It is an Application Program OR Set of Related Programs That is Used to

Perform a Series of Activities on Behalf of Database Users.

The Database Application Activities Include

Create Add New Data to Database.

Read Read Current Database data.

Update Update OR Modify Current Database Data.

Delete Delete Current Data From The Database.

Database as Per Oracle

As Per Oracle Database is a Collection of Data in One OR More Number of

Files.

The Database is a Collection of Logical Structures And Physical Structures

Which are Integrated and Configured FOR The Integrity of The System.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Logical Structures :

In Design State The System is Represented in the Form of Entity

Relationship Model, OR DFDs OR UML Diagrams.

In the Database State it is Representation of the Actual Metadata of

the Database Management System Software Which Will be in the form
of Tablespaces, Data Dictionary Objects Etc.

Physical Structures :

In This the System is Represented in the Form of Tables, Indexes,

Synonyms, Views etc. as Per the Database Software.

Database Should Have The Ability To Provide Access to External Tables for Files
Outside the Database, as if The Rows in the Files Were Rows in the Table.
The Course of Developing an Application Consists of

Creating Structures (Tables & Indexes)

Creating Synonyms for the Object Names.

View Objects in Different Databases.

Restricting Access to the Objects.

With in The Oracle Database, the Basic Structure is a Table Used to

Store Data.

The Different Tables Supported by Oracle Database are

Relational Tables

Object Relational Tables

Index Organized Tables

External Tables

Partitioned Tables

Materialized Views

Temporary Tables

Clustered Tables

Dropped Tables

Note: A Database Application may Contain all the Above Categories of Tables
OR May Contain Few Depending on the Application Type.
As the Data in the Database Grows, The Speed and Performance of Database
Decreases.
The Following Indexes are Provided by Oracle Products for Speed of Database

B+ Tree Indexes.

Bitmap Indexes.

Reverse Key Indexes.

Function Based Indexes.

Partitioned Indexes.

Text Indexes.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Domain Indexes.

Let us understand The Oracle Style for Data Storage

All the Logical Structures in the Database must be stored with in the Database
Only.
Oracle Maintains a Data Dictionary, Which Records Metadata About all the
Database Objects.
The Database Objects Which Need Physical Storage Space on the Computer
System, are Allocated Space Within a Table Space.

Table Space :

It is a Logical Storage Unit within Oracle Database and is not Visible

in the File System of the Machine on Which the Database Resides.

The Table Space Builds the Bridge Between the Oracle Database and
the File System in which the Table's OR Index Data is Stored.

It Consists of One OR More Number of Data Files of the Database.

A Data File can be Part of One and Only One Table Space.

There are Three Types of Table Spaces in Oracle:

Permanent Table Spaces.

Undo Table Spaces.

Temporary Tables Spaces.

Each Table OR Index stored in an Oracle Database Belongs to a Table

Space.

As Per Oracle 10g Minimum Two Table Spaces are Compulsory They are
System and SysAux Table Space, Both Used to Support Oracle Internal
Management.

The System Table Space is always Available When a Database is Open

and cannot be Taken Offline.

The System Table Space Stores the Data Dictionary OR Their Base Tables,
Respectively.

In 10g a Big File Table Space can be Created, Which can grow to The Size
of Tera Bytes of Space on Disk.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The General Architecture of Oracle

User Tier or View Layer

SGA

SQL*Plus
(Logical Layer or Business Tier)
Dispatch

Queue

Physical Data Storage Area

(Physical Tier)

General Facts about Relational Model

The Model was first outlined by Dr. E. F. Codd in 1970.
The Components of the Model are

Collection of Objects OR Relations that Store the Data.

A Set of Operators that can Act on the Relations to Produce Other

Relations.

Data Integrity for Accuracy and Consistency

A Relational Database Should Use Relations OR Two Dimensional

Tables to Store Information.

System and Data Modeling Importance

Data Models:
Data Models Help in Exploring Ideas and Improve the Understanding of the
Database Design FOR Both Developers And System Designers.

Purpose of Data Models:

Communicate

Describe

Categorize

Specify

Investigate
Evolve

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Analyze

Imitate
Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Objective of The Models:

To Produce a Model That Fits a Multitude of Users.

Should be understood by An End User.

Should Contain Sufficient Details for a Developer to Build the Database

System.

Relational Database Properties:

Should be Accessed and Modified by Executing STRUCTURED QUERY

LANGUAGE (SQL) Statements Only.

Should Contain a Collection of Tables With no Physical Pointers.

Should Use a Set of Operators.

Need Not Specify the Access Route to The Tables and Data.

There is no Need to Identify How the Data is arranged physically.

How to Communicate With RDBMS?

The Structured Query Language is used to Communicate With RDBMS.

Generic Features of Structured Query Language

It Allows the User to Communicate With the Server.

It is highly efficient.

It is Easy to Learn and Use.

Functionally Complete, By Allowing the User to

Define The System.
Retrieve and Manipulate the Data From The System.

The General Dialect is Similar to English Language.

The Entire Structure is built on Collection of Statements.

It is Platform Independent and Architecture Independent.

About Oracle 8

It is the First Object Capable Database.

It Provides a New Engine Which Supports

Object Oriented Programming.

Complex Data Types.

Complex Business Objects.

Full Compatibility with The Relational Concepts.

It Provides OLTP Applications, With

Sharing of Runtime Data Structures.

Large Buffer Caches

Deferrable Constrains.

It Supports Client Server

Distributed and Multi Tired.

It Can Scale Tens and Thousands of Concurrent Users.

and

Web

Based

Application

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

which

are

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

About Oracle 8i

It is The Database of Internet Computing.

It Provides Advanced Tools to Manage All Types of Data in Web Sites.

The Internet File System (IFS) Combines The Power FOR Ease of Use a
File System.

End Users Can Easily Access Files and Folders in Oracle IFS via a Variety
of Protocols.

It Enables the Users to Web - Enable Their Multimedia Data.

It Provides Full, Native Integration With Microsoft Transaction Server

(MTS).

It Provides High Performance Internet Platform for e-Commerce and

Data Warehousing.

The core pieces of Oracle Internet Platform are

Browser Based Clients to Process Presentation.

Application Servers to Execute Business

Presentation Logic to Browser Based Clients.

Databases to Execute Database Intensive Business Logic and Serve

Data.

Logic

and

Serve

Entity Relationship Model

In an Effective System Data should be divided into Discrete Categories

OR Entities.

An ER Model is an Illustration of Various Entities in a Business and the

Relationships between Them.

It is built During the Analysis Phase of the System Developing Life Cycle.

ER Model Separates The Information Required & The Business From the
Activities Performed.

ER Model Benefits

It Documents Information for The Organization in a Clear, Precise

Format.

Provides a Clear Picture of the Scope of The Information Requirement.

Provides an Easily Understood Pictorial Map for the Database Design.

It Offers An Effective Framework FOR Integrating Multiple Applications.

Key Components in ER Model

Entity

It is a Thing of Significance about Which the Information Need to

be known.

Attributes

It is something that Describes OR Qualifies an Entity.

Each Attribute May be Mandatory OR Optional.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Relation

It is any Rule OR Situation that Should be Satisfied Between the

Attribute AND Attributes of an Entity OR Entities.

Relational Database Terminology

Row OR Tuple

It Represents All Data Required for a Particular Instance in an Entity.

Each Row in an Entity is Uniquely Identified By Declaring it As PRIMARY

KEY OR UNIQUE .

The Order of the Rows is Not Significant, While Retrieving the Data.

Column OR Attribute

It Represents One Kind of Data in a Table Vertically Collected.

The Column Order is not significant when storing the Data.

Field

It can be found at the Intersection of a Row and a Column.

A Field Can Have Only One Value, OR May Not Have a Value At All.

The Absence of Value in Oracle is represented as NULL.

Relating Multiple Tables

Each Table Should Contain Data that Describes Exactly Only one Entity.

Data about Different Entities is Stored in Different tables.

RDBMS enables the data in one table to be related to another table by

using the foreign keys.

A Foreign Key is a Column OR a Set of Columns That Refer to a Primary

Key in the Same Table OR Another Table.

Structured Query Language Statements in Oracle

ORACLE SQL Compiles with Industry Accepted Standards.

The Different Categories Into Which the SQL Statements Fall Are As
Follows.

Data Retrieval Statement

SELECT Statement

Data Manipulation Language Statements

INSERT Statement.

UPDATE Statement.

DELETE Statement.

Data Definition Language Statements

CREATE Statement.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

ALTER Statement.

DROP Statement.

RENAME Statement.

TRUNCATE statement.

Transaction Control Language Statements

COMMIT Statement.

ROLLBACK Statement.

SAVEPOINT Statement.

Data Control Language Statements

GRANT Statement.

REVOKE Statement.

About The SQL Buffer

All Commands of SQL are Typed at the SQL prompt.

Only One SQL Statement is Managed in The SQL Buffer.

The Current SQL Statement Replaces the Previous SQL Statement in the
Buffer.

The SQL Statement Can be Divided Into Different Lines Within the SQL
Buffer.

Only One Line i.e., The Current Line Can be Active at a Time in the SQL
Buffer.

At SQL Prompt, Editing is Possible Only in The Current SQL Buffer Line.

Every statement of SQL should be terminated Using Semi Colon ;.

One SQL statement can Contain Only One Semi Colon.

To Run the Previous OR Current SQL Statement in the Buffer Type / at

SQL Prompt.

To Open The SQL Editor Type ED at SQL Prompt.

Connecting to Oracle OR SQL*Plus

Double Click the SQL*Plus Short Cut on the Desktop.

Start Run Type SQLPlus OR SQLPlusW in Open Box and Click OK.

Start Programs Oracle Application Development SQL*Plus.

In the Login Box OR Login Prompt Type the User Name and Password as
Supplied by the Administrator.

The Host String is Optional and is provided by the Administrator.

Creating and Managing Tables.

An Oracle Database is a Collection of Multiple Data Structures.

These Data Structures are Called as Database objects.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Major Database Objects Associated with Database Programmer are

Table Used to Store Data, Basic Unit in Oracle.

View Logically represents subsets of data from one OR more

tables.

Sequence Used to Generate Primary Key values.

Synonym Used to give alternate names to objects.

Index It is Used to Improve The Performance of Some Queries.

Tables in ORACLE 8 / 9 / 10

Tables can be Created at Any Time, Even When The Users are Using the
Database.

Size of The Table Need Not be Specified.

The Structure of The Table Can be Modified Online.

Rules to Create A Table :

The User Should Have Permission on CREATE TABLE Command, and

Storage Area Should be Allocated.

The Table Name Should Begin with a Letter and can be 1 30 Characters
Long.

Table Names can Contain Combination of

A Z (OR) a - z (OR) 0 9 (OR) -, $, #

Names Cannot be Duplicated for Another Object Name in the Same

ORACLE Server.

Names Cannot be Oracle Servers Reserved Words.

Table Names Are Not Case Sensitive in Oracle.

Table is a Collection of Attribute Names and Oracle Data Types and

Required Width along With Required Constraints.

Create Table Statement

Syntax
SQL> CREATE TABLE <Table_Name>
(
Column_Name1 <DataType>(Width),

Column_Name2 <DataType>(Width),
Column_NameN <DataType>(Width)
);

Note

All Data Types May Not Have The Width Property.

No Two Columns in The Same Table Can Have the Same Name.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Building Blocks of SQL Statements

Data Types.

Literals.

Format Models.

NULLS.

Pseudo Columns.

Comments.

Database Objects.

Schema Object Names and Qualifiers.

Syntax for Schema Objects.

Parts of SQL Statements.

Data Types in Oracle

Each Value in ORACLE is Manipulated by a Data Type.

The Data Type Associates a Fixed Set of Properties With that Value
Stored.

The Values of One Data Type are Different From Another Data Type.

The Data Type Defines The Domain of Values That Each Column Can
Contain.

Built-in Data Types

CHARACTER DATA TYPES.

NUMBER DATA TYPES.

LONG AND RAW DATA TYPES.

DATETIME DATA TYPES.

LARGE OBJECT DATATYPES.

ROWID DATATYPES.

Character Data Types

They Store Character Data, Which Can be Alphanumeric Data Collection.

The Information can be

Words OR Free Form Text

Database OR National Character set

This Data Type is Less Restrictive Than Other Data Types and has Very
Few Properties.

The Data is Stored in Strings With Byte Collections as Values.

The Information Can Belong to Either

7 Bit ASCII(American
Interchange) Character Set.

Standard

Code

for

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Information

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

EBCDIC (Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code)

ORACLE Supports Both Single & Multi Byte Character Sets.

The Different Character Data Types are :

CHAR

VARCHAR2

NCHAR

NVARCHAR2

CHAR Data Type

It Specifies Fixed Length Character Strings.

The Size should be specified.

If the Data is less Than the Original Specified Size, Blank Pads Are
Applied.

The Default Length is 1 Byte and the Maximum is 2000 Bytes.

The Size of a Character Can Range From 1 Byte to 4 Bytes Depending on

The Database Character Set.

NCHAR Data Type

First Time Defined in ORACLE 9i, and Contains Unicode Data Only.

Maximum Length is Determined by the National Character Set Definition.

Maximum Size is 2000 Bytes and Size Has to be Specified.

Padded if Data is Shorter than Specified.

VARCHAR2 Data Type

Specifies the Variable Length Character String.

Minimum Size is 1 Byte and the Maximum Size is 4000 Bytes.

It Occupies Only that Space for Which the Data is Supplied.

NVARCHAR2 Data Type

First Time Defined in ORACLE 9i.

It is Defined for UNICODE Data Only.

The Minimum Size is 1 Byte and Maximum Size is 4000 Bytes.

Numeric Data Types

Number Data Type

It Stores Zero, Positive and Negative Fixed and Floating Point Numbers.

The Range of Magnitude is

1.0 * 10-130

to 9.99 * 10+125

The General Declaration is

NUMBER(P, S)

P It Specifies the Precision, i.e., The Total Number of Digits (1 to

38).
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

S It Specifies the Scale, i.e., the Number of Digits to the Right of

the Decimal Point, Can Range From 84 to 127.

Float Data Type

It Facilitates to Have a Decimal Point Anywhere From the First to The

Last Digit, OR Can Have no Decimal Point at All.

The Scale Value is Not Applicable to Floating Point Numbers, as the

Number of Digits That Can appear After the Decimal Point is Not
Restricted.

Syntax

FLOAT It Specifies a Floating Point Number With Decimal Precision 38

OR Binary Precision of 126.

Float (b) It specifies a Floating Point Number with Binary Precision b.

The precision can range from 1 to 126.

To Convert From Binary to Decimal Precision Multiply b by

0.30103.

To Convert From Decimal to Binary Precision Multiply the Decimal

Precision by 3.32193.

The Maximum of 126 Digits of Binary Precision is Roughly Equivalent to

38 Digits of Decimal Precision.

Long Data Type

This Data Type Stores Variable Length Character Strings.

It is Used to Store Very Lengthy Text Strings.

The Length of LONG Values May be Limited By The Memory Available on

the Computer.

LONG Columns Can be Referenced in

SELECT Lists

SET Clause of UPDATE Statements

VALUES Clause of INSERT Statements.

Restrictions

A Single Table Can Contain Only One LONG Column.

Object Types Cannot be Created on LONG Column Attribute.

LONG Columns Cannot Appear in WHERE Clauses OR in Integrity

Constraints.

INDEXES Cannot be Created on LONG Columns.

LONG Can be Returned Through a Function, but not Through a Stored

Procedure.

It Can be Declared in a PL/SQL Unit But Cannot be Referenced in SQL.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DATE & TIME Data Types

DATE Data Type

It is Used to Store DATE and TIME Information.

The Dates Can be Specified as Literals, Using the Gregorian Calendar.

The Information Revealed by DATE is

Century, Year, Month, Date, Hour, Minute, Second

The Default DATE Format in ORACLE is DD-MON-YY, and is Specified in

NLS_DATE_ FORMAT Variable.

The Default TIME Accepted by ORACLE DATE is 12:00:00 AM (Midnight).

The Default DATE Accepted by ORACLE DATE is The First Day of the
Current Month.

The DATE Range Provided by ORACLE is JANUARY 1, 4712 BC to

DECEMBER 31, 9999 AD.

TIMESTAMP Data Type

It is an Extension of the DATE Data Type.

It stores The Data in the Form of

Century, Year, Month, Date, Hour, Minute, Second

Syntax

TIMESTAMP[{FractionalSecondsPrecision}]

FractionalSecondsPrecision Optionally Specifies the Number of Digits

in the Fractional Part of The SECONDS to be Considered in Datetime Field.

It Can be a Number in the Range of 0 9 ,With Default as 6.

RAW & LONG RAW Data Types

RAW and LONG RAW Data Types are Intended for Storage of Binary Data
OR BYTE Strings.

RAW and LONG RAW are Variable Length Data Types.

They are Mostly Used to Store Graphics, Sounds, Scanned Documents etc.

The ORACLE Converts the RAW & LONG RAW Data into HEXADECIMAL
Form.

Each Hexadecimal Character Represents Four Bits of RAW Data.

LARGE OBJECT (LOB) Data Types

The Built in LOB Data Types are

* BLOB

* CLOB

* NCLOB

These Data Types Store the Data Internally.

The Bfile is a LOB Which Stores the Data Externally.

The LOB Data Types Can Store Large and Unstructured Data Like Text,
Image, Video and Spatial Data.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Maximum Storage Size is Up to 4 GB.

LOB Columns Contain LOB Locators, Which Can Refer to Out-of-Line OR

In-Line LOB Values.

LOBs Selection Actually Returns the LOBs Locator.

BLOB Data Type

It Stores Unstructured Binary Large Objects.

They are Bit Streams With no Character Set Semantics.

They are Provided with Full Transactional Support with Special Methods.

CLOB Data Type

It Stores Single Byte and Multi Byte Character Data.

Both Fixed Width and Variable Width Character sets are Supported.

They are Provided With Full Transactional Support with Special Methods.

NCLOB Data Type

It Stores UNICODE Data Using the NATIONAL CHARACTER Set.

BFILE Data Type

It Enables Access to Binary File LOBs Which are Stored in the File
Systems Outside ORACLE.

A BFILE Column OR The Attribute Stores the BFILE Locator.

The BFILE Locator Maintains The Directory Alias and the Filename.

The Binary File LOBs do not Participate in Transactions and are Not
Recoverable.

The Maximum Size is 4 GB.

ROWID Data Type

Each Row in the Database Has an Address.

The Rows Address Can be Queried Using the PSEUDO Column ROWID.

ROWIDs Efficiently Support Partitioned Tables and Indexes.

Illustrative Example To Create A Table

SQL> CREATE TABLE Students
(
StudID
Fname
Lname
DOB
DOJ
Fees
Gender
);

NUMBER(6),
VARCHAR2(30),
VARCHAR2(30),
DATE,
DATE,
NUMBER(7,2),
VARCHAR2(1)

SQL> CREATE TABLE LabSpecification

(
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

ProdID
ProdPhoto
ProdGraphic
ProdDesc
);

NUMBER(6),
BLOB,
BFILE,
LONG

Populating the Data into Tables

INSERT Statement
The INSERT Statement is Used to Add Rows To a

Relational Table.

Views Base Table.

A Partition of a Partition Table.

A Sub Partition of a Composite Partitioned Table

An Object Table

An Object Views Base Table.

Insertion of Data into a Table Can be Executed in Two Ways.

Conventional INSERT.

Direct Path INSERT.

In Conventional Insert Statement, ORACLE Reuses Free Space in the Table into
Which the Data in Being Inserted and Maintains Referential Integrity
Constraints.
In Direct - Path Insert, ORACLE Appends the Inserted Data after Existing Data
in the Table; the Free Space is not reused.

Syntax
SQL> INSERT INTO <Table_Name>(COL1, COL2, .. )
VALUES(VALUE1, VALUE2, ....);

Let us understand the Different Situations

Inserting Data into All Columns of a Table
SQL> INSERT INTO Students
VALUES
(
1234,
SAMPATH,
KUMAR,
29-JAN-80,
30-MAR-95,
25000,
M
);

In This Case the Values Should be Provided to All the Columns That Exist
Inside the Table.

The Order of Values Declared in the VALUES Clause Should Follow the
Original Order of the Columns in Table.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The CHAR, VARCHAR and DATE Type Data should be declared in Single
Quotes.

Numerical Information can be applied normally.

Inserting Data into Required Columns

SQL>INSERT INTO Students
(
Studno,
Fname,
Lname,
DOJ,
Gender
)
VALUES
(
1235,
Raj,
Kumar,
20-Feb-85,
M
);

In This Case the Order of Columns Declared in INSERT Need Not Be the
Same As That of the Original Table Order.

The Data Values in the VALUES Clause Should Match With that of INSERT
List.

The Columns Not Supplied With Data are Filled With NULL Values, Until
the NOT NULL Constraint is Declared.

Inserting NULL Values into Table

NULL Values can be inserted in two ways.

IMPLICIT Omit The Column From List.

EXPLICT Specify The NULL Keyword.

It is Better To Specify Empty String Only FOR Character Strings and Dates.

The Targeted Column Should Not be Set With NOT NULL Constraint.

SQL>INSERT INTO Students

(
StudNo,
Fname,
Lname,
DOB,
DOJ,
Fees,
Gender
)
VALUES
(
1234,
Krishna,
NULL,
,
28-FEB-04,
NULL,
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

M
);

Inserting Special Values into Table

SYSDATE Function

It is a PSEUDO COLUMN Provided by The Oracle.

The Function Returns the CURRENT DATE and TIME from the System Clock.

USER Function

It is Special Function, Which Records the Current USER Name.

SQL>INSERT INTO Students

(
StudNo,
Fname,
DOJ,
Fees,
Gender,
InsertBy
)
VALUES
(
1234,
Mohan,
SYSDATE,
25000,
M,
USER
);

Supplying Data at Run Time

Substitution Variables

These Variables are Used to Store Values Temporarily.

The Values can be Stored Temporarily Through

Single Ampersand (&)

Double Ampersand (&&)

DEFINE and ACCEPT Commands

The Single Ampersand Substitution Variable Applies for Each Instance When
The SQL Statement is Create OR Executed.

The Double Ampersand Substitution Variable Applies for All Instances Until
That SQL Statement is Existing.

Single Ampersand

Substitution Variable

SQL>INSERT INTO Students

(
StudID,
Fname,
LName,
Dob,
Fees
)
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

VALUES
(
&StudNo,
&FirstName,
&LastName,
&DateofBirth,
25000
);

Double Ampersand Substitution Variable

SQL>INSERT INTO Students
(
StudNo,
Fname,
Lname,
Dob,
Doj,
Fees,
Gender
)
VALUES
(
&StudNo,
&FirstName,
&LastName,
&Dob,
SYSDATE,
&&Fees,
&Gender
);

Saving The SQL Buffer Text as SQL Script.

Method 1

At the SQL Prompt Use the Save Command including the Required Path and
File Name.

SQL> SAVE C:\MyScripts\First.SQL

To Replace the Existing SQL Script File With New Information.

SQL>SAVE C:\MyScripts\First.SQL REPLACE

Method 2

Open Any Text Editor Type the Required SQL Statement.

SAVE The SQL Statement in the Required Drive and Folder USING SQL
Extension.

Data Retrieval Standards Using SELECT Statement

Querying the Data From Tables
QUERY

It is an Operation That Retrieves Data From One OR More TABLES OR

VIEWS.

SELECT Statement

The SELECT Statement is Used to Retrieve Data From One OR More

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

TABLES.
OBJECT TABLES.
VIEWS.
OBJECT VIEWS.
MATERIALIZED VIEWS.

Prerequisites

The User Must Have the SELECT Privileges on the Specified Object.
The SELECT ANY TABLE Allows to Select the Data from Any Recognized
Object.

Capabilities of SQL SELECT Statement

The SELECT Statement Can be Used to Select OR Retrieve Data From the
Object Using Any One of the Following Criteria.
SELECTION
PROJECTION
JOIN

SELECTION

It Chooses the Rows in a Table That are Expected to be Returned by a

Query.

PROJECTION

It Chooses the Columns in a Table that are Expected to Return by a

Query.

JOIN

It Chooses the Data in From One OR More Number of Tables by

Creating a Link Between Them.

Basic SELECT Syntax

SQL> SELECT
[DISTINCT]
[*] {Column1 [Alias] , .. }
FROM Table_Name;

SELECT Keyword Identifies Columns.

FROM Clause Identifies Tables .

SELECT Specifies a List of Columns.

DISTINCT Suppresses Duplicates.
* Projection Operator to Select All Columns from the Table.
COLUMN Selects the Named Column.
Alias Gives Selected Columns Alternate Column Name.
FROM Table_Name Specifies the Table Containing the Columns.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Sample Database Used

Table Name:

DEPT

Column Name
Data Type
-------------------------------------Deptno
NUMBER
Dname
VARCHAR2
Loc
VARCHAR2
Table Name: Emp
Column Name
Data Type
-------------------------------------Empno
NUMBER
Ename
VARCHAR2
Deptno
NUMBER
Job
VARCHAR2
Sal
NUMBER
Comm
NUMBER
Mgr
NUMBER
HireDate
DATE
Table Name: SalGrade
Column Name
Data Type
-------------------------------------Hisal
NUMBER
Losal
NUMBER
Grade
NUMBER

ER Model FOR Class Room Sessions

Retrieving Data From All Columns of a Table

FOR This Purpose The Projection Operator * is Used.

The Operator Projects Data From All The Columns Existing in The Table With
All Records.
The Data is Displayed in a Table Format.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Illustrative Examples
SQL> SELECT *
FROM Emp;
EMPNO
-------7839
7698
7782
7566
7654
7499
7844
7900
7521
7902
7369
7788
7876
7934

ENAME
--------KING
BLAKE
CLARK
JONES
MARTIN
ALLEN
TURNER
JAMES
WARD
FORD
SMITH
SCOTT
ADAMS
MILLER

JOB
-------------PRESIDENT
MANAGER
MANAGER
MANAGER
SALESMAN
SALESMAN
SALESMAN
CLERK
SALESMAN
ANALYST
CLERK
ANALYST
CLERK
CLERK

MGR
--------7839
7839
7839
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7566
7902
7566
7788
7782

HIREDATE
------------17-NOV-81
01-MAY-81
09-JUN-81
02-APR-81
28-SEP-81
20-FEB-81
08-SEP-81
03-DEC-81
22-FEB-81
03-DEC-81
17-DEC-80
09-DEC-82
12-JAN-83
23-JAN-82

SAL
-----5000
2850
2450
2975
1250
1600
1500
950
1250
3000
800
3000
1100
1300

COMM
--------

1400
300
0
500

DEPTNO
---------10
30
10
20
30
30
30
30
30
20
20
20
20
10

14 rows selected.
SQL> SELECT *
FROM Dept;
DEPTNO
---------10
20
30
40

DNAME
---------------ACCOUNTING
RESEARCH
SALES
OPERATIONS

LOC
-------------NEW YORK
DALLAS
CHICAGO
BOSTON

LOSAL
---------700
1201
1401
2001
3001

HISAL
---------1200
1400
2000
3000
9999

SQL> SELECT *
FROM SalGrade;
GRADE
---------1
2
3
4
5

The SELECT Statement can be typed in one Line OR can be Split into Multiple
Lines.

Retrieving Data From Specific Columns

SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal, Deptno
FORM Emp;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Deptno, Dname, Loc

FROM Dept;
SQL> SELECT HiSal, LoSal, Grade
FROM SalGrade;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, HireDate
FROM Emp;

The Column Names Need Not Be in The Same Order as Table.

The Columns Should be Separated Using Comma.

The Column Names Can be Separated Onto Different Lines Within the SQL
BUFFER.

The Casing of Column Names is Not Important.

Column Heading Defaults

The Default Justification of The Data After it is Retrieved From the Table is..

LEFT DATE and CHARACTER Data.

RIGHT NUMERIC Data.

The Default Display of the Data is Always is UPPER Casing.

The CHARACTER and DATE Column Headings can be Truncated, But Number
Columns Cannot be Truncated.

Applying Arithmetical Operations

Arithmetic Expressions Can be Implemented Through SELECT Statement.

Arithmetic Expressions Can be Implemented to

Modify the Way the Data is Displayed.

Perform Calculations.

Implement WHAT IF Scenarios.

An Arithmetic Expression can contain

Simple Column Names

Constant Numeric Values

Arithmetic Operators.

Arithmetic Operators

The Arithmetic Operators Can be Used to Create Expressions on NUMBER

and DATE Data Type Columns.

The Arithmetic Operators Supported Are

Addition

Subtraction

Multiply

Divide

The Arithmetic Operators Can be Used in Any Clause of a SQL Statement,

Except the FROM Clause.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL*Plus Ignores Blank Spaces Before and After the Arithmetic Operator.

SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, Sal + 500

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, Sal 1000
FROM Emp;

Operator Precedence

Multiplication and Division Take Priority over Addition and Subtraction(*, /,

+, - )

Operators of the Same Priority are Evaluated from Left to Right.

To Prioritize Evaluation and to Increase Clarity Parenthesis Can be

Implemented.

SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, (12 * Sal ) + 100

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, 12 * (Sal + 500)
FROM Emp;

Handling NULL Values

NULL:

It is a Value Which is

Unavailable.

Unassigned.

Unknown.

Inapplicable.

A NULL is Not Same as Zero OR Blank Space.

If a Row Lacks the Data for a Particular Column, Than That Value is Said to
Be NULL OR to Containing NULL.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal, Comm

FROM Emp;

If Any Column Value in an Arithmetic Expression is NULL, The Overall Result

is Also NULL.

The Above Situation is Termed as NULL PROPAGATION and Has to be

Handled Very Carefully.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal, Comm, Sal + Comm

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal, Comm, 12 * (Sal + Comm)
FROM Emp;

NVL Function

The NVL Function is Used to Convert a NULL Value to an Actual Value.

Syntax
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

NVL(Expr1, Expr2)
Expr1: It is the Source Value OR Expression That May Contain NULL.
Expr2: It is the Target Value for Converting NULL.

NVL Function Can be Used to Convert Any Data Type, The Return Value is
Always The Same as the Data Type of Expr1.

The Data Types of The Source And Destination Must Match.

NVL(Comm, 0)
NVL(Hiredate, 01-JUN-99)
NVL(Job , Not Assigned)
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Comm, Sal + NVL(Comm, 0)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Comm, (Sal * 12) + NVL(Comm, 0)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Comm, (Sal + 500) + NVL (Comm, 0)
FROM Emp;

Working With Aliases

An ALIAS is an Alternate Name Given for any ORACLE OBJECT.

Aliases in Oracle are of two types

Column Alias

Column Alias Renames a Column Heading in a Query.

The Column Alias is Specified in The SELECT List by Declaring the Alias After
the Column Name by Using the Space Separator.

ALIAS Heading Appears in UPPER Casing by Default.

The Alias Should be Declared in Double Quotes if it is Against the

Specifications of Naming Conversions of Oracle.

The AS Keyword Can be Used Between The Column Name and Alias.

An Alias Effectively Renames the SELECT List Item for the Duration of that
Query Only.

An Alias Cannot be Used, Any Where in THE SELECT List for Operational
Purpose.

Table Alias

Table Alias Renames the Original Name of the Table in a SQL Statement.

Table Aliases are Very Important When Working With Self Joins.

The Table Alias is Applied for the Current SQL Statement Only.

It is an Important Source When Implementing the Standards of MERGE

Statements, Correlated Queries and Analytic Functions.

SQL> SELECT
Empno

Numbers,

Ename

Name,

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Sal

Basic Salary,

Job

Designation

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT
Deptno AS Department ID,
Dname AS Department Name,
Loc

Place

FROM Dept;
SQL> SELECT
Hisal

Maximum Range,

Losal

Minimum Range,

Grade
FROM Salgrade ;

Literals in ORACLE

A LITERAL and a CONSTANT Value are Synonyms to One Another and Refer
to a Fixed Data Value.

The Types of LITERALS Recognized by ORACLE are

TEXT Literals.

INTEGER Literals.

NUMBER Literals.

INTERVAL Literals.

TEXT Literals

It Specifies a TEXT OR CHARACTER literal.

It is Used to Specify Values Whenever TEXT OR CHAR Appear in

Expressions

Conditions

SQL Function

SQL Statements.

TEXT Literal Should be Enclosed in Single Quotes.

They have Properties of Both CHAR and VARCHAR2 Data Types.

A TEXT Literal Can Have a Maximum Length of 4000 Bytes.

Example:
Employee Information
Managers Specification
Nnchar Literal

Using LITERAL Character Strings

A Literal that is Declared in a SELECT List Can be a CHARACTER, a NUMBER,

OR a DATE.

A Literal is Not a Column Name OR a Column Alias.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

A LITERAL is Printed for Each Row, That is Retrieved by the SELECT

Statement.

LITERAL Strings of Free-Form Text Can be Included in The Query as Per The
Requirement.

DATE and CHARACTER Literals Must be Enclosed Within the Single Quotation
Marks.

LITERALS Increase the Readability of The Output.

A LITERAL is Printed for Each Row, That is Retrieved by the SELECT

Statement.

LITERAL Strings of Free-Form Text Can be Included in The Query as Per The
Requirement.

DATE and CHARACTER Literals Must be Enclosed Within the Single Quotation
Marks.

LITERALS Increase the Readability of The Output.

SQL> SELECT Ename|| : || Month Salary = || Sal AS Salaries

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT
The Designation of || Ename|| is ||Job As Designation
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT
The Annual Salary of ||Ename|| is ||Sal * 12 AS Annual_Salary
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Dname|| Department is Located At ||Loc Locations
FROM Dept;
SQL> SELECT Ename|| Joined The Organization on ||Hiredate
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT
Ename|| Works in Department Number ||Deptno
|| as ||Job
FROM Emp;

Applying Concatenation Operator

The Concatenation Operator Links Columns to Other Columns, Arithmetic

Expressions, or Constant Values.

Columns on Either Side of the Operator are Combined to Make a Single

Output Column.

The Resultant Column is Treated as an CHARACTER EXPRESSION.

The Concatenation Operator is Represented in ORACLE by Double Pipe

Symbol (||).

SQL> SELECT Empno|| ||Ename||, Designation is

||Job Employees Information
FROM Emp;

Suppressing Duplicate Rows in Output

Until it is Instructed SQL*Plus Displays the Results of a Query Without

Eliminating Duplicate Rows.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

To Eliminate the Duplicate Rows in the Result, the DISTINCT Keyword is

Used.

Multiple Columns can be Declared After the DISTINCT Qualifier.

The DISTINCT Qualifier Affects all the Selected Columns, and Represents a
DISTINCT Combination of the Columns.

SQL> SELECT DISTINCT Deptno

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT DISTINCT Deptno
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT DISTINCT MGR
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT DISTINCT Job, Deptno
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT DISTINCT Deptno, Job
FROM Emp;

Filtering of Records

The Number of Rows Returned by a QUERY can be Limited Using the WHERE
Clause.

A WHERE Clause Contains a Condition That Must be Met and Should Directly
Follow the FROM Clause.

Syntax
SQL> SELECT [DISTINCT] [*] {Column1 [Alias] , .}
FROM Table_Name
[WHERE Condition(s)];

The WHERE Clause Can Compare

Values in Columns

Literal Values

Arithmetic Expressions

Functions

The Components of WHERE Clause are

Column Name.

Comparison Operator.

Column Name (OR) Constant (OR) List of Values.

The CHARACTER Strings and DATES Should be Enclosed in Single Quotation

Marks.

CHARACTER Values are Case Sensitive and DATE Values are Format
Sensitive (DD-MON-YY)

The Comparison Operators are Used in Such Conditions That Compare One
Expression to Another.

The Different Comparison Operators are

Equality Operator =
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Not Equality Operator <>, !=, ^=.

Greater Than Operator >

Less Than Operator <

Greater Than or Equal to Operator >=

Less Than or Equal to Operator <=

The Format of The WHERE Clause is

WHERE Expr OPERATOR VALUE.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Hiredate , Deptno, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal >= 3000;
SQL> SELECT
Ename|| Joined on ||Hiredate Employees Joining Dates
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate = 01JAN95;
SQL> SELECT
Ename|| Works in Department||Deptno Employees and Deaprtments
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno <> 20;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Deptno, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Job <> CLERK;
SQL> SELECT Ename Name , Sal Basic, Sal * 12 Annual
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal * 12 > 60000;

Applying Logical Operators to Filters

The LOGICAL OPERATORS Combine the Results of Two COMPONENT

Conditions to Produce a Single Result.

The LOGICAL OPERATORS Provided by ORACLE are

Logical Conjunction Operator AND

Logical Disjunction Operator

Logical Negation operator NOT

AND Operator

It Returns TRUE if Both or All Component Conditions are TRUE.

It Returns FALSE if Either is FALSE, Else Returns Unknown.

Truth Table
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

AND

TRUE

FALSE

NULL

TRUE

NULL

FALSE

NULL

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Deptno, Job

FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20 AND Job = 'MANAGER';
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal >= 1100 AND Job = CLERK;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename , Job , Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10 AND Job = CLERK;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal , Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal >= 1500 AND Sal > 5000;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE (Sal >= 1500 AND Sal <= 5000) AND
Job = MANAGER;

OR Operator

It Returns TRUE if Either of the Component Condition is TRUE.

It Returns FALSE if Both are FALSE, Else Returns Unknown.

Truth Table
OR

TRUE

FALSE

NULL

TRUE

FALSE

NULL

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Deptno, Job

FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20 OR Job = 'MANAGER';
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal >= 1100 OR Job = CLERK;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10 OR Job = MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

WHERE Sal >= 1500 OR Sal >= 5000;

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job, Deptno
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10 OR Deptno = 20;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = CLERK OR Job = MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE (Sal <= 2500 OR Sal >= 5000) OR
Job = MANAGER;

NOT Operator

It Returns TRUE if the Following Condition is FALSE.

It Returns FALSE if the Following Condition is TRUE.

If the Condition is Unknown, it Returns Unknown.

Truth Table
NOT

TRUE

FALSE

NULL

NOT
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp

WHERE NOT Job = MANAGER;

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE NOT Sal > 5000;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE NOT Sal < 5000 ;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE NOT Hiredate = 20-FEB-81;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal, Deptno
FROM Emp
WHERE NOT Job = SALESMAN AND Deptno = 30;

Combination of AND and OR Operators

SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE (Sal > 1100 OR Job = CLERK) AND Deptno = 20;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE (Deptno = 10 AND Job = MANAGER ) OR
Sal >= 3000;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job, Sal
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

FROM Emp
WHERE (Deptno = 10 AND Job = MANAGER ) OR
(Deptno = 20 AND Sal >= 3000);

Some Things To Note

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Job > MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Job < MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate > 20-FEB-1981;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate < 20-FEB-1981;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate <> 20-FEB-1981;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Job <> CLERK;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Comm
FROM Emp
WHERE Comm IS NULL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Comm
FROM Emp
WHERE Comm IS NOT NULL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE NOT Job > MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE NOT Hiredate = 17-DEC-1980;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE NOT Hiredate > 17-DEC-1980;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE NOT Hiredate > 17-DECEMBER-1980;

Rules of Operator Precedence

The Default Precedence Order is

All Comparison Operators

NOT Operator
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

AND Operator

OR Operator

The Precedence Can be Controlled Using Parenthesis.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno, Job, Sal

FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10 OR
Deptno = 20 AND
Job = 'SALESMAN' AND
Sal > 2500 OR
Sal < 1500;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10 OR
(Deptno = 20 AND Job = 'SALESMAN) AND
(Sal > 2500 OR Sal < 1500);

SQL*Plus Operators
BETWEEN AND Operator

This Operator is Used to Display Rows Based on a Range of Values.

The Declared Range is Inclusive.

The Lower Limit Should be Declared First.

The Negation of this Operator is NOT BETWEEN AND

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job

FROM Emp
WHERE Sal
BETWEEN 1000 AND 1500;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal
NOT BETWEEN 1000 AND 1500;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Job
BETWEEN MANAGER AND SALESMAN;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Job
NOT BETWEEN MANAGER AND SALESMAN;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate
BETWEEN 17-FEB-1981 AND 20-JUN-1983;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

NOT BETWEEN 17-FEB-1981 AND 20-JUN-1983 ;

IN Operator

The Operator is Used to Test for Values in a Specified List.

The Operator Can be Used Upon Any Data type.

The Negation of the Operator is NOT IN.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job

FROM Emp
WHERE Ename IN(FORD, ALLEN) ;
SQL> SELECT Ename , Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Ename NOT IN(FORD, ALLEN);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Deptno
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno IN(10, 30);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Deptno
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno NOT IN(10, 30);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate IN(20-FEB-1981, 09-JUN-1981);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate NOT IN(20-FEB-1981, 09-JUN-1981);

IS NULL Operator

The Operator Tests for NULL Values.

lt is the Only Operator That can be Used to Test for NULLs.

The Negation is IS NOT NULL.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno, Comm

FROM Emp
WHERE Comm IS NULL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno, Job, MGR
FROM Emp
WHERE MGR IS NULL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno, Comm
FROM Emp
WHERE Comm IS NOT NULL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno, Comm, MGR
FROM Emp
WHERE MGR IS NOT NULL;

LIKE Operator

The LIKE Operator is Used to Search for a Matching Character Patterns.

The Character Pattern Matching Operation is Referred as a WILD CARD

SEARCH.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Available WILD CARDS in Oracle are

% Used to Represent Any Sequence of Zero or More Characters.

Represents Any Single Character, Only At That Position.

The WILD CARD Symbols Can be Used in Any Combination With Literal
Characters.

For Finding Exact Match For % and _ the ESCAPE Option Has to be Used
along with \ Symbol.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Job

FROM Emp
WHERE Ename LIKE S%;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Ename NOT LIKE S%;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Ename LIKE _A%;
SQL> SELECT Ename Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Ename NOT LIKE _A%;
SQL> SELECT Ename Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Ename = SM%;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE SM% LIKE Ename;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate LIKE %-FEB-1981;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate LIKE 03-%-1981;
SQL> SELECT *
FROM Dept
WHERE Dname LIKE %\_% ESCAPE \;

Ordering Information

The Order of Rows Returned in the Result of a Query Undefined.

The ORDER BY Clause Can be Used to SORT The Rows in the Required Order.

The ORDER BY Clause Should be the Last Clause in the Order of All Clauses
in The SELECT Statement.

An Expression or an Alias Can be Specified to ORDER BY Clause for Sorting.

Default Ordering of Data is Ascending

Numbers 0 9

Dates Earliest Latest.

Strings A Z.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

NULLS Last.

Syntax
SQL> SELECT [DISTINCT] [*] {Column1 [Alias] , .}
FROM Table_Name
[WHERE Condition(s)]
[ORDER BY {Column, Expr}[ASC/DESC]];

The Default Ordering Upon a Column is ASCENDING, to Change the Default

Ordering DESC Should be Used After the Column Name.

Sorting Can be Implemented on Column

Implemented Upon Multiple Columns.

The Controversy of Sorting is Broken Only When There Arises a Conflict of

Consistency Upon the Data in a Column.

Aliases,

and

Can

Also

SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Deptno, Hiredate

FROM Emp
ORDER BY Hiredate;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Deptno, Hiredate
FROM Emp
ORDER BY Hiredate DESC;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER
ORDER BY Sal;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal >= 2500
ORDER BY Job, Ename DESC;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, Sal * 12 Annsal
FROM Emp
ORDER BY Annsal;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal
FROM Emp
ORDER BY Deptno, Sal, Hiredate;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal >= 2000
ORDER BY Hiredate, Sal DESC;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Experiencing the Power of

SQL Functions

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL Functions are Built into ORACLE and are available for use in Various
Appropriate SQL Statements.

The SQL Functions Can be Used to

Perform Calculations on Data.

Modify Individual Data Items.

Manipulate Output for Groups of Rows.

Format DATES and NUMBERS for Display.

Convert Column Data Types.

SQL Functions May Accept Arguments and Always Return a Value, and Can
be Nested.

If an SQL Function is Called with a NULL Argument, then a NULL is

Returned.

SQL Function Types

SQL Identifies Two Types of Functions

SINGLE Row Functions.

MULTIPLE Row Functions.

SINGLE Row Functions

These Functions Return a Single Result for Every Row of a Queried Table or
View.

MULTIPLE Row Functions

These Functions Manipulate GROUPS of Rows and Return One Result Per
Group of Rows.

The Single Row Functions Can Appear in

SELECT List.

WHERE Clause and ORDER BY Clause.

START WITH Clause.

CONNECT BY Clause.

The Single Row Functions are Categorized as

CHARACTER Functions.

NUMBER Functions.

DATE Functions.

CONVERSION Functions.

SINGLE Row Functions are Used to Manipulate Data Items.

They Can Accept One or More Arguments and Return One Value For Each
Row Returned By the Query.

The Argument for a SINGLE Row Function can be

User Supplied Constant.

Variable Value.

Column Name.

Expression.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Syntax
FunctionName(Column/Expr, [Arg1, Arg2,])

Single Row Functions Features

Acts on Each Row Returned in the Query.

Returns One Result Per Row.

May Return a Data Value of a Different Data Type Than That Referenced.

May Expect One or More Arguments.

Can be Used in SELECT, WHERE and ORDER BY Clauses.

It Can be Nested.

Specification Behavior of Functions

Character Functions

Accept Character Input and Can Return Both Character and Number Values.

Number Functions

Accept Numeric Input and Return Numeric Values.

Date Functions

Operate on Values of Date Data Type and Can Return Both Date and
Number.

Conversion Function

Covert a Value From One Data Type to Another Data Type.

General Functions

NVL Operates on NULL Values.

DECODE Operates on Any Data Type and Can Return Any Data Type.

Character Functions

They are Functions That Return CHARACTER Values, Unless Stated.

They Return the Data Type VARCHAR2, Limited to a Length of 4000 Bytes.

If the Return Value Length Exceeds, Then the Return Value is Truncated,
Without an Error.

The Functions are Categorized as

Case Conversion Functions.

Character Manipulation Functions.

Case Conversion Functions

These Functions are Used to Convert the Casing of the Existing Character
from one Type to Another.

LOWER Function.

UPPER Function.

INITCAP Function.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Lower Function

It Converts Alpha Character Values to Lower Case.

The Return Value Has the Same Data Type as Argument CHAR Type (CHAR
or VARCHAR2)

Syntax: LOWER(Column/Expression)
SQL> SELECT
ORACLE CORPORATION String,
LOWER(ORACLE CORPORATION) Lower
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, LOWER(MY INFORMATION) Lower
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, LOWER(Ename) Lower
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT The ||Ename||s Designation is ||Job Employee
FROM Emp
WHERE LOWER(Job) = manager;

Upper Function

It Converts the Alpha Character Values to Upper Case.

The Return Value Has the Same Data Type as the Argument CHAR.

Syntax: UPPER(Column/Expression)
SQL> SELECT
oracle corporation String,
UPPER(oracle corporation) Upper
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, UPPER(my information) Upper
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, LOWER(Ename), UPPER(Ename)
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = UPPER(Manager);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal, Sal * 12
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = UPPER(LOWER(MANAGER));
SQL> SELECT The ||Ename||s Designation is ||LOWER(Job)
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = UPPER (manager)
ORDER BY Sal;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT
UPPER(The ||Ename||s Basic Salary is Rupees ||Sal)
FROM Emp
WHERE Job IN(MANAGER, UPPER(clerk))
ORDER BY Sal DESC;

INITCAP Function

It Converts the Alpha Character Values into Uppercase For The First Letter
of Each Word, Keeping all Other Letters in Lower Case.

Words are Delimited

Alphanumeric.

White

Spaces

Characters

That

are

Not

Syntax: INITCAP(Column/Expression)
SQL> SELECT
oracle corporation String,
INITCAP(oracle corporation) InitCap
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
The Job Title for ||INITCAP(Ename)|| is ||LOWER(Job) FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT
Ename, UPPER(Ename), LOWER(Ename), INITCAP(Ename)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Empno, INITCAP(Ename), Deptno
FROM Emp
WHERE Ename = UPPER(blake);

CONCAT Function

It Concatenates the First Characters Value to the Second Character Value.

It Accepts Only Two Parameters Accept.

It Return The Character Data Type.

Syntax: CONCAT(Column1/Expr1, Column2/Expr2)

SQL> SELECT
Oracle String1,
Corporation String2,
CONCAT(Oracle , Corporation) Concat
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, CONCAT(Ename, Job) Concat
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10;
SQL> SELECT
CONCAT (The Employee Name is , INITCAP(Ename)) Info
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno IN(10,30);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT
CONCAT(CONCAT(INITCAP(Ename), is a ), Job) Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno IN(10, 20);

SUB STRING Function

Returns Specified Characters Form Character Value, Starting From a

Specified Position m to n Characters Long.

Syntax: SUBSTR(Col/Expr, m, n)
Points to Remember

If m is 0 , it is Treated as 1.

If m is Positive, Oracle Counts From the Beginning of String to Find the

First Character.

If m is Negative, Oracle Counts Backwards From the End of The String.

If n is Omitted , Oracle Returns All Characters to the End of String.

If n is Less Than 1 or 0 , A NULL is Returned.

Floating Point Numbers Passed as Arguments to SUBSTR are Automatically

Converted to Integers.

SQL> SELECT
ABCDEFGH String,
SUBSTR(ABCDEFGH , 3, 4) SubString
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
ABCDEFGH String,
SUBSTR(ABCDEFGH , -5, 4) SubString
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
ABCDEFGH String,
SUBSTR(ABCDEFGH , 0 ,4) SubString
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
ABCDEFGH String,
SUBSTR(ABCDEFGH , 4) SubString
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
ABCDEFGH String,
SUBSTR(ABCDEFGH, 4, 0) SubString
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
ABCDEFGH String,
SUBSTR(ABCDEFGH, 4 , -2) SubString
FROM DUAL;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Ename, Job

FROM Emp
WHERE SUBSTR(Job, 4, 3) = UPPER(age);
SQL> SELECT
CONCAT(INITCAP(Ename),
CONCAT( is a ,
CONCAT(INITCAP(
SUBSTR(Job, 1, 3)), Eater. )))
FROM Emp
WHERE SUBSTR(Job, 4, 3) = UPPER(Age);

LENGTH Function

Returns the Number of Characters in a Value.

If the String has Data Type CHAR, The Length Includes All Trailing Blanks.

If The String is NULL , It Returns NULL .

Syntax: LENGTH(Column/Expression)
SQL> SELECT
ORACLE String,
LENGTH(ORACLE) Length
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
LENGTH (Ename)|| Characters exit in ||INITCAP(Ename) ||s Name.
AS Names and Lengths
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT INITCAP(Ename), Job
FROM Emp
WHERE LENGTH(Job) = 7;
SQL> SELECT INTICAP(Ename), Job
FROM Emp
WHERE
SUBSTR(Job, 4, LENGTH(SUBSTR(Job, 4, 3))) = AGE;

INSTRING Function

It Returns The Numeric Position of a Named Character.

Syntax: INSTR(Column/Expression, Char, m, n)

The INSTR Functions Search String for Substring that is Supplied.

The Function Returns an Integer Indicating the Position of the Character in

String That is The First Character of This Occurrence.

Searches for Column OR Expression Beginning With its mth Character For
The nth Occurrence of Char2, and Returns the Position of the Character in
Char1, That is the First Character of This Occurrence.

m Can be Positive or Negative, if Negative Searches Backward From The

End of Column OR Expression.

The Value of n Should be Positive .

The Default Values of Both m and n Are 1.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Return Value is Relative to The Beginning of Char1 Regardless of The

Value of m, and is Expressed in Characters.

If the Search is Unsuccessful, the Return Value is Zero.

SQL> SELECT
STRING String,
INSTR(STRING, R) InString
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
CORPORATE FOOR String,
INSTR(CORPORATE FOOR, OR, 3, 2) InString
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
CORPORATE FOOR String,
INSTR(CORPORATE FLOOR, OR, -3, 2) InString
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Job, INSTR(Job, A, 1, 2) Position
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Job, INSTR(Job, A, 2, 2) Position
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Job, INSTR(Job, A, 3, 2) Position
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Job, INSTR(Job, A, 2) Position
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER;

LPAD Function

Pads The Character Value Right Justified to a Total Width of n Character

Positions.

The Default Padding Character is Space.

Syntax: LPAD(Char1, n, Char2)

SQL> SELECT
Page 1 String,
LPAD(Page 1, 15, *.) LPadded
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
Page 1 String,
LPAD(Page 1, 15) LPadded
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, LPAD(Ename, 10, -) LPadded
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal >= 2500;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

RPAD Function

Pads the Character Value Left Justified to a Total Width of n Character

Positions.

The Default Padding Character is Space.

Syntax: RPAD(Char1, n, Char 2)

SQL> SELECT
Page 1 String,
RPAD(Page 1 , 15, *.) RPadded
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
Page 1 String,
RPAD(Page 1 , 15) RPadded
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Rpad(Ename, 10, -) RPadded
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal > = 2500;
SQL> SELECT Ename,
LPAD(Ename, 10, -) LPadded,
RPAD(Ename, 10, -) RPadded
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename,
LPAD(RPAD(Ename, 10, -), 15, -) Centered
FROM Emp;

LTRIM Function

It Enables to TRIM Heading Characters From a Character String.

All The Leftmost Characters That Appear in The SET are Removed.

Syntax: LTRIM(Char, SET)

SQL> SELECT
xyzXxyLAST WORD String,
LTRIM(xyzXxyLAST WORD, xy) LTrimmed
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Job, LTRIM(Job, MAN) LTrimmed
FROM Emp
WHERE Job LIKE MANAGER;

RTRIM Function

It Enables the Trimming of Trailing Characters From a Character STRING.

All the Right Most Characters That Appear in The SET are Removed.

Syntax: RTRIM(Char, SET)

SQL> SELECT
BROWNINGyxXxy String,
RTRIM(BROWNINGyxXxy, xy) RTrimmed
FROM DUAL;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT RTRIM(Job, ER), Job

FROM Emp
WHERE LTRIM(Job, MAN) LIKE GER;

TRIM Function (8i)

It Enables to TRIM Heading or Trailing Characters or Both From a Character

String.

If LEADING is Specified Concentrates On Leading Characters.

If TRAILING is Specified Concentrates On Trailing Characters.

If BOTH OR None is Specified Concentrates Both on LEADING and TRAILING.

Returns the VARCHAR2 Type.

Syntax:
TRIM(LEADING/TRAILING/BOTH, Trimchar FROM TrimSource)
SQL> SELECT
MITHSS String,
TRIM(S FROM MITHSS) Trimmed
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
SSMITH String,
TRIM(S FROM SSMITH) Trimmed
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
SSMITHSS String,
TRIM(S FROM SSMITHSS) Trimmed
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
SSMITHSS String,
TRIM(TRAILING S FROM SSMITHSS) Trimmed
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
SSMITHSS String,
TRIM(LEADING S FROM SSMITHSS) Trimmed
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
SSMITHSS String,
TRIM(BOTH S FROM SSMITHSS) Trimmed
FROM DUAL;

REPLACE Function

It Returns the Every Occurrence of Search String Replaced by The

Replacement String.

If the Replacement String is Omitted or NULL, All Occurrences of Search

String are Removed.

It Substitutes One String for Another as Well as Removes Character Strings.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Syntax: REPLACE(Char, Search_Str, Replace_Str)

SQL> SELECT
JACK AND JUE String,
REPLACE(JACK AND JUE , J, BL) Replaced
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename,
REPLACE(JOB, MAN, DAM) Replaced
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Job, REPLACE (Job, P)
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = PRESIDENT;
SQL> SELECT Job,
REPLACE (Job, MAN, EXECUTIVE)
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = SALESMAN;

TRANSLATE Function

Used to Translate Character by Character in a String.

Syntax: TRANSLATE(char, From, To)

It Returns a CHAR With All Occurrences of Each Character in From

Replaced By Its Corresponding Character in To.

Characters in Char That Are Not in FROM Are not Replaced.

The Argument FROM Can Contain More Characters Than TO.

If The Extra Characters Appear in CHAR, They are Removed From the Return
Value.

SQL> SELECT

Job, TRANSLATE(Job, P, )

FROM Emp
WHERE Job = PRESIDENT;
SQL> SELECT Job,
TRANSLATE(Job, MN, DM)
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER;
SQL> SELECT Job,
TRANSLATE(Job, A, O)
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = SALESMAN;

CHR Function

It Returns a Character Having the ASCII Equivalent to n.

It Returns the Equivalent For n in Database Character Set or National

Character Set.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Syntax:
CHR(n)
CHR(n USING NCHAR_CS)
SQL> SELECT CHR(67)||CHR(65)||CHR(84) Sample
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
CHR(16705 Using NCHAR_CS)
FROM DUAL;

ASCII Function

It Returns The ASCII Representation in the Character Database Set of The

First Characters of the CHAR.

Syntax:

ASCII(Char)

SQL> SELECT ASCII(A), ASCII(APPLE)

FROM DUAL;

NUMBER Functions

These Functions Accept Numeric Input and Return Numeric Values as

Output.

Many Functions Return Values That are Accurate to 38 Decimal Digits.

ROUND Function
Syntax: ROUND(n, m)

It Returns n Rounded to m Places Right of The Decimal Point.

If m is Omitted, n is Rounded to 0, Places.

m can be Negative, and Rounds off The Digits to The Left of The Decimal
Point.

m Must be an Integer.

SQL> SELECT 15.193 Num1, ROUND(15.193, 1) Rounded

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT 15.193 Num1, ROUND(15.193, -1) Rounded
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
45.923 Num1,
ROUND(45.923, 2) Rounded,
ROUND(45.923, 0) Rounded,
ROUND(45.923, -1) Rounded
FROM DUAL;

TRUNCATE Function
Syntax: TRUNC(n, m)

It Returns n Truncated to m Decimal Places.

If m is Omitted, n is Truncated to 0 Decimal Places.

n Can be Negative to Truncate m Digits Left of The Decimal Point.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT
15.79 Num1,
TRUNC(15.79, 1) Truncated
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
15.79 Num1,
TRUNC(15.79, -1) Truncated
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
15.79 Num1,
TRUNC(45.923, 2) Truncated,
TRUNC(42.923) Truncated,
TRUNC(45.923, -1) Truncated
FROM DUAL;

CEIL Function
Syntax: CEIL(n)

Returns the Smallest Integer Greater Than or Equal to n.

The Adjustment is Done to The Highest Nearest Decimal Value.

SQL> SELECT 15.7 Num1, CEIL(15.7) Ceiled

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
14.27 Num1,
CEIL(14.27) Ceiled,
CEIL(14.2) Ceiled,
CEIL(14) Ceiled
FROM DUAL;

FLOOR Function
Syntax: FLOOR(n)

Returns the Largest Integer Less Than or Equal Than n.

The Adjustment is Done to The Lowest Nearest Decimal Values.

SQL> SELECT
15.7 Num1,
FLOOR(15.7) Floor
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
14.27 Num1,
FLOOR(14.27) Floor,
FLOOR(14.2) Floor,
FLOOR(14) Floor
FROM DUAL;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

MODULUS Function
Syntax: MOD(m, n)

It Returns Remainder of m Divided by n.

It Returns m if n is 0.

SQL> SELECT
MOD(11, 4) Modulus,
MOD(10, 2) Modulus
FROM DUAL;

POWER Function
Syntax: POWER(m, n)

Returns m Raised to The nth Power.

The Base m and The Exponent n Can be Any Numbers.

If m is Negative, n Must be an Integer.

SQL> SELECT
POWER(3, 2) Power,
POWER(-3, 2) Power
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
POWER(3, -2) Power,
POWER(-3, -2) Power
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
POWER(-3.5, -2) Power,
POWER(3, -2.5) Power
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT
POWER(-3.5, 2.5) Power,
POWER(3.5, -2.5) Power
FROM DUAL;

SQUARE ROOT Function

Syntax: SQRT(n)

It Returns Square Root of n as Real Value.

The Value of n Cannot be Negative.

SQL> SELECT
SQRT(25)
FROM DUAL;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

ABSOLUTE Function
Syntax: ABS(n)

It Returns the Absolute Value of n.

SQL> SELECT ABS(-15)

FROM Dual;
SQL> SELECT Sal, Comm, Sal Comm, ABS(Sal Comm)
FROM Emp
WHERE Comm = 1400;

SIGN Function
Syntax: SIGN(n)

It Returns the SIGN, Specification of a Number.

If n < 0 , Returns 1

If n = 0 , Returns 0

If n > 0, Returns 1

SQL> SELECT SIGN(-15), SIGN(15), SIGN(0)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Sal, Comm, SIGN(Sal Comm)
FROM Emp
WHERE SIGN(Sal Comm) = -1;

Working With Dates

Oracle Stores Dates in an Internal Numeric Format.

The Dates in Oracle Range From

9999 AD.

The Default Display and Input Format for any Date is DD-MON-YY.

The Internal Date Format Represents

JANUARY 1, 4712 BC to DECEMBER 31,

Century Year Month Day Hours Minutes Seconds

SYSDATE:

It is a Date Function That Returns Current DATE and TIME.

SYSDATE is Generally Selected Upon a DUMMY Table.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE

FROM DUAL;

Date Arithmetic

As Database Stores Dates as Numbers, Arithmetic Operations can be

Implemented.

Number Constants Can be Added or Subtracted Upon Dates.

The Operations That Can be Applied are

Date + Number Returns Date

Adds Number of Days to a Date.

Date - Number Returns Date.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Date Date Returns Number of Days.

Subtracts Number of Days From a Date.

Subtracts One Date from Another Date.

Date + Number/24 Returns Date.

Adds Number of Hours to a Date.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, SYSDATE + 3

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, SYSDATE 3, SYSDATE + 72 / 24
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Hiredate, Hiredate + 3
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Hiredate, Hiredate 3
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Hidrdate, SYSDATE Hiredate
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, (SYSDATE Hiredate) / 7 Weeks
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10;

DATE Functions
ADD_MONTHS Function
Syntax: ADD_MONTHS(D, n)

It Returns the Date D Plus OR Minus n Months

The Argument n Can be Any Positive OR Negative Integer.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, ADD_MONTHS(SYSDATE, 2)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Sal, Hiredate, ADD_MONTHS(Hiredate, 2)
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20;

MONTHS_BETWEEN Function
Syntax: Months_Between(D1, D2)

It Returns Number of Months Between Dates d1 and d2.

If d1 is Later Than d2, The Result is Positive, else Negative.

If d1 and d2 are Either the Same Days of The Months or Both Last Days of
The Months, The Result is Always An Integer.

SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, SYSDATE,

MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE, Hiredate)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Hiredate,
MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE , Hiredate)
FROM Emp
WHERE MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE, Hiredate) < 200;

Next_Day Function
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Syntax: NEXT_DAY(d, Char)

It Returns The Date of The First Week Day Named By CHAR, That is Later
Than the Date d.

The CHAR Must be a Day of The Week in the Sessions Date Language.

The Day of The Week Can Be Full Name or The Abbreviation.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, NEXT_DAY(SYSDATE, WED)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Sal, Hiredate, NEXT_DAY(Hiredate, MONDAY)
FROM Emp;

LAST_DAY Function
Syntax: LAST_DAY(D)

It Returns The Date of The Last Day of The Month That Contains D.

Mostly Used to Determine How Many Days Are Left in the Current Month .

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, LAST_DAY(SYSDATE) LastDay

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT LAST_DAY(SYSDATE) Last, SYSDATE,
LAST_DAY(SYSDATE) SYSDATE Daysleft
FROM DUAL;

Rounding of Dates
Syntax: ROUND(Date, Format)

Returns Date Rounded to The Unit Specified by The Format.

If Format is Omitted, Date is Rounded to the Nearest Day.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, ROUND(SYSDATE , DAY)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, ROUND(SYSDATE, MONTH)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, ROUND(SYSDATE , YEAR)
FROM DUAL;

Truncating Dates
Syntax: TRUNC(Date, Format)

Date is Truncated to the Nearest Date with the Time Portion of the Day
Truncated to the Specified Unit.

If Format is Omitted Date is Truncated to the Nearest Day.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TRUNC(SYSDATE, DAY)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TRUNC(SYSDATE, MONTH)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TRUNC(SYSDATE, YEAR)
FROM DUAL;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Conversion Functions

The Conversion Functions Convert a Value From One Data Type to Another.

The Data Type Conversion in Oracle is of Two Types

Implicit Data Type Conversion

Explicit Data Type Conversion

Implicit Data type Conversion

Implicit Data type Conversions work According to The Convention Specified

by Oracle.

The Assignment Succeeds if the Oracle Server Can Convert the Data Type of
The Value.

CHAR to NUMBER Conversions Succeed Only if The Character Strings

Represent a Valid NUMBER.

CHAR to DATE Conversions Succeed Only if the Character Strings Represent

the Default Format of Date DD-MON-YY.

In Assignment Operation

VARCHAR2 / CHAR

NUMBER

VARCHAR2 / CHAR

DATE

NUMBER

VARCHAR2

DATE

VARCHAR2

In Expressions

VARCHAR2/ CHAR

Number

VARCHAR2 / CHAR

Date

Explicit Data type Conversion

SQL provides three functions to convert a value from one data type to
another.

The Explicit Conversion Functions are

TO_CHAR

To Character Conversion.

TO_DATE

To Date Conversion

TO_NUMBER

To Number Conversion.

TO_CHAR Conversion Function

This Function Can be Used in Two Different Flavors.

TO_CHAR(Number Conversion)

TO_CHAR(Date Conversion)

TO_CHAR(Number Conversion)
Syntax: TO_CHAR(NUMBER , fmt, nlsparms)

Converts NUMBER of Number data Type to a Value of VARCHAR2 data Type.

fmt is The Optional Number Format, That Can be Used.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The nlsparms Specifies the Characters Returned by the Number Format

Element

TO_CHAR(Date Conversion)
Syntax: TO_CHAR(DATE, fmt, nlsparams)

Converts Date of DATE Data Type to a Value of VARCHAR2 Data Type in The
Format Specified.

fmt is the Optional Date Format, That Can be Used.

The nlsparams Specifies the Language in Which Month and Day Names And
Abbreviations are Returned.

Working With Number Format Models

Format Model

A Format Model is a Character Literal That Describes the FORMAT of DATE or

NUMBER Data Stored in a CHARACTER STRING.

Decimal Indicator: D 99D99

It Returns the Specified Position of The Decimal Character.

The Default Decimal delimiter is Period .

Only One Decimal Indicator Can Be Specified in a Number Format Model.

SQL> SELECT 1234, TO_CHAR(1234, 9999D99)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT 1234, TO_CHAR(1234, 999D99)
FROM DUAL;

Scientific Notation Indicator: EEEE 9.9EEEE

Returns a Numeric Value Using Scientific Notation.

SQL> SELECT
1234,
TO_CHAR(1234 , 9.9EEEE),
TO_CHAR(1234, 9.99EEEE)
FROM DUAL;

Group Separator: G 9G999

Returns the Specified Position of The Group Separator

Multiple Group Separators Can Be Specified.

SQL> SELECT 1234567, TO_CHAR(1234567, 99G99G999)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Sal, TO_CHAR (Sal, 99G999D99)
FROM Emp;

Locale Currency Indicator: L L999 OR 999L

Returns the Specified Position of The Locale Currency Symbol.

SQL> SELECT 1234, TO_CHAR(1234, L9999)

FROM DUAL;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Sal, TO_CHAR(Sal, L999999) Currency

FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10;
SQL> SELECT Sal,
TO_CHAR(Sal, L99G999D99, NLS_CURRENCY = IndRupees) Sal

FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20;

Trailing Minus Indicator: MI 9999MI

Returns Negative Value With a Trailing Minus Sign -.

Returns Positive Value With a Trailing Blank.

MI Format Should be Declared as Trailing Argument Only.

SQL> SELECT -10000, TO_CHAR(-10000, L99G999D99MI)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Sal, Comm, Comm, Sal,
TO_CHAR(Comm Sal , L99999MI)
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno IN(10, 20, 30);

Negative Number Indicator: PR 9999PR

Returns Negative Number in <>.

It Can Appear Only as Trailing Declaration.

SQL> SELECT TO_CHAR(-1000, L99G999D99PR)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Sal, Comm, Comm Sal,
TO_CHAR(Comm Sal, L99999PR)
FROM Emp;

Roman Number Indicator: RN OR rn

RN Returns Upper Roman Number.

rn Returns Lower Roman Number.

The Value can be an Integer Between 1 and 3999.

SQL> SELECT 1000, TO_CHAR(1000 , RN),TO_CHAR(1000, rn)

FROM DUAL;

Sign Indicator: S S99999 OR 99999S

Returns Negative Value With a Leading Minus Sign.

Returns Positive Value With a Leading Plus Sign.

Returns Negative Value With Trailing Minus Sign.

Returns Positive Value With a Trailing Plus Sign.

S Can Appear as First or Last Value.

SQL> SELECT 1000, TO_CHAR(1000, S9999),

TO_CHAR(-1000, S9999)
FROM DUAL;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT TO_CHAR(1000, 9999S),

TO_CHAR(-1000, 9999S)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Sal, TO_CHAR(Sal, S99999),
TO_CHAR(Sal, 99999S)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Sal, Comm, TO_CHAR(Comm - Sal, S99999),
TO_CHAR(Comm Sal, 99999S)
FROM Emp;

Hexadecimal Indicator: X XXXX

Returns the Hexadecimal Value of The Specified Number of Digits.

If the Number is Not an Integer, Oracle Rounds it to An Integer.

Accepts Only Positive Values OR 0.

SQL> SELECT 1000, TO_CHAR(1000, XXXX)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal,
TO_CHAR(Sal, XXXXX) HexSal
FROM Emp;

Group Separator: , 9,999

Returns a Comma in the Specified Position.

Multiple Commas Can be Specified.

SQL> SELECT 10000, TO_CHAR(10000, 99,999.99)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, TO_CHAR(Sal, 99,999.99)
FROM Emp;

Decimal Indicator: . 99.99

Returns a Decimal Point, At the Specified Position.

Only one Period Can be Specified in a Number Format Model.

SQL> SELECT 10000, TO_CHAR(10000, L99,999.99)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, TO_CHAR(Sal, L99,999.99)
FROM Emp;

Dollar Indicator: $ $9999

Returns Value With a Leading Dollar Sign.

SQL> SELECT 10000, TO_CHAR(10000, $99,999.99)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, TO_CHAR(Sal, $99,999.99)
FROM Emp;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Zero Indicator: 0 0999 OR 9990

Returns leading OR Trailing Zeros.

SQL> SELECT 10000, TO_CHAR(1000, 0999999),

TO_CHAR(1000, 09999990)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, TO_CHAR(Sal, $099,999.99)
FROM Emp;

Digit Place Marker: 9 9999

Returns Value With a Specified Number of Digits With a Leading Space

When Positive or Leading Minus When Negative.

SQL> SELECT 1000, 600, TO_CHAR(1000 600 , 99999),

TO_CHAR(600 1000 , 99999)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT 20.25, 20, TO_CHAR(20.25 20, 99999)
FROM DUAL;

ISO Currency Indicator: C C9999

Returns Specified Position of The ISO Currency Symbol.

SQL> SELECT 1000, TO_CHAR(1000, C9999.99)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, TO_CHAR(Sal, C9999.99)
FROM Emp;

Date Format Models:

The Date Format Models Can be Used in The TO_CHAR Function to Translate
a DATE Value From Original Format to User Format.

The Total Length of a Date Format Model Cannot Exceed 22 Characters.

Date Format Elements

A Date Format Model is Composed of One or More Date Format Elements.

For Input Format Models, Format Items Cannot Appear Twice, and Format
Items That Represent Similar Information Cannot be Combined.

Capitalization in a Spelled Word, Abbreviation, or Roman Numeral Follows

Capitalization in the Corresponding Format Element.

Punctuation Such as Hyphens, Slashes, Commas, Periods and Colons.

AD or A.D./BC or B.C. Indicator

Indicates AD/BC With OR Without Periods.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, AD)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, B.C.),
TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, A.D. )
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate, TO_CHAR(Hiredate, A.D.)
FROM Emp;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Meridian Indicator: AM OR A.M./PM OR P.M.

It Indicates Meridian Indicator With or Without Periods.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, A.M.),

TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, PM)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Hiredate, TO_CHAR(Hiredate, AM)
FROM Emp;

Century Indicator: CC/SCC

Indicates The Century , S Prefixes BC Date With .

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, CC - AD)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Sal, Hiredate,
TO_CHAR(Hiredate , SCC - AD)
FROM Emp;

Numeric Week Day Indicator: D (1 7)

Returns The Week Day Number

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, D)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Hiredate, TO_CHAR(Hiredate, D)
FROM Emp;

Week Day Spelling Indicator: Day.

Pads to a Length of 9 Characters.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, DAY)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Sal, Hiredate, TO_CHAR(Hiredate, DAY)
FROM Emp
WHERE TO_CHAR(Hiredate, DAY) = WEDNESDAY;

Month Day Indicator: DD

It Indicates the Day of the Month(1 31)

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, DD - DAY)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Hiredate, TO_CHAR(HireDate, DD - DAY)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT HireDate, TO_CHAR(HireDate, DD - DAY)
FROM Emp
WHERE
TO_CHAR(HireDate, DD - DAY) = 03 - WEDNESDAY;

Year Day Indicator: DDD

It Indicates the Day of the Year(1 366)

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, DDD)

FROM DUAL;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate , TO_CHAR(HireDate, DDD)

FROM Emp
WHERE TO_CHAR(HireDate, DAY) = WEDNESDAY;

Abbreviated Week Day: DY

It Indicates The Abbreviated Name of The Week Day.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, D-DY-DAY)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, TO_CHAR(HireDate, D-DY-DAY)
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno IN(10, 20);

ISO Standard Year Week Indicator: IW

Specifies the Week of The Year (1 - 52 or 1 53) Based on The ISO

Standard.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR (SYSDATE, IW)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, TO_CHAR( HireDate, IW)
FROM Emp;

ISO Standard 4 Digit Year Indicator: IYYY

Specifies 4 Digit Year Based on The ISO Standard.

It can Even be Used in Combination of IYY, IY, I.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, IYYY)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, TO_CHAR(HIREDATE, IYYY)
FROM Emp
WHERE TO_CHAR(HireDate, DAY) = WEDNESDAY;

Four Digit Year Indicator: YYYY OR SYYYY

Returns Four Digit Year, S Prefixes BC Dates With .

It Can Even be Used in Combination of YYY OR YY OR Y.

Y,YYY Returns Year With Comma in That Position.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, YYYY) Four,

TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, YYY) Three
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, TO_CHAR(HireDate, YYYY)
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20 ;

Spelled Year Indicator: YEAR OR SYEAR

Returns the Numerical Year in Spelling.

S Prefixes BC Dates With .

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, YEAR)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, TO_CHAR(HireDate, YEAR)
FROM Emp;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Week of the Month Indicator: W

Specifies the Week of the Month(1 5).

Week Starts on The First Day of The Month and Ends on the Seventh Day.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, W )

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, TO_CHAR(HireDate, W)
FROM Emp;

Year Week Indicator: WW

Specifies the Week of the Year (1 53).

Week 1 Starts on the First Day of the Year and Continues to the Seventh
Day in That Year.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, WW)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, TO_CHAR(HireDate, WW)
FROM Emp;

Quarter of the Year Indicator: Q

Returns the Quarter of The Year.

Quarter Starting With the Month of January and Ending With Every Three
Months.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, Q)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, TO_CHAR(HireDate, Q)
FROM Emp
WHERE TO_CHAR(HireDate, Q) = 4;

Julian Day Indicator: J

Returns the JULIAN DAY of the Given Date.

It is The Number of Days Since January 1, 4712 BC.

Numbers Specified With J Must be Integers.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE,TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, J)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, TO_CHAR(HireDate, J-DDD-DD-D)
FROM Emp;

Numeric Month Indicator: MM

Returns the Numeric Abbreviation of the Month.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, MM-YYYY)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate,
TO_CHAR(HireDate, DD-MM-YYYY)
FROM Emp
WHERE TO_CHAR(HireDate , MM) = 12;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Abbreviated Month Indicator: MON

Returns the Abbreviated Name of The Month.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, MM-MON)

FROM DUAL;

Month Spelling Indicator: MONTH

Spells the Name of the Month, Padded to a Length of 9 Characters.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, MON-MONTH)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate,
TO_CHAR(HireDate, MONTH, YYYY)
FROM Emp;

Twelve Hour Clock Mode: HH OR HH12

Returns the Hour of The Day in Twelve Hour Clock Mode.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, HH),

TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, HH12, AM)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate , TO_CHAR(HireDate, HH12 : AM)
FROM Emp;

Twenty Hour Clock Mode: HH24

Returns the Hour of the Day in Twenty Four Hour Clock Mode.(0 23)

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE,TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, HH24)

FROM DUAL;

Minutes Indicator: MI

Returns the Minutes From The Given Date(0 53).

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, MI),

TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, HH:MI) FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, TO_CHAR(HireDate, HH:MI)
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = CLERK;

Roman Month Indicator: RM

Returns the Roman Numeral Month (IXII).

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, RM),

TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, DD-RM-YY)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, TO_CHAR(HireDate, DD-RM-YY)
FROM Emp;

Seconds Indicator: SS

Returns Seconds From the Given Date(059).

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, SS),

TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, HH:MI:SS)
FROM DUAL;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE,

TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, DD-MONTH-YYYY, HH:MI:SS A.M.)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, HireDate,
TO_CHAR(HireDate, HH24:MI:SS)
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno IN(10, 30);

Seconds Past Mid Night: SSSSS

Display Seconds past Midnight(086399).

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, SSSSS)

FROM DUAL;

Date Format Punctuators:

The Punctuation Marks That Can be Used in Date Formats Are

-, /, !, ., ;, :, text
Date Format Element Suffixes: TH OR SP

TH Suffixes the Ordinal Number With ST OR ND OR RD OR TH.

Example: DDTH 20TH.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE,
TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, DDTH, MONTH,YYYY)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, HireDate,
TO_CHAR(HireDate, DDTH, MONTH, YYYY)
FROM Emp;

SP Spells Ordinal Numbers.

Example: DDSP TWENTY

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE, TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, DDSP , Month, YYY)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal,
TO_CHAR(HireDate, DDSP, Month, YYYY)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT SYSDATE,
TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, DDSPTH, Month, YYYY)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal,
TO_CHAR(HIREDATE, DDSPTH, Month, YYYY)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT SYSDATE,
TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, DDSPTH Month YYYYSP)
FROM DUAL;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Date Format Elements Restrictions:

The Suffixes When Added to Date Return Values Always in English.

Date Suffixes Are Valid Only on Output, Hence Cannot be Used to Insert a
Date Into the Database.

Format Model Modifiers:

Fill Mode Indicator: FM

It Suppresses Blank Padding in The Return Value of The TO_CHAR Function.

Format Exact: FX

It Specifies Exact Matching For The Character Argument And Date Format
Model.

SQL> SELECT SYSDATE,

TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, DDSPTH MONTH YYYYSP),
TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, FMDDSPTH MONTH YYYYSP)
FROM DUAL;

TO_NUMBER Function
Syntax: TO_NUMBER(Char, fmt, nlsparam)

It Converts a Char, Value of CHAR or VARCHAR2 Data Type Containing a

NUMBER in the Format Specified By The Optional Format Model fmt, To a
Value of NUMBER Data Type.

SQL> SELECT $10,000.00,

TO_NUMBER($10,000.00, L99,999.99)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT $1,000.00,
TO_NUMBER($1,000.00, L9,999.99) + 500
FROM DUAL;

TO_DATE Function
Syntax: TO_DATE(Char, fmt, nlsparam)

Converts Given Char of CHAR or VARCHAR2 Data Type to a Value of DATE

Data Type.

The fmt is an Optional Date Format Specifying the Format of CHAR.

SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate,

ADD_MONTHS(TO_DATE(17-DEC-1980,DD-MON-YY ), 3)
FROM Emp
WHERE HireDate = 17-DEC-1980;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate,
ADD_MONTHS(TO_DATE(1980-DECEMBER-17,
YYYY-MONTH-DD), 3)
FROM Emp
WHERE HireDate = 17-DEC-1980;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, ADD_MONTHS(

TO_DATE(1980-DECEMBER-17, YYYY-MONTH-DD), 3)
FROM Emp
WHERE
TO_CHAR(HireDate, FMYYYY-MONTH-DD) =
1980-DECEMBER-17;
SQL> SELECT 12-August-2007,
TO_DATE(12-August-2007, DD-Month-YYYY) + 3
FROM DUAL;

Let Us Revisit INSERT Statement Once Again

Working With Invalid Numbers
SQL> CREATE TABLE SampIns
(
SampleNum NUMBER(6),
SampleDate DATE
);
SQL> INSERT INTO
SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
TO_NUMBER(1,23,456, 9G99G999),
SYSDATE
);
SQL> INSERT INTO
SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
TO_NUMBER(1,23,457-, 9G99G999MI),
SYSDATE
);

Working With Invalid Dates

SQL> INSERT INTO
SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
123458,
02-AUG-07
);
SQL> INSERT INTO
SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
123459,
SYSDATE
);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> INSERT INTO

SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
123460,
TO_DATE(02-August-2007, 06:45:36 P.M.,
DD-Month-YYYY, HH:MI:SS P.M.)
);

Inserting B.C. Dates Into Tables

SQL> INSERT INTO
SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
123461,
02-AUG-2007
);
SQL> INSERT INTO
SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
123462,
TO_DATE(02-AUG-2007 B.C.,
DD-MON-YYYY B.C.)
);
SQL> INSERT INTO
SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
123463,
TO_DATE(988216, J)
);

Watch These Inserts

SQL> INSERT INTO
SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
123464,
02-AUG-07
);
SQL> INSERT INTO
SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
123465,
02-AUG-2007
);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> INSERT INTO

SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
123466,
02-AUG-97
);
SQL> INSERT INTO
SampIns(SampleNum, SampleDate)
VALUES(
123467,
02-AUG-1997
);

RR Date Format Element

The RR Date Format Element is Similar to The YY Date Format Element.

The RR Format Element Provides Additional Flexibility For Storing Date

Values in Other Centuries.

The RR Date Format Element Allows to Store The Date to The Previous as
Well as The Next Centuries.

The RR Format Element Should be Used in Association With TO_DATE

Conversion Function Only, Else The System Treats it as YY Format Element.

The Format Can Be Used As Either RR OR RRRR Format Element.

Chart of Identification
Last Two Digits of The Year
Managed By Clock

Last Two Digits of

The Year You
Supplied

0 To 49

50 To 99

0 To 49

Returns The Date in

Current Century

Returns The Date in

The Next Century

50 To 99

Returns The Date in The

Let Us Leap For Aggregating the Data

Aggregate or Group Functions:

These Functions Return a Single Row Based on Groups of Rows.

These Functions Can Appear in SELECT Lists and HAVING Clauses Only.

These Functions Operate on Sets of Rows to Give One Result Per Group.

The Sets May Be The Whole Table or The Table Split Into Groups.

Guidelines to use Group Functions:

DISTINCT Makes The Function to Consider Only Non Duplicate Values.

ALL Makes The Function to Consider Every Value Including Duplicates.

Syntax: GroupFunctionName(Distinct/ALL Col)

The Data Types For Arguments May Be CHAR, VARCHAR2, NUMBER OR

DATE.

All Group Functions Except COUNT(*) Ignore NULL Values. To Substitute a

Value For NULL Value, Use the NVL Function.

When a Group Function is Declared in a SELECT List, no Single Row Columns

Should be Declared.

When a Group Function is Declared in a SELECT List, Other Columns Can Be

Declared, But They Should Be Grouped Columns, And All The Non Functional
Columns Should Be Declared Into a GROUP BY Clause.

Average Function
Syntax: AVG(DISTINCT/ALL Col)

It Returns the AVERAGE Value of Column.

It Ignores NULL Values.

SQL> SELECT AVG(Sal), AVG(DISTINCT Sal)

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT AVG(Comm),AVG(DISTINCT AVG)
FROM Emp;

SUM Function
Syntax:

SUM(DISTINCT/ALL Col)

It Returns the SUM Value of Column.

It ignores NULL Values.

SQL> SELECT SUM(Sal), SUM(DISTINCT Sal)

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT SUM(Comm), SUM(DISTINCT Comm)
FROM Emp;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

MAXIMUM Function
Syntax: MAX(DISTINCT/ALL Col)

It Returns the Maximum Value of Column.

It Ignores NULL Values.

SQL> SELECT MAX(Sal), MAX(DISTINCT Sal)

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT MAX(Comm) , MAX(DISTINCT Comm)
FROM Emp;

MINIMUM Function
Syntax: MIN(DISTINCT/ALL Col)

It Returns the Minimum Value of The Column.

It Ignores NULL values.

SQL> SELECT MIN(Sal), MIN(DISTINCT Sal)

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT MIN(Comm), MIN(DISTINCT Comm)
FROM Emp;

STANDARD DEVIATION Function

Syntax: STDDEV(DISTINCT/ALL Col)

It Returns the Standard Deviation of The Column

It Ignores NULL Values.

SQL> SELECT STDDEV(Sal), STDDEV(DISTINCT Sal)

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT STDDEV(Comm), STDDEV(DISTINCT Comm)
FROM Emp;

VARIANCE Function
Syntax: VARIANCE(DISTINCT/ALL Col)

It Returns the Variance of N.

It Ignores the NULL Values.

SQL> SELECT VARIANCE(Sal), VARIANCE(DISTINCT Sal)

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT VARIANCE(Comm), VARIANCE(DISTINCT Comm)
FROM Emp;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

COUNT Function
Syntax: COUNT(*/DISTINCT/ALL Col)

It Returns the Number of Rows in The Query.

If * is Used Returns All Rows, Including Duplicated And NULLs.

It Can Be Used to Specify The Count of All Rows or Only Distinct Values of
Col.

SQL> SELECT COUNT(*)

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT COUNT(Job), COUNT(DISTINCT Job)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT COUNT(Sal), COUNT(Comm)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT COUNT(Empno), COUNT(DISTINCT MGR)
FROM Emp;

Creating Groups of Data

The Group By Clause is used to decide the rows in a table into groups.

Syntax 1:
SELECT ColumnName1, ColumnName2,
FROM TableName
WHERE Condition(s)
GROUP BY ColumnName(s)
ORDER BY Column(s);
Syntax 2:
SELECT ColumnName, GRP_FUN(Column)
FROM TableName
WHERE Condition(s)
GROUP BY ColumnName(s)
ORDER BY Column(s);
Guidelines to Use GROUP BY Clause:

If The GROUP Function is Included in a SELECT Clause, We Should Not Use

Individual Result Columns.

The Extra Non Group Functional Columns Should Be Declared in The GROUP
BY Clause.

Using WHERE Clause, Rows Can Be Pre Excluded Before Dividing Them Into
Groups.

Column Aliases Cannot Be Used in GROUP BY CLAUSE.

By Default, Rows are Sorted By Ascending Order of The Columns Included in

The GROUP BY LIST.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Column Applied Upon GROUP BY Clause Need Not be Part of SELECT list.

SQL> SELECT Deptno

FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno;
SQL> SELECT Job
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Job;
SQL> SELECT MGR
FROM Emp
GROUP BY MGR;
SQL> SELECT TO_CHAR(HireDate, 'YYYY') YearGroup
FROM Emp
GROUP BY TO_CHAR(HireDate, 'YYYY');
SQL> SELECT TO_CHAR(HireDate, 'Month') MonthGroup
FROM Emp
GROUP BY TO_CHAR(HireDate, 'Month');
SQL> SELECT TO_CHAR(HireDate, 'Month') MonthGroup
FROM Emp
WHERE TO_CHAR(HireDate, Month) <> September
GROUP BY TO_CHAR(HireDate, 'Month');

Creating Group Wise Summaries

SQL> SELECT Deptno, AVG(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno;
SQL> SELECT Deptno, AVG (Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
ORDER By AVG (Sal) ;
SQL> SELECT Deptno, MIN(Sal), MAX(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno;
SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job, SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno, Job;
NOTE: The Above Specification Falls Under The Principle of Groups Within
Groups.
SQL> SELECT Deptno, MIN(Sal), MAX(Sal)
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = CLERK
GROUP BY Deptno;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Deptno, SUM(Sal), AVG(Sal)

FROM Emp
WHERE Job = CLERK
GROUP BY Deptno;

Excluding Groups of Results

Having Clause

It is Used to Specify Which Groups Are to be Displayed.

The Clause is Used to Filter Data That is Associated With Group Functions.

Syntax:
SELECT Column, Group_Function
FROM Table
[WHERE Condition(s)]
[GROUP BY Group_By_Expr]
[HAVING Group_Condition(s)]
[ORDER BY Column_Name/Alias];
Steps Performs By Having Clause:

First The Rows are Grouped.

Second The Group Function is Applied to The Identified Groups.

Third The Groups That Match The Criteria in The HAVING Clause are
Displayed.

The HAVING Clause can Precede GROUP BY Clause, But it is More Logical to
Declare it After GROUP BY Clause.

GROUP BY Clause Can Be Used, Without a Group Function in The SELECT list.

If Rows are Restricted Based On The Result of a Group Function, We Must

Have a GROUP BY Clause as well as the HAVING Clause.

Existence of GROUP BY Clause Does Not Guarantee The Existence of

HAVING Clause, But The Existence of HAVING Clause Demands the
Existence of GROUP BY Clause.

SQL> SELECT Deptno, AVG(Sal)

FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
HAVING MAX(Sal) > 2900;
SQL> SELECT Job, SUM(Sal) Payroll
FROM Emp
WHERE Job NOT LIKE SALES%;
GROUP BY Job
HAVING SUM(Sal) > 5000
ORDER BY SUM (Sal);
SQL> SELECT Deptno, MIN(Sal), MAX(Sal)
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = CLERK
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

GROUP BY Deptno
HAVING MIN (Sal) < 1000;
SQL> SELECT Deptno, SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
HAVING COUNT(Deptno) > 3;
SQL> SELECT Deptno, AVG(Sal), SUM(Sal), MAX(Sal), MIN(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
HAVING COUNT(*) > 3;
SQL> SELECT Deptno, AVG(Sal), SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
HAVING AVG ( Sal ) > 2500;
SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job, SUM(Sal), AVG(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno, Job
HAVING AVG(Sal) > 2500;

Nesting of Group Functions:

Group Functions Can be Nested To a Depth of Two Levels.

SQL> SELECT MAX(AVG(Sal))

FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno;
SQL> SELECT MAX(SUM(Sal)), MIN(SUM(SAL))
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno;
SQL> SELECT MAX(SUM(Sal)), MIN(AVG(Sal))
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Job;

Miscellaneous Functions
GREATEST Function
Syntax: GREATEST(Expr1, Expr2, )

Returns the Greatest of The List of expr.

All Exprs After The First are Implicitly Converted to The Data Type of The
First Expr, Before The Comparison.

Oracle Compares The Exprs Using Non Padded Comparison Semantics.

Character Comparison is Based on The Value of The Character in The Data

Base Character List.

SQL> SELECT GREATEST(HARRY, HARRIOT)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT GREATEST(1000, 2000, 200)
FROM DUAL;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT GREATEST(10-JUL-05, 20-JUL-05)

FROM DUAL;

LEAST Function
Syntax: LEAST(Expr1, Expr2, )

It Returns the Least of The List of Exprs.

All Exprs After The First Are Implicitly Converted to The Data Type of The
First Expr Before the Comparison .

SQL> SELECT LEAST(HARRY , HARRIOT)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT LEAST(1000, 2000, 200 )
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT LEAST(10-JUL-05, 20-JUL-05)
FROM DUAL;

USER Function
Syntax: USER

It Returns the Current Oracle Users Name Within The VARCHAR2 Data Type.

The Function Cannot Be Used in The Condition of The CHECK Constraint .

SQL> SELECT USER

FROM DUAL;

UID Function
Syntax: UID

It Returns an Integer that Uniquely Identifies the Current User.

SQL> SELECT UID

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT USER, UID
FROM DUAL;

USERENV Function
Syntax: USERENV(Option)

Returns Information of VARCHAR2 Data Type Above the Current Session.

The Values in Options are

ISDBA Returns TRUE if DBA Role is Enabled.

LANGUAGE
Session .

TERMINAL
Terminal.

SESSIONID Returns The Auditing Session Identifier.

ENTRYID Returns The Available Auditing Entry Identifier.

LANG Returns The ISD Abbreviation For The Language Name.

INSTANCE Returns The Instance Identification Number of The Current

Instance.

Returns The Language And Territory Used in Current

Returns The OS Identifier for The Current Sessions

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

CLIENT_INFO Returns up to 64 Bytes of User Session Information.

SQL> SELECT USERENV(ISDBA)

FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT USERENV(LANGUAGE)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT USERENV(TERMINAL)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT USERENV(SESSIONID)
FROM DUAL;
SQL> SELECT USERENV(LANG)
FROM DUAL;

VSIZE Function
Syntax: VSIZE(Expr)

It Returns The NUMBER of Bytes in The Internal Representation of Expr.

If Expr is NULL, Function Returns NULL .

SQL> SELECT Ename, VSIZE(Ename)

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, VSIZE(Sal)
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, VSIZE(HireDate)
FROM Emp;

SOUNDEX Function
Syntax: SOUNDEX(CHAR)

It Returns a Character String Containing the Phonetic Representation of

CHAR.

It Allows Comparison of Words That are Spelled Differently, But Sound Alike
in English.

SQL> SELECT Ename

FROM Emp
WHERE SOUNDEX(Ename) = SOUNDEX(SMYTHE);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE SOUNDEX(JOB) = SOUNDEX(CLRK);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE SOUNDEX(JOB) = SOUNDEX(manger);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Let us Increase the Integrity

and Quality of Our Database

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Data Integrity in Data Bases

Data Integrity

It is a State in Which All The Data Values Stored in The Data Base Are
Correct.

Enforcing Data Integrity Ensures The Quality of The Data in The Data Base.

Categories of Data Integrity

Entity Integrity

Domain Integrity

Referential Integrity

User Defined Integrity

Entity Integrity

It Defines a Row As a UNIQUE Entity For a Particular Table.

Entity Integrity Enforces The Integrity of the Identifier

PRIMARY KEY of a Table.

Columns, or the

Illustration: 1

Student Name

Date of Birth

Date of
Admission

Course Name

Course Fee

Sampath

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MCA

25000.00

Sampath

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MBA

25000.00

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MBA

25000.00

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

25-Aug-02

MBA

25000.00

Sampath

10-Dec-80

25-Aug-02

MCA

25000.00

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

25-Aug-02

M.Sc

15000.00

Illustration: 2
Student
Name

Date of Birth

Date of
Admission

Course
Name

Course Fee

Email ID

Sampath

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MCA

25000.00

[email protected]

Sampath

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MBA

25000.00

[email protected]

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MBA

25000.00

[email protected]

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

25-Aug-02

MBA

25000.00

[email protected]

Sampath

10-Dec-80

25-Aug-02

MCA

25000.00

[email protected]

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

25-Aug-02

M.Sc

15000.00

[email protected]

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Illustration: 3
Student
ID

Student
Name

Date of
Birth

Date of
Admission

Course
Course Fee
Name

1000

Sampath

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MCA

25000.00

[email protected]

1001

Sampath

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MBA

25000.00

[email protected]

1002

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MBA

25000.00

[email protected]

1003

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

25-Aug-02

MBA

25000.00

[email protected]

1004

Sampath

10-Dec-80

25-Aug-02

MCA

25000.00

[email protected]

1005

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

25-Aug-02

M.Sc

15000.00

[email protected]

Email ID

Domain Integrity

Domain Integrity Validates The Entries For a Given Column.

It Can Enforced Through.

Restricting Type (Data Types)

By Format (CHECK Constraint)

By Range of Possible Values Using

FOREIGN KEY Constraint.

CHECK Constraint.

DEFAULT Key Word.

NOT NULL Constraint.

Domain Integrities Major Fact of Concentration is on the Data That is Being

Collected in That Column.

Illustration: 4
Student Student
ID
Name

Date of
Birth

Date of
Admission

Course
Name

Course
Fee

Email ID
[email protected]

1000

Sampath 02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MCA

25000

1001

SAMPATH

15-Jun-00

MBA

25000

1002

srinivas

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

MBA

25000

[email protected]

SRINIVAS 02-Jan-98

04-Aug-07

MBA

25000

[email protected]

25-Aug-02

MCA

25000

M.Sc

15000

1003
1004

sampath

1005

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

[email protected]

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Referential Integrity

It Preserves The Defined Relationship Between Tables When Records Are

Entered or Deleted.

It Ensures That Key Values Are Consistent Across Tables.

When Referential Integrity is Enforced, it Prevents From

Adding Records to a Related Table if There is no Associated Record in

The Primary Table.

Changing Values in a Primary Table That Result in Orphaned Records

in a Related Table.

Deleting Records From a Primary Table if There are Matching Related

Records.

Illustration: 5
Courses Information
Course
ID

Course
Name

Course
Fees

C001

MBA

25000

C002

MCA

25000

C003

M.Sc

15000

Students Information
Student
ID

Student
Name

Date of
Birth

Date of
Admission

Course
ID

Email ID

1000

Sampath

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

C002

[email protected]

1001

SAMPATH

15-Jun-00

C001

1002

srinivas

02-Jan-76

15-Jun-00

C001

[email protected]

1003

SRINIVAS

02-Jan-98

04-Aug-07

C001

[email protected]

1004

sampath

25-Aug-02

C002

1005

Srinivas

02-Jan-76

C003

[email protected]

User Defined Integrity

It Allows To Define Specific Business Rules That Do Not Fall Into Any One of
The Other Integrity Categories.

These are Business Rules Which Can be Handled at Run Time, Usually
Designed Using Database Triggers in PL/SQL.

These are Rules Generally Specific to the Organizational Business Process.

Can be Any Situation That Looks Abnormal to the Current Systems Process.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Constraints in Oracle

Constraints in Data Bases Are Used to Define An Integrity Constraint, As a

Rule That Restricts The Values in a Data Base.

As Per Oracle There are Six Types of Constraints

NOT NULL Constraint.

UNIQUE Constraint.

PRIMARY KEY Constraint.

FOREIGN KEY Constraint.

CHECK Constraint.

REF Constraint.

Declaration Style

Column Level (OR) IN LINE Style.

Table Level (OR) OUT OF LINE Style.

Column Level:

They Are Declared As Part of The Definition of An Individual Column or

Attribute.

Usually Applied When the Constraint is Specific To That Column Only.

Table Level:

They Are Declared As Part of The Table Definition.

Definitely Applied When the Constraint is Applied on Combination of

Columns Together.

Note: NOT NULL Constraint is The Only Constraint Which Should Be Declared
As INLINE Only.

Every Constraint is Managed By Oracle With a Constraint Name in The Meta

Data.

Hence When We Declare a Constraint if We Do not Provide a Constraint

Name Oracle Associates the Constraint With Name.

With in a Single User No Two Constraints Can Have The Same Name.

Rather Than Depending on the Oracle Supplied Constraint Name, it is Better

to Define Our Own Name for all Constraints.

When Constraints are Named We Should Use CONSTRAINT Clause.

The CONSTRAINT Clause Can Appear in

CREATE And ALTER Table Statement.

CREATE And ALTER View Statement.

Oracle Does Not Support Constraints on Columns or Attributes Whose Data

Type is

USER_DEFINED OBJECTS.

NESTED TABLES And VARRAY.

REF And LOB.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Exceptions

NOT NULL Constraint is Supported For an Attribute Whose Data Type is

USER_DEFINED Object, VARRAY, REF, LOB.

NOT NULL, FOREIGN KEY, and REF Constraints Are Supported on a Column
of TYPE REF.

NOT NULL Constraint:

A NOT NULL Constraint Prohibits a Column From Containing NULL Values.

NOT NULL Should Be Defined Only At COLUMN Level.

The Default Constraint if Not Specified is NULL Constraint.

To Satisfy the Rule, Every Row in The Table Must Contain a Value For The
Column.

Restrictions:

NULL or NOT NULL Cannot Be Specified as View Constraints.

NULL or NOT NULL Cannot Be Specified For An Attribute of An Object.

Syntax
SQL> CREATE Table <Table_Name>
(
Column_Name1 <Data Type>(Width) NOT NULL,
Column_Name2 <Data Type>(Width)
CONSTRAINT ConsName NOT NULL,
Column_NameN <Data Type>(Width)
);

Illustration
SQL> CREATE TABLE Students
(
StudNo

NUMBER(6)

CONSTRAINT StudnoNN NOT NULL,

StudName

VARCHAR2(25)

CONSTRAINT StudNameNN NOT NULL,

CourseName

VARCHAR2(25)

CONSTRAINT CourseNameNN NOT NULL,

JoinDate

DATE NOT NULL

);

UNIQUE Constraint

The UNIQUE Constraint Designates a Column As a UNIQUE Key.

A Composite UNIQUE Key Designates a Combination of Columns As The

UNIQUE Key.

A Composite UNIQUE Key is Always Declared At The Table Level.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

To Satisfy a UNIQUE Constraint, No Two Rows in The Table Can Have The
Same Value For The UNIQUE Key.

UNIQUE Key Made Up of a Single Column Can Contain NULL Values.

Oracle Creates An Index Implicitly on The UNIQUE Key Column.

Restrictions:

A Table or View Can Have Only One UNIQUE Key Column.

UNIQUE Key Cannot Be Implemented on Columns Having

LOB, LONG, LONG RAW, VARRAY, NESTED TABLE, OBJECT, BFILE, REF,
TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE .

A Composite UNIQUE Key Cannot Have More Than 32 Columns.

Same Column or Combination of Columns Cannot Be Designated As Both

PRIMARY KEY and UNIQUE KEY.

We Cannot Specify a UNIQUE Key When Creating a Sub Table or Sub View in
An Inheritance Hierarchy.

The UNIQUE Key Can Be Specified Only For The Top Level (Root) Table or
View.

Syntax
SQL> CREATE Table <Table_Name>
(
Column_Name1 <Data Type>(Width) UNIQUE,
Column_Name2 <Data Type>(Width)
CONSTRAINT ConsName UNIQUE,
Column_NameN <Data Type>(Width)
);
Illustration: 1
Column Level Syntax
SQL> CREATE Table Promotions
(
Promo_ID

NUMBER(6)

CONSTRAINT PromoIDUNQ UNIQUE,

PromoName

VARCHAR2(20),

PromoCategory

VARCHAR2(15),

PromoCost

NUMBER(10, 2),

PromoBegDate

DATE,

PromoEndDate

DATE

);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Illustration: 2
Table Level Syntax
SQL> CREATE Table Promotions
(
Promo_ID

NUMBER(6),

PromoName

VARCHAR2(20),

PromoCategory

VARCHAR2(15),

PromoCost

NUMBER(10, 2),

PromoBegDate

DATE,

PromoEndDate

DATE,

CONSTRAINT PromoIDUNQ UNIQUE(Promo_ID)

);

Illustration: 3
Composite UNIQUE Constraint Syntax
SQL> CREATE Table WareHouse
(
WareHouseID

NUMBER(6),

WareHouseName

VARCHAR2(30),

Area

NUMBER(4),

DockType

VARCHAR2(50),

WaterAccess

VARCHAR2(10),

RailAccess

VARCHAR2(10),

Parking

VARCHAR2(10),

Vclearance

NUMBER(4),

CONSTRAINT WareHouseUNQ
UNIQUE(WareHouseID,WareHouseName)
);

Illustration: 4
SQL> CREATE TABLE Students
(
StudID

NUMBER(6),

CONSTRAINT StudIDUNQ UNIQUE,

Fname

VARCHAR2(30),

DOB

DATE,

DOJ

DATE,

EmailID

VARCHAR2(50)

CONSTRAINT EmailIDUNQ UNIQUE

);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

PRIMARY KEY Constraint

A PRIMARY KEY Constraint Designates a Column As The PRIMARY KEY of a

TABLE or VIEW.

A COMPOSITE PRIMARY KEY Designates a Combination of Columns As The

PRIMARY KEY.

When The Constraint is Declared At Column Level Only PRIMARY KEY

Keyword is Enough.

A Composite PRIMARY KEY is Always Defined At Table Level Only.

A PRIMARY KEY Constraint Combines a NOT NULL and UNIQUE Constraint in

One Declaration.

Restrictions:

A TABLE or VIEW Can Have Only One PRIMARY KEY.

PRIMARY KEY Cannot Be Implemented on Columns Having

LOB, LONG, LONG RAW, VARRAY,

TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE

NESTED TABLE, OBJECT, BFILE, REF,

The Size of A PRIMARY KEY Cannot Exceed Approximately One Database

Block.

A Composite PRIMARY KEY Cannot Have More Than 32 Columns.

The Same Column or Combination of Columns Cannot Be Designated Both As

PRIMARY KEY and UNIQUE KEY.

PRIMARY KEY Cannot Be Specified When Creating a Sub Table or Sub View
in An Inheritance Hierarchy.

The PRIMARY KEY Can be Specified Only For The Top Level (ROOT)TABLE or
VIEW.

Syntax
SQL> CREATE Table <Table_Name>
(
Column_Name1
<Data Type>(Width)
CONSTRAINT ColNamePK PRIMARY KEY,
Column_Name2
<Data Type>(Width),
Column_NameN
<Data Type>(Width)
);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Illustration: 1
Column Level Syntax:
SQL> CREATE TABLE Locations
(
LocationID

NUMBER(4)

CONSTRAINT LocIDPK PRIMARY KEY,

StAddress

VARCHAR2(40) NOT NULL,

PostalCode

VARCHAR2(6)

CONSTRAINT PCNN NOT NULL,

City

VARCHAR2(30)

CONSTRAINT CityNN NOT NULL

);

Illustration: 2
Table Level Syntax
SQL> CREATE TABLE Locations
(
LocationID

NUMBER(4),

StAddress

VARCHAR2(40) NOT NULL,

PostalCode

VARCHAR2(6)

CONSTRAINT PCNN NOT NULL,

City

VARCHAR2(30)

CONSTRAINT CityNN NOT NULL,

CONSTRAINT LocIDPK PRIMARY KEY(LocationID)
);

Analyze The Following Data For Primary Key

SaleID

CustID

ProdID

Qty

SaleDate

SaleDesc

S001

C001

P001

250.00

01-Aug-07

Cash

S001

C001

P002

125.00

01-AUG-07

Cash

S002

C002

P003

50.00

01-Aug-07

Cash

S002

C002

P004

75.00

01-Aug-07

Credit

S002

C002

P010

225.00

01-Aug-07

Credit

S002

C002

P003

125.00

01-Aug-07

Cash

S003

C001

P005

200.00

01-Aug-07

Credit

S003

C001

P002

25.00

01-Aug-07

Cash

S003

C001

P015

354.00

01-Aug-07

Credit

S004

C003

P100

245.00

02-Aug-07

Cash

S005

C001

P002

125.00

03-Aug-07

Cash

S006

C002

P004

75.00

03-Aug-07

Cash

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Illustration: 2
SQL> CREATE TABLE SalesInfo
(
SaleID

NUMBER(6),

CustID

NUMBER(6),

ProdID

NUMBER(6),

Quantity

NUMBER(6) NOT NULL,

SaleDate

DATE NOT NULL,

SaleDesc

LONG NOT NULL,

CONSTRAINT ProdCustIDPK
PRIMARY KEY(SaleID, ProdID, CustID)
);

PRIMARY KEY Constraint With Composite Key Constraint Style.

FOREIGN KEY Constraint

It is Also Called As REFERENTIAL INTEGRITY CONSTRAINT.

It Designates a Column as FOREIGN KEY And Establishes a RELATION

Between The FOREIGN KEY And a Specified PRIMARY or UNIQUE KEY.

A COMPOSITE FOREIGN KEY Designates a Combination of Columns As The

FOREIGN KEY.

The TABLE or VIEW Containing The FOREIGN KEY is Called the Child Object.

The TABLE or VIEW Containing The REFERENCED KEY is Called the Parent
Object.

The FOREIGN KEY And The REFERENCED KEY Can Be in The Same TABLE or
VIEW.

The Corresponding Column or Columns of the FOREIGN KEY And The

REFERENCED KEY Must Match in ORDER and DATA TYPE.

A FOREIGN KEY CONSTRAINT Can Be Defined on a Single Key Column Either

Inline or Out of Line.

A COMPOSITE FOREIGN KEY on Attributes Should Be Declared at TABLE

LEVEL or Out of Line Style.

We Can Designate the Same Column or Combination of Columns as Both a

FOREIGN Key and a PRIMARY or UNIQUE KEY.

A COMPOSITE FOREIGN KEY CONSTRAINT, Must Refer To a COMPOSITE

UNIQUE KEY or a COMPOSITE PRIMARY KEY in the PARENT TABLE or VIEW.

Restrictions:

The FOREIGN KEY Columns Cannot be Applied on

LOB, LONG, LONG RAW, VARRAY, NESTED TABLE, OBJECT, BFILE, REF,
TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE.

The REFERENCED UNIQUE/PRIMARY KEY Constraint on The PARENT TABLE

OR VIEW Must Already Be Detected.

A COMPOSITE FOREIGN KEY Cannot Have More Than 32 Columns.

The Child and Parent Tables Must Be on The Same Database.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

To Enable REFERENTIAL INTEGRITY Across Nodes of a Distributed Database

TRIGGERS Are Used.

REFERENCES Clause:

The REFERENCES CLAUSE Should be

Constraint is INLINE.

Used When

The FOREIGN KEY

When The Constraint is OUT OF LINE, We Must Specify The FOREIGN KEY,
Key Word.

ON DELETE Clause:

The ON DELETE Clause Determines How ORACLE Automatically Maintains

REFERENTIAL INTEGRITY if The REFERENCED PRIMARY or UNIQUE KEY
Value is Removed From Master Table.

CASCADE Option Can Be Specified

DEPENDENT FOREIGN KEY Values.

Specify SET NULL if We Want ORACLE to Convert Dependent FOREIGN KEY

Values to NULL.

ON DELETE Clause Cannot be Specified for a View Constraint.

Declared on FOREIGN KEY Column Only.

if We

Want

ORACLE to Remove

Things To Note Before We Apply Relations

Relation Model Symbols

Entity OR Table

Column OR Attribute

Relation OR Association

Associative Entity OR Table

Connecting Line

Types of Relations:

Unary Relation.

Binary Relation.

Ternary Relation.

NAry Relation
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Relation Model Representation:

Unary Relation:

Binary Relation:

Ternary Relation:

Relation Cardinality:

One-TO-One.

1..1
1..* OR 1:M

One-TO-Many.

Many-TO-Many. .. OR M:N OR M..N

Relation State:

Mandatory State.

Optional State.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Relation State With Cardinality:

One
Mandatory
Many

One
Optional
Many
Types of Tables To Be Identified in Design Process
1. Pure Masters:

These are Tables Which Contain Only Primary Keys, And All The Remaining
Columns are Non Keys.

2. Master Details:

These are Tables Containing Their Own Primary Key and are Also Related To
Them Selves or Other Tables With Foreign Keys.

3. Pure Details:

These are Tables Which Contain Only Foreign Keys, Related To Other Table
or Tables Primary Key.

Steps Followed for Creating Foreign Key Constraint are as Follows:

Step 1: Create Primary Masters / Pure Masters
SQL> CREATE TABLE Dept
(
Deptno
NUMBER(2)
CONSTRAINT Deptno_Pk PRIMARY KEY,
Dname

VARCHAR2(20)

CONSTRAINT Dname_NN NOT NULL,

Location

VARCHAR2(20)

CONSTRAINT Loc_NN NOT NULL

);

Step 2: Create Detailed / Child Table

These Are Tables Which Can Contain Primary Key of Their Own As Well As
Foreign Keys Referring To Other Primary Masters or To Them Selves.

These Tables Are Also Called As Dependent Tables or Referential Tables.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE TABLE Employee

(
EmployeeID

NUMBER(6)

CONSTRAINT Emp_ID_PK PRIMARY KEY,

Ename

VARCHAR2(30)

CONSTRAINT Ename_NN NOT NULL,

Designation

VARCHAR2(30)

CONSTRAINT Desig_NN NOT NULL,

ManagerID

NUMBER(6)

CONSTRAINT Mgr_ID_FK_Self REFERENCES

Employee(EmployeeID) ON DELETE SET NULL,
HireDate

DATE

CONSTRAINT HireDate_NN NOT NULL,

Commission

NUMBER(7, 2),

DeptID

NUMBER(2)

CONSTRAINT DeptID_FK
REFERENCES Dept(Deptno) ON DELETE CASCADE
);

Working With Composite Keys

Step 1: Create Pure Masters
SQL> CREATE TABLE SampleMaster1
(
SampleID1

NUMBER(4)

CONSTRAINT Samp_ID1_PK PRIMARY KEY,

SampName1

VARCHAR2(20)

CONSTRAINT SampName1_NN NOT NULL ,

SampDate1

DATE

CONSTRAINT SampDate1_NN NOT NULL

);
SQL> CREATE TABLE SampleMaster2
(
SampleID2

NUMBER(4)

CONSTRAINT Samp_ID2_PK PRIMARY KEY,

SampName2

VARCHAR2(20)

CONSTRAINT SampName2_NN NOT NULL ,

SampDate2

DATE

CONSTRAINT SampDate2_NN NOT NULL

);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Step 2: Create The Pure Details

SQL> CREATE TABLE SampRef
(
SampIDRef1

NUMBER(4)

CONSTRAINT SampIDRef1_FK
REFERENCES SampMaster1(SampID1),
SampIDRef2

NUMBER(4)

CONSTRAINT SampIDRef2_FK
REFERENCES SampMaster2(SampID2),
SampNameRef

VARCHAR2(20),

SampDateRef

DATE,

CONSTRAINT SampRef_Comp_PK
PRIMARY KEY(SampIDRef1, SampIDRef2)
);

CHECK Constraint

It Defines a Condition That Each Row Must Satisfy.

To Satisfy The Constraint, Each Row in The Table Must Make The Condition
Either TRUE or UNKNOWN.

ORACLE Does Not Verify That CHECK CONDITIONS Are Mutually Exclusive.

Restrictions

The Condition of a CHECK Constraint Can Refer To Any Column in The Same
Table, But It Cannot Refer to Columns of Other Tables.

The Constructs That Cannot Be Included Are

Queries to Refer to Values in Other Rows

Calls to Functions SYSDATE, UID, USER, USERENV.

The Pseudo Columns CURRVAL, NEXTVAL, LEVEL or ROWNUM.

DATE Constant That Are Not Fully Specified.

A Single Column Can Have Multiple CHECK Constraints That Can Reference
The Column in The Definition.

There is no Limit To The Number of CHECK Constraints That Can Be Defined

On a Column.

The CHECK Constraints Can Be Defined At The Column Level or TABLE Level.

DEFAULT Option

The DEFAULT Option is Given to Maintain a DEFAULT Value in a Column.

The Option Prevents NULL Values From Entering The Columns, if a Row is
Inserted Without a Value For a Column.

The DEFAULT Value Can be a Literal, An Expression or a SQL Function.

The DEFAULT Expression Must Match The Data Type of the COLUMN.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Example
SQL> CREATE TABLE Dept
(
Deptno

NUMBER(2)

CONSTRAINT CHK_Deptno
CHECK(Deptno BETWEEN 10 AND 90),
Dname VARCHAR2(15) CONSTRAINT Chk_Dname_UP
CHECK(Dname = UPPER(Dname)) DISABLE ,
Loc

VARCHAR2(15)

CONSTRAINT CHK_Loc CHECK(Loc IN(

DALLAS,
BOSTON,
NEW YORK,
CHICAGO
)
)
);
SQL> CREATE TABLE Emp
(
Empno

NUMBER(4)

CONSTRAINT PR_Empno PRIMARY KEY ,

Ename

VARCHAR2(25) NOT NULL

CONSTRAINT CHK_Ename
CHECK(Ename = UPPER(Ename)),
Job

VARCHAR2(30)

CONSTRAINT Job_NN NOT NULL,

CONSTRAINT CHK_Job
CHECK(Job = UPPER(Job)),
MGR

NUMBER(4),

HireDate

DATE

DEFAULT SYSDATE,
Sal

NUMBER(7, 2)

CONSTRAINT Sal_NN NOT NULL ,

CONSTRAINT CHK_Sal
CHECK(Sal BETWEEN 2000 AND 100000)),
Comm

NUMBER(7, 2),

Deptno

NUMBER(2),

CONSTRAINT Tot_Sal_Chk CHECK(Sal + Comm <= 100000)

);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Constraints Maintenance
Adding Constraints to a Table

A Constraint Can Be Added To a Table At Any Time After The Table Was
Created By Using ALTER TABLE Statement, Using ADD Clause.

Syntax
SQL> ALTER TABLE <TableName>
ADD
[CONSTRAINT <ConstraintName>]
CONS_TYPE(Column_Name);

The Constraint Name in the Syntax is Optional, But Recommended.

Guidelines

We Can ADD, DROP, ENABLE, or DISABLE a Constraint , but Cannot Modify

The Physical Structure of The Table.

A NOT NULL Can Be Added to Existing Column By Using The MODIFY Clause
of the ALTER TABLE Statement.

NOT NULL Can Be Defined Only When The Table Contains No Rows.

Example
SQL> ALTER TABLE Emp
ADD CONSTRAINT Emp_Mgr_FK
FOREIGN KEY(Mgr) REFERENCES Emp(Empno);

DROPPING Constraints

To DROP a Constraint Identify The Constraint Name From The

USER_CONSTRAINTS

USER_CONS_COLUMNS Data Dictionary Views.

The ALTER TABLE Statement is Used With The DROP Clause.

The CASCADE Option of the DROP Clause Causes Any Dependent Constraints
Also To Be Dropped.

When a Constraint is Dropped, The Constraint is No Longer Enforced And is

No Longer Available in The Data Dictionary.

Syntax
SQL> ALTER TABLE <Table_Name>
DROP
PRIMARY KEY/UNIQUE(Column)/
CONSTRAINT ConstraintName[CASCADE];

Example
SQL> ALTER TABLE Dept
DROP PRIMARY KEY CASCADE;
SQL> ALTER TABLE Emp
DROP CONSTRAINT Emp_Mgr_FK;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

ENABLING Constraints

The Constraint Can Be Enabled Without Dropping it or Re-Creating it.

The ALTER TABLE Statement With The ENABLE Clause is Used for the
Purpose

Syntax
SQL> ALTER TABLE<TableName>
ENABLE CONSTRAINT<ConstraintName>;
Guidelines

Enabling a Constraint Applies To All The Data in The Table At a Time.

When An UNIQUE or PRIMARY KEY Constraint is ENABLED, The UNIQUE

or PRIMARY KEY Index is Automatically Created.

The ENABLE Clause Can Be Used Both in CREATE TABLE As Well As ALTER
TABLE Statements.

Examples
SQL> ALTER TABLE Emp
ENABLE
CONSTRAINT Emp_Empno_FK;

VIEWING Constraints

To View All Constraints On a Table Query Upon the Data Dictionary

USER_CONSTRAINTS.

The Codes That Are Revealed Are

C
P

CHECK
PRIMARY KEY

R
U

UNIQUE KEY

REFERENTIAL INTEGRITY

Example
SQL> SELECT
CONSTRAINT_NAME,
CONSTRAINT_TYPE,
SEARCH_CONDITION
FROM USER_CONSTRAINTS
WHERE TABLE_NAME = EMP;

VIEWING The Columns Associated With Constraints

The Names of The Columns That Are Involved in Constraints Can Be Known
By Querying The USER_CONS_COLUMNS Data Dictionary View.

Example
SQL> SELECT
CONSTRAINT_NAME,
COLUMN_NAME
FROM USER_CONS_COLUMNS
WHERE TABLE_NAME = EMP;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Let Us Make Ourselves More Stronger

Using Multi Table Queries

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

JOINS

A Join is a Query That Combines Rows From Two or More Tables, Views, or
Materialized Views.

A Join is Performed Whenever Multiple Tables Appear in The Queries FROM

Clause.

The Queries SELECT List Can Select Any Columns From Any of These Tables.

The Common Column Names

References To These Columns.

Within

The

Tables

Should

Qualify

All

SQL> SELECT
Empno, Ename, Dname, Loc
FROM Emp, Dept;
SQL> SELECT
Empno, Ename, Sal, Grade
FROM Emp, SalGrade;
SQL> SELECT
Empno, Ename, Dname, Loc, SalGrade
FROM Emp, Dept, SalGrade;
SQL> SELECT
Empno, Ename, Dept.Deptno, Dname, Loc
FROM Emp, Dept;

JOIN Condition

Many Join Queries Contain WHERE Clause, Which Compares Two Columns,
Each From a Different Table.

The Applied Condition is Called a JOIN CONDITION.

To Execute a Join

Oracle Combines Pairs of Rows, Each Containing One Row From Each
Table, For Which The JOIN Condition Evaluates to TRUE.

The Columns in The Join Conditions Need Not Be Part of The SELECT List.

The WHERE Clause of Join Query Can Also Contain Other Conditions That
Refer to Columns of Only One Table.

To Execute a Join of Three or More Tables

Oracle First Joins Two of The Tables Based on The Join Conditions
Comparing These Columns And Then Joins The Result To Another Join.

Table1

Join 01

Result 01

Table2

Join 02

Table3

Result 02

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Oracle Optimizer Determines The Order in Which ORACLE Should Join
The Tables Based on
Given JOIN Condition(s).
INDEXES Upon The Tables.
STATISTICS For The Tables.

The LOB Columns Cannot Be Specified in The WHERE Clause, When The
WHERE Clause Contains Any JOINS.

Syntax
WHERE Table1.Column1 = Table2.Column2
Guidelines

When Writing a SELECT Statement That JOINS Tables, Precede The Column
Name With The Table Name For Clarity And Enhance Database ACCESS.

If The Same Column Name Appears in More Than One Table, The Column
Name Must Be Prefixed With The Table Name.

To Join n Tables Together, We Need a Minimum of n-1 Join Conditions .

The Above Rule Does Not Apply, if The Table Contains a Concatenated
Primary Key.

Equi Joins OR Simple Joins OR Inner Joins

An EQUIJOIN is a Join With a Join Condition Containing An Equality

Operator.

It Combines Rows That Have Equivalent Values For The Specified Columns.

The Total Size of Columns in The Equi Join Condition in a Single Table May
Be Limited To The Size of a Data Block Minus Some Overhead.

The Size of The Data Block is Specified By The Initialization Parameter

DB_BLOCK_SIZE.

Qualifying Ambiguous Column Names:

The Names of The Column Names Should Be Qualified in The WHERE Clause,
With The Table Name To Avoid Ambiguity.

If There Are no Common Column Names Between The Two Tables, The
Qualification is Not Necessary But It is Better.

SQL> SELECT
Emp.Empno

Empno,

Emp.Ename

Ename,

Emp.Deptno

Deptno,

Dept.Deptno

Deptno,

Dept.Dname

Dname,

Dept.Loc

Loc

FROM Emp, Dept

WHERE Emp.Deptno = Dept.Deptno;
SQL> SELECT
Empno, Ename, Emp.Deptno, Loc
FROM Emp, Dept
WHERE Emp.Deptno = Dept.Deptno AND
Job = UPPER('manager');

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT
Empno, Ename, Sal * 12 AnnSal, Emp.Deptno, Loc
FROM Emp, Dept
WHERE Emp.Deptno = Dept.Deptno;

Using Table Aliases:

Tables Aliases Can Be Used Instead of Original Table Names.

A Table Alias Gives an Alternate Name For The Existing Queried Table.

Table Aliases Help in Keeping The SQL Code Smaller, Hence Using Less
Memory.

The Table Alias is Specified in The FROM Clause.

Guidelines:

A Table Alias Can Be Up To 30 Characters in Length.

If a Table Alias is Used For a Particular Table Name in The FROM Clause,
Then That Table Alias Must be Substituted For The Table Name Through Out
The SELECT Statement.

A Table Alias Should Be Meaningful and Should Be Maintained as Short as

Possible.

A Table Alias is Valid Only For The Current SELECT Statement Only.

SQL> SELECT E.Empno, E.Ename, D.Deptno, D.Dname

FROM Emp E, Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno = D.Deptno;
SQL> SELECT E.Ename, E.Job, D.Deptno, D.Dname , D.Loc
FROM Emp E, Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno = D.Deptno AND
E.Job IN(ANALYST, MANAGER );
SQL> SELECT E.Ename, E.Job, D.Dname, D.Loc
FROM Emp E , Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno = D.Deptno AND
D.Dname <> SALES;

Self Joins

It is a Join of a Table To Itself.

The Same Table Appears Twice in The FROM Clause And is Followed By
Table Aliases.

The Table Aliases Must Qualify The Column Names in The Join Condition.

To Perform a Self Join, Oracle Combines And Returns Rows of The Table
That Satisfy The Join Condition .

Syntax
SQL> SELECT Columns
FROM Table1 T1, Table1 T2
WHERE T1.Column1 = T2.Column2

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Illustrations
SQL> SELECT
E1.Ename Employee Name,
E2. Ename Managers Name
FROM Emp E1, Emp E2
WHERE E1.Mgr = E2.Empno;
SQL> SELECT
E1.Ename||s Managers is||
E2.Ename Employees And Managers
FROM Emp E1, Emp E2
WHERE E1.Mgr = E2.Empno;
SQL> SELECT
E1.Ename||Works For||
E2.Ename Employees And Managers
FROM Emp E1, Emp E2
WHERE(E1.Mgr = E2.Empno) AND
E1.Job = CLERK;

Cartesian Products

The CARTESIAN PRODUCT is a Join Query, that Does Not Contains a Join
Condition.

During Cartesian Product Oracle Combines Each Row of One Table With Each
Row of The Other.

It Tends to Generate a Large Number of Rows And The Result is Rarely

Useful.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Dname

FROM Emp, Dept;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Dname
FROM Emp, Dept
WHERE Job = MANAGER;

Non Equi Join

It is a Join Condition That is Executed When no Column in One Table

Corresponds Directly To a Column in The Other Table.

The Data in The Tables in Directly Not Related But Indirectly or Logically
Related Through Proper Values.

SQL> SELECT E.Ename , E.Sal , S.Grade

FROM Emp E, SalGrade S
WHERE E.Sal BETWEEN S.Losal AND S.Hisal;
SQL> SELECT E.Ename, E.Sal, S.Grade
FROM Emp E, SalGrade S
WHERE (E.Sal >= S.LoSal AND E.Sal <= S.HiSal) AND S.Grade = 1;

Outer Joins

An Outer Join Extends The Result of a Simple OR Inner Join.

An OUTER Join Returns All Rows That Satisfy The Join Condition And Also
Those Rows From One Table For Which No Rows From The Other Satisfy The
Join Condition.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

To Perform An OUTER Join of Tables A and B and Returns All Rows From
A, Apply The Outer Join Operator (+) to All Columns of Table B.

For all Rows in A That Have no Matching Rows in B, Oracle Returns NULL
For Any Select List Expressions Containing Columns of B.

Syntax:
SQL> SELECT
Table1.Column, Table2.Column
FROM Table1, Table2
WHERE Table1.Column (+) = Table2.Column;
SQL> SELECT
Table1.Column, Table2.Column
FROM Table1, Table2
WHERE Table1.Column = Table2.Column(+);

Rules And Restrictions:

The (+) Operator Can Appear Only in The WHERE Clause.

The (+) Operator Can Appear in The Context of The Left Correlation in The
FROM Clause, and Can be Applied Only to a Column of a Table or View.

If A and B Are Joined by Multiple Join Conditions, We Must Use The (+)
Operator in All of These Conditions.

The (+) Operator Can be Applied Only to a Column, Not To An Arbitrary

Expressions.

A Condition Containing The (+) Operator Cannot be Combined With Another

Condition Using the OR Logical Operator.

A Condition Cannot Use The IN Comparison Operator To Compare a Column

Marked With The (+) Operator With an Expression.

A Condition Cannot Compare Any Column Marked With The (+) Operator
With a Sub Query.

SQL> SELECT E.Ename, D.Deptno, D.Dname

FROM Emp E, Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno (+) = D.Deptno
ORDER BY E.Deptno ;
SQL> SELECT E.Ename, D.Deptno, D.Dname
FROM Emp E, Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno(+) = D.Deptno
AND E.Deptno(+) = 10
ORDER BY E.Deptno;
SQL> SELECT E.Ename, D.Deptno, D.Dname FROM Emp E, Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno = D.Deptno(+) AND
E.Deptno(+) = 10
ORDER BY E.Deptno;
SQL> SELECT
E.Ename Employee,
NVL(M.Ename, 'Supreme Authority') Manager
FROM Emp E, Emp M
WHERE E.MGR = M.Empno(+)

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Joining Data From More Than Two Table

JOINS Can Be Established on More Than Two Tables.

The Join is First Executed Upon The Two Most Relevant Tables And Then The
Result is Applied Upon the Third Table.

SQL> SELECT C.Name, O.OrdID, I.ItemID, I.Itemtot, O.Total

FROM Customer C, Ord O, Item I
WHERE
C.CustID = O.CustID AND
O.OrdID = I.OrdID AND
C.Name = TKB SPORT SHOP;
SQL> SELECT E.Ename, E.Deptno, M.Ename Manager, M.Deptno
FROM Emp E, Dept D, Emp M
WHERE
E.MGR = M.Empno AND
E.Deptno = D.Deptno;
SQL> SELECT
E.Ename

EName,

Dname,
E.Sal

ESal,

E.Grade

EGrade,

M.Sal

MSal,

SM.Grade

MGrade,

FROM Emp E, Dept D, Emp M, SalGrade SE, SalGrade SM

WHERE
E.Deptno = D.Deptno AND
E.MGR = M.Empno AND
E.Sal BETWEEN SE.LoSal AND E.HiSal AND
M.Sal BETWEEN SM.LoSal AND SM.HiSal

Categories of Joins
Oracle Proprietary Joins (8i And Prior)

Equi Join

Non-Equi Join

Outer Join

Self Join

ANSI SQL : 1999 Compliant Joins

Cross Joins

Natural Joins

Using Clause

Full OR Two Sided Outer Joins

Arbitrary Join Conditions For Outer Joins

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

ISO OR ANSI Joins

Cross Join
SQL> SELECT Ename, Dept.Deptno, Dname, Loc
FROM Emp CROSS JOIN Dept
WHERE Emp.Deptno = Dept.Deptno;

Natural Join
SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno, Dname, Loc
FROM Emp NATURAL JOIN Dept

USING Clause
SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno, Dname, Loc
FROM Emp JOIN Dept
USING(Deptno)

Sub Queries OR Nested Select OR Sub Select OR Inner Select

A Sub Query Answers Multiple-Part Questions.

A Sub Query in The WHERE Clause of a SELECT Statement is Called as

NESTED SUBQUERY.

A Sub Query in The FROM Clause of a SELECT Statement is Called As

INILINE VIEW.

A Sub Query Can Be Part of a Column, in The SELECT List.

A Sub Query Can Contain Another Sub Query.

Oracle Imposes no Limit on The Number of Sub Query Levels in The FROM
Clause of The Top-Level Query.

Within The WHERE Clause Upto 255 Sub Queries Can be Nested.

To Make The Statements Easier For Readability, Qualify The Columns in a

Sub Query With The Table Name or Table Alias.

Purpose of A Sub Query

To Define The Set of Rows To Be Inserted Into The Target Table of An

INSERT or CREATE TABLE Statement.

To Define The Set of Rows To Be Included in a View OR a Materialized View

in a CREATE VIEW or CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW Statement.

To Define One or More Values To Be Assigned To Existing Rows in An

UPDATE Statement.

To Provide Values For Conditions in a WHERE Clause, HAVING Clause, START

WITH Clause of SELECT, UPDATE, and DELETE Statements.

To Define a Table to be Created on By a Containing Query.

Sub Query Principle

Solve a Problem By Combining The Two Queries, Placing One Query Inside
The Other Query.

The Inner Query or The Sub Query Returns a Value That is Used By The
Outer Query Upon The Main Query.

Sub Query Usage

They Are Practically Very Useful When We Need to SELECT ROWS From a
Table With a Condition That Depends on The Data in The Table Itself.

Syntax
SQL> SELECT SelectList
FROM TableName
WHERE ColumnName Operator (
SELECT SelectList
FROM TableName
);

The Expressional Operators in Sub Queries Can Be Categorized into

Single Row Operators =, <>, <, >, >=, <=

Multiple Row Operators IN, ANY, ALL

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Types of Sub Queries

Single Row Sub Query:

These Queries Return Only One Row From The Inner SELECT Statement.

Multiple Row Sub Query:

These Queries Return More Than One Row From The Inner SELECT
Statement.

Multiple Column Sub Query:

These Queries Return More Than One Column From The Inner SELECT
Statement.

Guidelines To Follow

A Sub Query Must be Enclosed in Parenthesis.

A Sub Query Must Appear on The Right Side of The Comparison Operator
Only.

Sub Queries Should Not Contain An ORDER BY CLAUSE.

Only One ORDER BY Clause Can Be Implemented For The Total SELECT
Statement.

Two Classes of Comparison Operators Can be Used in Sub Queries They

Are

Single Row Operators.

Multiple Row Operators.

Let Us Start With Single Row Sub Queries

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal >(SELECT Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = 7566
);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = (SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Ename = UPPER(smith)
)
ORDER BY Sal;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Hiredate, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Hiredate > (SELECT Hiredate
FROM Emp
WHERE Ename = TURNER
)
ORDER BY Sal;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, Job

FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = (SELECT Deptno
FROM Dept
WHERE Dname = SALES
);
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, Comm, Sal + NVL( Comm, 0 )
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = (SELECT Deptno
FROM Dept
WHERE Loc = DALLAS
);

Applying Group Functions in Sub Queries

The Data From The Main Query Can Be Displayed By Using a Group Function
in a Sub Query.

As a Group Function Returns a Single Row, The Query Passes Through The
Success State.

The Inner Sub Query Should Not Have a GROUP BY Clause in This Scenario.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal

FROM Emp
WHERE Sal = (SELECT MAX(Sal)
FROM Emp
);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal = (SELECT MIN(Sal)
FROM Emp
);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal > (SELECT AVG(Sal)
FROM Emp
);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal < (SELECT STDDEV(Sal)
FROM Emp
);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Applying HAVING Clause With Sub Queries

A Sub Query Can Be Also Applied in HAVING Clause.

The Oracle Server Executes The Sub Query, And The Results Are Returned
Into The HAVING Clause of the Main Query.

The Inner Query Need Not Use Any GROUP Functions in This Scenario.

The Outer Queries HAVING Clause Contains GROUP Function.

SQL> SELECT Deptno, MIN(Sal)

FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
HAVING MIN(Sal) > (SELECT MIN(Sal)
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20
);
SQL> SELECT Job, AVG(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Job
HAVING AVG(Sal) = (SELECTMIN(AVG(Sal))
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Job
);
SQL> SELECT Job, AVG(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Job
HAVING AVG(Sal) < (SELECT MAX(AVG(Sal))
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Job
);
SQL> SELECT Job, AVG(Sal), TO_CHAR(AVG (Sal), L99,999.99)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Job
HAVING AVG(Sal) < (SELECT MAX(AVG(Sal))
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
);

Sub Queries Returning More Than One Row

The Sub Queries That Return More Than One Row Are Called as MULTIPLE
ROW SUB QUERIES.

In This Case a Multiple Row Operator Should Be Used.

The Multiple Row Operators Expect One or More Values as Arguments.

The Multiple Row Operators Are

IN Equal to Any Member in The List.

ANY Compares Value to Each Value Returned

by Sub Query.

ALL Compares Value to Every Value Returned by the Sub Query.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Deptno

FROM Emp
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

WHERE Sal IN(SELECT MIN(Sal)

FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Deptno
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal IN(SELECT MAX(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
);
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal , Deptno , Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal IN(SELECT MAX(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Job
);

ANY Operator
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal < ANY(SELECT Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = CLERK
);
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal < ANY(SELECT Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE
Deptno = 20 AND Job <> CLERK
);

Note: <ANY Means Less Than The Maximum Value in The List.
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal >ANY(SELECT Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = CLERK
);

Note: >ANY Means More Than The Minimum Value in The List.
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal =ANY(SELECT Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = CLERK
);

Note: =ANY It is Equivalent to IN Operator

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

ALL Operator
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal >ALL(SELECT AVG ( Sal )
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
);

Note: >ALL It Means More Than The Maximum In The List.

SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename Job, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal <ALL(SELECT AVG(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
);

Note: <ALL It Means Less Than The Minimum In The List.

Sub Queries Returning Multiple Columns

In Sub Queries Multiple Columns Can Be Compared in The WHERE Clause, By

Writing a Compound WHERE Clause Using Logical Operators.

Multiple Column Sub Queries Enable us to Combine the Duplicate WHERE

Condition into a Single WHERE CLAUSE.

Syntax
SQL> SELECT Column1, Column2,
FROM TableName
WHERE
(Column a, Column b ,) IN(SELECT Column a, Column b,
FROM TableName
WHERE Condition
);

The Column Comparisons in a Multiple Column Sub Query Can Be

Pair Wise Comparison.

Non Pair Wise Comparison.

In Pair Wise Comparisons Each Candidate Row in The SELECT Statement

Must Have Both The Same Values Associated With Each Column in The
Group.

The Non Pair Wise Comparison is Also Called Cross Product, We Can Use a
WHERE Clause With Multiple Conditions.

In Non Pair Wise Comparison, The Candidate Row Must Match The Multiple
Conditions in The WHERE Clause But The Values Are Compared Individually.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Sub Select Statements

These Are SELECT Statements Declared as Part of The SELECT List.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal,

(SELECT AVG(Sal)
FROM Emp
) Organization Average
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal,
(SELECT MAX(Sal)
FROM Emp
) Organization Maximum,
(SELECT MIN(Sal)
FROM Emp
) Organization Minimum
FROM Emp;

Correlated Sub Queries

It is Another Way of Performing Queries Upon The Data With a Simulation of

Joins.

In This The Information From the Outer SELECT Statement Participates As a

Condition in The INNER SELECT Statement.

Syntax
SQL> SELECT SelectList
FROM Table1 F_Alias1
WHERE Expr.Operator
(SELECT SelectList
FROM Table2 F_Alias2
WHERE F_Alias1.Column OPERATOR F_Alias2.Column
);
Steps Performed

First the Outer Query is Executed.

Passes The Qualified Column Value to the Inner Queries WHERE Clause.

Then The Inner Query or Candidate Query is Executed, And The Result is
Passed To The Outer Queries WHERE Clause.

Depending on The Supplied Value The Condition is Qualified For The Specific
Record.

Successful Presented Else Suppressed From Display

SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, E.Deptno, Sal, MGR

FROM Emp E
WHERE E.Sal >ANY (SELECT M.Sal
FROM Emp M
WHERE M.Empno = E.MGR
);
SQL> SELECT Deptno, Dname
FROM Dept D
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

WHERE EXISTS (SELECT *

FROM Emp E
WHERE D.Deptno = E.Deptno
);
SQL> SELECT Deptno, Dname
FROM Dept D
WHERE NOT EXISTS (SELECT *
FROM Emp E
WHERE D.Deptno = E.Deptno
);
SQL> SELECT E.Ename
FROM Emp E
WHERE EXISTS (SELECT *
FROM Emp E1
WHERE E1.Empno = E.MGR
);
SQL> SELECT E.Ename
FROM Emp E
WHERE NOT EXISTS (SELECT *
FROM Emp E1
WHERE E1.Empno = E.MGR
);
SQL> SELECT E.Ename
FROM Emp E
WHERE EXISTS (SELECT *
FROM Emp E1
WHERE E1.Mgr = E.Empno
);
SQL> SELECT E.Ename
FROM Emp E
WHERE NOT EXISTS (SELECT *
FROM Emp E1
WHERE E1.Mgr = E.Empno
);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Hierarchical OR Recursive Queries

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Hierarchical Queries Are Queries That Are Executed Upon Tables That
Contain Hierarchical Data.

To Execute The Hierarchical Queries, We Need The Following Clauses.

START WITH
It Specifies The Root Rows of The Hierarchy.

CONNECT BY

It is Used To Specify The Relationship Between Parent Rows And Child

Rows of The Hierarchy.

WHERE

It is Used To Restrict The Rows Returned By The Query Without

Affecting Other Rows of The Hierarchy.

Steps Followed By Oracle

ORACLE Selects The ROOT ROW(s) of The Hierarchy, Which Satisfy The
Condition of The START WITH Clause.

Then ORACLE Selects The Child Rows of Each ROOT ROW.

Each Child Row Must Satisfy The Condition of The CONNECT BY Clause, With
Respect to One of The ROOT ROWS.

ORACLE Selects Successive Generations of Child Rows By Identifying the

Relation in The CONNECT BY Clause.

ORACLE Selects Children By Evaluating The CONNECT BY Condition With

Respect To The Current Parent Row Selected.

If The Query Contains a WHERE Clause, ORACLE Removes All Rows From
The Hierarchy That Do Not Satisfy The Condition of The WHERE Clause.

General Representation
Root Node

Child Nodes

7
1

2
1

Leaf Nodes

Restrictions

They Cannot Be Used To Perform Joins.

They Cannot Select Data From a View, Whose Query Performs a Join.

If ORDER BY Clause is Used, Then The Rows Are Returned As Per The
Specification in The ORDER BY Clause.

To Define Hierarchical Queries Properly we Must Use The Following Clauses.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

START WITH Clause.

CONNECT BY Clause.

START WITH Clause

It Identifies The Row(s) To Be Used As The ROOT(s) of a Hierarchical

Query.

It Specifies a Condition That The Roots Must Specify.

If START WITH is Omitted, Oracle Uses All Rows in The Table As ROOT
Rows.

A START WITH Condition Can Contain a Subquery.

CONNECT By Clause

This Clause Specifies The Relationship Between Parent and Child Rows, in a
Hierarchical Query.

This Clause Contains a Condition That Defines a Relationship.

This Condition Can Be Any Condition As Defined By The Syntax Description.

Within The Condition, Some Part of The Condition Must Use The PRIOR
Operator, Which Refers to The Parent Row.

The Format of PRIOR Operators Is

PRIOR Expr ComparisonOperator Expr.

Expr ComparisonOperator PRIOR Expr.

The Clause Can Contain Other Conditions To Further Filter The Rows
Selected By The Query.

It Cannot Contain a Sub Query.

General Structure of Hierarchical Tree

Root/Parent

Child/Parent

Child/Leaf

Level 1

Child/Parent

Level 2

Child/Parent

Level 3

Child/Leaf

Level 4

Child/Parent

Child/Leaf

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Hierarchical Representation of Emp Table

King (7839, NULL)

Blake
(7698, 7839)

Jones
(7566, 7839)

Clark
(7782, 7839)

Allen (7499, 7698)

Scott
(7788, 7566)

Adams
(7876, 7788)

Ford
(7902, 7566)

Ward (7521, 7698)

Miller
(7934, 7782)

Martin (7654, 7698)

Smith
(7369, 7902)

Turner (7844, 7698)

James (7900, 7698)

SQL> SELECT Ename, Empno, Mgr, Job
FROM Emp
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Empno, Mgr, Job
FROM Emp
START WITH Job = PRESIDENT
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Empno, Mgr , Job
FROM Emp
START WITH Ename = KING
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Empno, Mgr, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
START WITH Sal = 5000
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Empno, Mgr, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
START WITH Sal = (SELECT MAX(Sal)
FROM Emp
)
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Ename, Empno, Mgr, Job, Sal

FROM Emp
START WITH
Sal = (SELECT MAX(Sal)
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = (SELECT Deptno
FROM Dept
WHERE Dname = 'ACCOUNTING'
)
)
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Empno, Mgr, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
START WITH Ename = 'KING'
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR
AND Job = 'MANAGER';

New Features in Hierarchical Queries Oracle 10g

1. New Operator
CONNECT_BY_ROOT
2. New Pseudo Columns
CONNECT_BY_ISCYCLE
CONNECT_BY_ISLEAF
3. New Function
SYS_CONNECT_BY_PATH (Oracle9i)
4. New Keywords
NOCYCLE
SIBLINGS (Oracle9i)
CONNECT_BY_ROOT Operator

CONNECT_BY_ROOT is a UNARY Operator That is Valid Only in Hierarchical

Queries.

We Should Qualify a Column With This Operator, Then Oracle Returns The
Column Value Using Data From The ROOT Row.

It Extends The Functionality of The CONNECT BY [PRIOR] Condition of

Hierarchical Queries.

Restriction

We Cannot Specify This Operator in The START WITH Condition or The

CONNECT BY Condition.

SQL> SELECT ENAME Name,

CONNECT_BY_ROOT(Ename) Boss
FROM EMP
START WITH EMPNO = 7839
CONNECT BY PRIOR EMPNO = MGR
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SYS_CONNECT_BY_PATH Function

The Function Returns The Path of a Column Value From Root To Node, With
Column Values Separated By Char For Each Row Returned By CONNECT BY
Condition.

Can Work on Any Datatype CHAR, VARCHAR2, NCHAR, or NVARCHAR2.

SQL> SELECT Ename,

SYS_CONNECT_BY_PATH(Ename, '/') Path
FROM Emp
START WITH Ename = 'KING
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;

NOCYCLE Keyword

Cycles Are Not Allowed in a True Tree Structure. But Some Hierarchical Data
May Contain Cycles.

In a Hierarchical Structure, if a Descendant is Also an Ancestor, It is Called

a CYCLE.

To Allow The START WITH CONNECT BY PRIOR Construct To Work

Properly Even if Cycles Are Present in The Data NOCYCLE is Used.

The NOCYCLE Parameter in The CONNECT BY Condition Causes ORACLE to

Return the Rows in Spite of The Recursive Loop.

SQL> SELECT Ename,

SYS_CONNECT_BY_PATH(Sal, '/') "Path
FROM Emp
START WITH Ename = 'KING
CONNECT BY NOCYCLE PRIOR Empno = MGR;

SIBLINGS Keyword

The Keyword is Valid Only When We Specify The Hierarchical Query Using
CONNECT BY Clause.

ORDER SIBLINGS BY Clause Preserves Any Ordering Specified in The

Hierarchical Query Clause.

The ORDER BY Clause Finally Gets Applied on The Query.

ORDER SIBLINGS BY Clause is Generally Used When We Want To Order

Rows of Siblings of The Same Parent.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Empno, MGR

FROM Emp
START WITH Empno = 7839
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Empno, MGR
FROM Emp
START WITH Empno = 7839
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR
ORDER BY Ename;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Empno, MGR
FROM Emp
START WITH Empno = 7839
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR
ORDER SIBLINGS BY Ename;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Taking The Advantage of

Pseudo Columns in Oracle

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Pseudo Column

Pseudo Columns Behave Like a Table Column, But is Not Actually Stored in a
Table.

Upon Pseudo Columns Only SELECT Statements Can Be Implemented, But

INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE Cannot be Implemented.

The Available PSEUDO COLUMNS Are

CURRVAL

NEXTVAL

LEVEL

ROWID

ROWNUM

CURRVAL And NEXTVAL Pseudo Columns

These Pseudo Columns Are Applied Upon The SEQUENCE Schema Object.

CURRVAL Returns The CURRENT Value of a Sequence.

NEXTVAL INCREMENTS The Sequence And Returns the NEXT VALUE.

The CURRVAL And NEXTVAL can be used Only in

The SELECT List of a SELECT Statement.

The VALUES Clause of an INSERT Statement.

The SET Clause of an UPDATE Statement.

Restrictions

The CURRVAL and NEXTVAL Cannot Be Used in...

A Sub Query.

A Views Query or SNAPSHOTs Query.

A SELECT with the DISTINCT Option.

A SELECT with a GROUP BY or ORDER BY Clause.

A SELECT Statement with UNION, INERSECT, MINUS SET Operators.

The WHERE Clause of a SELECT.

The DEFAULT Option in CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE Statement.

The Condition of a CHECK Constraint.

Syntax

SEQUENCENAME.CURRVAL Returns the Current Value of the Sequence.

SEQUENCENAME.NEXTVAL Increments the Sequence Value by the
Declared Specification.

SEQUENCE Schema Object

A SEQUENCE is a Schema Object That Can Generate UNIQUE Sequential

Values.

The SEQUENCE Values Are Often Used For PRIMARY KEYs and UNIQUE
KEYs.

To Refer To The CURRENT or NEXT Value of a SEQUENCE in The SCHEMA of

Another User, The Following Privileges Should Be Available

SELECT OBJECT PRIVILEGE

SELECT ANY SEQUENCE

For SEQUENCES in Other Schema The QUALIFYING SYNTAX is

SCHEMANAME.SEQUENCENAME.CURRVAL

SCHEMANAME.SEQUENCENAME.NEXTVAL
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

To Refer to The Value of a SEQUENCE on a REMOTE Database, The

SEQUENCE Should Be Qualified With a Complete or Partial Name of the
Database Link.

SCHEMANAME.SEQUENCENAME.CURRVAL@DBLINK

SCHEMANAME.SEQUENCENAME.NEXTVAL@DBLINK

In a Single SELECT Statement, All Referenced Sequences, LONG Columns,

Updated Tables, and Locked Tables, Must Be Located on The Same Database.

WHEN a SEQUENCE IS Created, We Can Define its INITIAL VALUE And The
INCREMENT Between Its Values.

The First Reference To The NEXTVAL Returns The SEQUENCES Initial Value.

Before The CURRVAL Can Be Used For a SEQUENCE in a Session, First The
SEQUENCE Should Be Incremented With NEXTVAL.

A SEQUENCE Can Be Incremented Only Once in a Single SQL Statement.

A SEQUENCE Can Be Accessed By Many Users Concurrently With No

WAITING, No LOCKING.

CURRVAL and NEXTVAL Should Be Qualified With The Name of The

Sequence.

Creating Sequences
Purpose

An Object From Which Multiple Users May Generate Unique Integers.

CAN Be Used to Generate PRIMARY KEY Values Automatically.

Syntax
CREATE SEQUENCE SequenceName
INCREMENT BY Integer
START WITH Integer
MAXVAL Integer/NOMAXVALUE
MINVAL Integer/NOMINVALUE
CYCLE/NOCYCLE
CACHE Integer/NOCACHE
ORDER/NOORDER;

SEQUENCE Can be Either Incremented Sequence OR Decremented Sequence

INCREMENT BY Clause

Specifies The Interval Between The Sequence Numbers.

Value Can Be Positive or Negative, But Cannot Be 0.

If The Value is Positive It Is Incremented Sequence Else it is Decremented

Sequence.

If Omitted Defaults To Increment By 1.

MINVALUE Clause

Specifies The Sequence's Minimum Value.

NOMINVALUE Clause

Specifies a Minimum Value of 1 For An Ascending Sequence OR (10)26 For

Descending Sequence.

MAXVALUE Clause

Specifies The Maximum Value That Can Be Generated.

NOMAXVAULE Clause
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Specifies a Maximum Value of 1027

Descending Sequence.

For Ascending Sequence OR 1 For

CYCLE Clause

Specifies The Sequence Will Continue To Generate Values After Reaching

Either Maximum or Minimum Value.

NOCYCLE Clause

Specifies The SEQUENCE Cannot Generate More Values After The Targeted
Limit.

CACHE Clause

Specifies The Pre-Allocation of SEQUENCE Numbers, The Minimum is 2.

NOCACHE Clause

Specifies The Values of a SEQUENCE Are Not Pre-Allocated.

ORDER Clause

Guarantees The Sequence Numbers To Be Generated in The Order of

Request.

NO ORDER Clause

Does Not Guarantee The Sequence Number With Order.

Note
If The Above Parameters Are Not Specified By Default
START WITH Will Be 1.
INCREMENT BY WILL BE POSITIVE 1.
SEQUENCE IS NOCYCLE.
The CACHE Value Will Be 20.
SEQUENCE IS ORDER Sequence.
Illustrations
SQL> CREATE TABLE Sample
(
SampID

NUMBER(4)

Constraint SampID_PK PRIMARY KEY,

SampName

VARCHAR2(25),

SampDate

DATE

);

Creation of Incremental Sequence

SQL> CREATE SEQUENCE SampleSeq
INCREMENT By 1
START WITH 0
MINVALUE 0
MAXVALUE 5
NOCACHE
NOCYCLE;

Activating And Attaching The Sequence To a Table

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> INSERT INTO

Sample(SampID, SampName, SampDate)
VALUES(SampleSeq.NEXTVAL, SAMPLE, 31-AUG-05);

Creating A Sequence With CYCLE

SQL> CREATE SEQUENCE SampleSeq
INCREMENT By 1
START WITH 0
MINVALUE 0 MAXVALUE 5
NOCACHE
CYCLE;

Creation of Decremental Sequence

SQL> CREATE SEQUENCE SampleSeq
INCREMENT BY 1
START WITH 5
MAXVALUE 5
MINVALUE 0
NOCACHE
NOCYCLE;

Modifying a Sequence

The ALTER Command Can Be Used To Change The Present Status of a

SEQUENCE.

The ALTER SEQUENCE Command Can Be Used To Change

Increment Value
Maximum Value.
Minimum Value
Cycle Option
Cache Option
Syntax
SQL> ALTER SEQUENCE SequenceName
[INCREMENT BY n]
[{MAXVALUE n/NOMAXVALUE}]
[{MINVALUE n/NOMINVALUE}]
[{CYCLE/NOCYCLE}]
[{CACHE n/NOCACHE}];
Illustration
SQL> ALTER SEQUENCE SampleSeq
MAXVALUE 10
CACHE
NOCYCLE;

Guidelines For Altering A Sequence

The ALTER Privilege Should Be Available.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Only The Future Sequence Numbers Are Affected By The ALTER SEQUENCE
Statement.

The START WITH Option Cannot Be Changed Using ALTER SEQUENCE.

To Change The START WITH. Option, Drop The SEQUENCE

Recreate The SEQUENCE.

Some Validation Performed, i.e., A NEW MAXVALUE Cannot Be Imposed That

is Less Than The Current SEQUENCE Number.

And Then

Viewing the Current Value of a Sequence

SQL> SELECT SampleSeq.CURRVAL
FROM DUAL;

Dropping An Existing Sequence

A SEQUENCE Can Be DROPPED At Any Time.

Once Removed, The SEQUENCE Can No Longer Be Referenced.

SQL> DROP SEQUENCE SampleSeq;

Confirming Sequences

All SEQUENCES That Have Been Created Are Documented in The Data
Dictionary.

The Data Dictionary in Which The Information of SEQUENCES Are Stored is

USER_OBJECTS.

The Settings of The SEQUENCE Can Be Confirmed By SELECTING on

USER_SEQUENCES Catalog.

SQL> SELECT SEQUENCE_NAME,

MIN_VALUE, MAX_VALUE,
INCREMENT_BY, LAST_NUMBER
FROM User_Sequences;

Level Pseudo Column

This Pseudo Column Return 1 For ROOT Node, 2 For a Child of a
ROOT And So on.

Child Any Non Root Node.

Root Highest Node within an Inverted Tree.
Parent Any Node / Row That Has Children.
Leaf Any Node Without Children.

To Establish The Hierarchical Relationship With LEVEL We Need.

START WITH Clause.

CONNECY BY Clause.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, MGR, Level

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT LPAD ( , 2 * (LEVEL 1)) Org_Level, Ename,
Empno, Mgr, Job
FROM Emp
START WITH Job = PRESIDENT
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;
SQL> SELECT
LPAD( ,2 * (LEVEL 1))||Ename Org_Chart,
Empno, MGR, Job
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

FROM Emp
START WITH Job = PRESIDENT
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;
SQL> SELECT
LPAD ( , 2 * (LEVEL 1))||Ename Org_Chart,
Empno, MGR, Job ,
Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Job != ANALYST
START WITH Job = PRESIDENT
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;
SQL> SELECT
LPAD( , 2 * (LEVEL 1))||Ename Org_Chart,
Empno, MGR, Job, Sal
FROM Emp
START WITH Job = PRESIDENT
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR AND
LEVEL <= 2;

Selecting Nth Highest Value From Table

Syntax
SQL> SELECT LEVEL, MAX(ColName)
FROM TableName
WHERE LEVEL = &LEVELNO
CONNECT BY PRIOR ColName > ColName
GROUP BY LEVEL;
Illustration
SQL> SELECT LEVEL, MAX(Sal)
FROM EMP
WHERE LEVEL = &LEVELNO
CONNECT BY PRIOR Sal > Sal
GROUP BY LEVEL;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Selecting Nth Lowest Value From Table

Syntax
SQL> SELECT LEVEL, MIN(ColName)
FROM TableName
WHERE LEVEL = &LEVELNO
CONNECT BY PRIOR ColName < ColName
GROUP BY LEVEL;
Illustration
SQL> SELECT LEVEL, MIN(Sal)
FROM EMP
WHERE LEVEL = &LEVELNO
CONNECT BY PRIOR Sal < Sal
GROUP BY LEVEL;

ROWNUM Pseudo Column

For Each Row Returned By a Query, The ROWNUM Pseudo Column Returns a
Number Indicating The Order in Which Oracle Selects The Rows From a Set
of Joined Rows or Non Joined Rows.

The First Row Selected Has a ROWNUM of 1, The Second Has 2. And So On

The ROWNUM Can Be Used To Limit The Number of Rows Returned By The
Query.

When ORDER BY Clause Follows a ROWNUM, The Rows Will Be Re-Ordered

By ORDER BY Clause .

If ORDER BY Clause is Embedded in a Sub Query And ROWNUM Condition is

Placed in The TOP_LEVEL Query, Then The ROWNUM Condition Can Be
Forced To Get Applied After The Ordering of The Rows.

Conditions Testing For ROWNUM Values Greater Than a Positive Integer Are
Always FALSE.

SQL> SELECT LPAD( , ROWNUM, * )

FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT ROWNUM, Ename, Sal
FROM Emp;

Querying For Top N Records

We Can Ask For Nth Largest OR Smallest Values of a Column.

Never Use ROWNUM And ORDER BY Clause Together As Oracle First Fetches
The Rows According to ROWNUM And Then Sort's The Found Rows.

From Oracle 8i , ORDER BY Clause Can Be Used in INLINE VIEWS.

SQL> SELECT ROWNUM, Ename, Sal

FROM Emp
WHERE ROWNUM < 6
ORDER BY Sal DESC; --Wrong Way

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT *
FROM (SELECT *
FROM Emp
ORDER BY Sal DESC
)
WHERE ROWNUM < 6; --Proper Way

ROWID Pseudo Column

This Pseudo Column Returns a ROWs Address For Each Row Stored in The
Database.

ROWID Values Contain Information Necessary To Locate a The Physical Area

of The Data Base Row.

The Row Belongs To Which Data Block in the Data File.

The Row Belongs To Which Row in The Data Block (First Row is 0)

The Row Belongs To Which Data File (First File is 1)

The Rows in Different Tables That Are Stored Together in The Same Cluster
Can Have The Same ROWID.

The Date Type of The Values Belonging to The ROWID Are of ROWID Data
Type.

Uses of ROWID Values

ROWID is The Fastest Means of Accessing a Single Row From Data Base.

ROWID Can Show How a Tables Rows Are Physically Stored.

ROWIDs Are UNIQUE Identifiers For a Row in a Table.

A RowID Can Never Change During The Life Time of Its Row.

ROWIDs Should Not Be Assigned As PRIMARY KEYs As There is a Chance of

ROWID To Change When The Database is EXPORTED or IMPORTED.

When a Row is DELETED, ORACLE May Reassign Its ROWID To a New Row
That is Inserted.

The ROWID Can Never Be INSERTED, UPDATED and DELETED Manually.

The ROWID Pseudo Column Can Be Used in SELECT and WHERE Clauses.

SQL> SELECT ROWID, Ename, Job

FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = 20;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE ROWID = AACQQAACAAAAEHAAA;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE ROWID < AACQQAACAAAAEHAAA;
SQL> SELECT B.Sal, Sum(A.Sal) Cum Sal
FROM Emp A, Emp B
WHERE A.ROWID < = B.ROWID
GROUP By B.ROWID, B.Sal;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT B.Sal, Sum(A.Sal) Cum Sal

FROM Emp A, Emp B
WHERE A.ROWID < = B.ROWID
GROUP BY B.ROWID, B.Sal;
SQL> SELECT B.Ename, B.Job, B.Sal, Sum(A.Sal) Cum Sal
FROM Emp A, Emp B
WHERE A.ROWID < = B.ROWID
GROUP By B.ROWID, B.Sal;

New Pseudo Columns(Oracle 10g)

CONNECT_BY_ISCYCLE
CONNECT_BY_ISLEAF
CONNECT_BY_ISCYCLE Pseudocolumn

The CONNECT_BY_ISCYCLE Pseudo Column Returns 1 If The Current Row

Has A Child Which is Also Its Ancestor Otherwise It Returns 0.

We Can Specify CONNECT_BY_ISCYCLE Only If We Have Specified The

NOCYCLE Parameter of The CONNECT BY Clause.

NOCYCLE Enables Oracle To Return The Results of A Query That Would

Otherwise Fail Because of A CONNECT BY LOOP in The Data.

SQL> SELECT Ename,

CONNECT_BY_ISCYCLE "Cycle",
LEVEL,
SYS_CONNECT_BY_PATH(Sal, '/') SalPath
FROM Emp
START WITH Ename = 'KING
CONNECT BY NOCYCLE
PRIOR Empno = MGR;

CONNECT_BY_ISLEAF Pseudocolumn

The CONNECT_BY_ISLEAF Pseudo Column Returns 1, if The Current Row is A

Leaf of The Tree Defined By The CONNECT BY Condition, Else it Returns 0

This Information Indicates Whether A Given Row Can Be Further Expanded

To Show More of The Hierarchy.

SQL> SELECT Ename "Employee",

CONNECT_BY_ISLEAF "IsLeaf",
SYS_CONNECT_BY_PATH(Ename, '/') Path
FROM Emp
START WITH Empno = 7839
CONNECT BY PRIOR Empno = MGR;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Working With SET Operators

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SET Operators

These Operators Are Used to Combine Information of Similar DATA Type

From One or More Than One Table.

DATA Type of The Corresponding Columns in All The SELECT Statements

Should Be Same.

The Different Types of SET Operators Are

UNION Operator.
UNION ALL Operator.
INTERSECT Operator.
MINUS Operator.

SET Operators Can Combine Two or More Queries Into One Result.

The Result of Each SELECT Statement Can Be Treated As a Set, and SQL Set
Operations Can Be Applied on Those Sets To Arrive At a Final Result.

SQL Statements Containing SET Operators Are Referred To As Compound

Queries, And Each SELECT Statement in a Compound Query is Referred To As
a Component Query.

Set Operations Are Often Called Vertical Joins, As The Result Combines Data
From Two or More SELECTS Based on Columns Instead of Rows.

The Generic Syntax

{UNION | UNION ALL | MINUS |

INTERSECT}

<component query>;

UNION

Combines The Results of Two SELECT Statements Into One Result Set, And
Then Eliminates Any Duplicate Rows From That Result Set.

UNION ALL

Combines The Results of Two SELECT Statements Into One Result Set
Including The Duplicates.

INTERSECT

Returns Only Those Rows That Are Returned By Each of Two SELECT
Statements.

MINUS

Takes The Result Set of One SELECT Statement, And Removes Those Rows
That Are Also Returned By a Second SELECT Statement.

Point of Concentration

The Queries Are All Executed Independently But Their Output is Merged.

Only Final Query Ends With a Semicolon.

Rules and Restrictions

The Result Sets of Both The Queries Must Have The Same Number of
Columns.

The Data Type of Each Column in The Second Result Set Must Match The
Data Type of Its Corresponding Column in The First Result Set.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Two SELECT Statements May Not Contain An ORDER BY Clause, The
Final Result of The Entire SET Operation Can Be Ordered.

The Columns Used For Ordering Must Be Defined Through The Column
Number.

Illustrations
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10

UNION
SELECT Empno, Ename
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30
ORDER BY 1;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = (SELECT Deptno
FROM Dept
WHERE Dname = SALES)

UNION
SELECT Empno, Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = (SELECT Deptno
FROM Dept
WHERE Dname = 'ACCOUNTING')
ORDER BY 1;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10

UNION ALL
SELECT Empno, Ename
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30
ORDER BY 1;
SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10

INTERSECT
SELECT Empno, Ename
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30
ORDER BY 1;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Empno, Ename

FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10

MINUS
SELECT Empno, Ename
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30
ORDER BY 1;
SQL> SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20

UNION
SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30;
SQL> SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20

UNION ALL
SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30;
SQL> SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20

INTERSECT
SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30;
SQL> SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20

MINUS
SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10;
SQL> SELECT ROWNUM, Ename
FROM Emp
WHERE ROWNUM < 7

MINUS
SELECT ROWNUM, Ename
FROM Emp
WHERE ROWNUM < 6;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Working With Views in Oracle

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

View

It is A Logical Table Based on One OR More Tables OR Views.

A View in Practicality Contains No Data By Itself.

The Tables Upon Which A View is Based Are Called As BASE TABLES.

Views Can Be Created As Object Views OR Relational Views.

The Object Views Support

LOBs

Object Types

Refs

Nested Tables

Varrays

Object View is A View of A User Defined Type, Where Each Row Contains
Objects, And Each Object With An Object Identifier.

Prerequisites

Should Have CREATE VIEW OR CREATE ANY VIEW System Privilege.

To Create A Subview, We Need Under Any View System Privilege OR Under

Object Privilege on The Superview.

The Owner of The Schema Should Have SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE Or DELETE
Rows From All Tables OR Views on Which The View is Based.

The Above Privileges Must Be Granted Through Privileges Directly, Rather

Than A Role.

Syntax
SQL> CREATE [OR REPLACE]
[{FORCE/NOFORCE}] VIEW
ViewName
[(AliasName[,AliasName...])]
AS SubQuery
[WITH{CHECK OPTION/READ ONLY}]
[CONSTRAINT ConstraintName];
OR REPLACE

Specifies The View Has To Be Replaced If Already Existing.

FORCE

Specifies The View Has To Be Created Even If The Base Tables Dows Not
Exist.

NOFORCE

Specifies The View Should Not Be Created If The Base Table Does Not Exist,
Which is Default.

ALIAS_NAME

Specifies The Name of An Alias For An Expression in The Subquery.

WITH CHECK OPTION

Specifies That Only Rows That Would Be Retrieved By The Subquery Can
Only Be INSERTED, UPDATED OR DELETED.

CONSTRAINT

Constraint_Name Specifies The Name Of The Constraint As WITH CHECK

OPTION Or READ ONLY Constraint.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

WITH READ ONLY

Specifies That Rows Must Only Be Read From The Base Tables.

Restrictions

If A View Has INSERTED Of Trigger, Then All Sub Views Created on It Must
Have INSTEAD OF Triggers, Even If The Views Are Inherently Updatable.

An Alias Cannot Be Specified When Creating An Object View.

Types of Views

Simple Views

Complex Views

Simple Views:

Which Contains A Subquery That Retrieves Data From Only One Base Table.

Complex Views

Contains A Subquery That Can Perform Any Of These Actions.

Retrieving From Multiple Base Tables.

Groups Rows Using A Group By or Distinct Clause.

Contains A Function Call.

Simple Views
SQL> CREATE VIEW Employees
AS
SELECT
Empno ID Number,
Ename Name,
Sal Basic Salary,
Job Designation
FROM Emp;

Selecting Data From A View

SQL> SELECT Name, Designation
FROM Employees;
SQL> SELECT ID Number, Name, Basic Salary * 12
FROM Employees;
SQL> SELECT
ID Number,
Name,
TO_CHAR(Basic Salary, 99,99,999.99) Monthly,
Basic Salary * 12 Annual
FROM Employees
WHERE Basic Salary > 2500;

Complex Views
SQL> CREATE VIEW EmpInfo
AS
SELECT
E.Empno

EmployeeID,

E.Ename

Name,

D.Deptno

DepartmentID,

D.Dname

DepartmentName

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

FROM Emp E, Dept D

WHERE D.Deptno = E.Deptno
ORDER BY D.Deptno;
SQL> CREATE VIEW EmpGrades
AS
SELECT E.Ename Name,
E.Sal Basic, S.Grade Grade
FROM Emp E , Salgrade S
WHERE E.Sal BETWEEN S.LoSal AND S.HiSal
ORDER BY S.Grade;
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW EmpManagers
AS
SELECT RowNum SerialNo,
INITCAP(E.Ename)|| Works Under ||
M.Ename Employee And Managers
FROM Emp E, Emp M
WHERE E.Mgr = M.Empno;
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW EmpAccounts
AS
SELECT
Ename,
Deptno,
Sal Monthly,
Sal * 12 Annual
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = (SELECT Deptno
FROM Dept
WHERE Dname = ACCOUNTING
)
ORDER BY Annual;
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW CumSum
AS
SELECT B.Sal, SUM(A.Sal) Cum_Sal
FROM Emp A, Emp B
WHERE A.RowID < = B.RowID
GROUP BY B.RowID, B.Sal;
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW OrgDesignations
AS
SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10
UNION
SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno IN(20, 30);

Data Access Using Views

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Steps OR Operations Performed By The Oracle Server, When Data Is

Accessed Using A VIEW Are

Retrieves The
USER_VIEWS.

VIEW

Definition

From

The

Data

Dictionary

Table

Checks The Access Privileges For The Views Base Table.

Converts The View Query into An Equivalent Operation on The Underlying

Base Table OR Tables.

VIEWS in Data Dictionary

Once The View Has Been Created, We Can Query Upon The DATA
DICTIONARY Table Called USER_VIEWS To See The Name And Definition of
The View.

The Text of The SELECT Statement That Constitutes The VIEW is Stored in A
Long Column.

SQL> SELECT VIEW_NAME, TEXT

FROM USER_VIEWS;

Modifying A View

OR REPLACE Option is Used To Modify An Existing VIEW With A New

Definition.

A View Can Be Altered Without Dropping, Recreating, And Regranting Object

Privileges.

The Assigned Column Aliases in The CREATE VIEW Clause, Are Listed in The
Same Order As The Columns in The Subquery.

Creating Views With Columns Declarations

When A VIEW is Being Created, We Can Specify The Names of The Columns,
That It Can Project, Along With The Views Definition.

The View in This Case Totally Hides The Original Names From The Base
Table.

SQL> CREATE VIEW

DeptSalSummary(
DepartmentName,
MinimumSalary,
MaxSalary,
AverageSalary,
SalarySum
)
AS
SELECT
D.Dname,
MIN(E.Sal),
MAX(E.Sal),
AVG(E.Sal),
SUM(E.Sal)
FROM Emp E, Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno = D.Deptno
GROUP BY D.Dname;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Using Views To Create On The Fly Tables

SQL> CREATE VIEW InsertDept10
AS
SELECT *
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10;

CREATING a TABLE With Data Using a VIEW

SQL> CREATE TABLE Dept10
AS
SELECT *
FROM InsertDept10;
SQL> CREATE VIEW EmpGradeIns
AS
SELECT Ename, Job, Sal, Grade
FROM Emp E, SalGrade S
WHERE E.Sal BETWEEN S.LoSal AND S.HiSal;
SQL> Create Table EmpGrades
(
Employee,
Designation,
BasicSalary,
Grade
)
AS
SELECT *
FROM EmpGradeIns;

Dropping A View

The DROP VIEW Statement is Used To Remove A View Permanently.

Dropping A View Has No Affect on The Tables Upon Which The View is
Created.

Views OR Applications Based on Deleted Views Become Invalid.

We Need DROP ANY VIEW Privilege To Remove The Views From Data
Dictionary.

Syntax
SQL> DROP VIEW ViewName;
Example
SQL> DROP VIEW InsertDept;

Inline Views

An INLINE VIEW is A Subquery With An ALIAS (Called As CORRELATION

NAME), That Can Be Used Within A SQL Statement.

An Inline View is Similar To Using A Named Subquery in The FROM Clause Of

The Main Query.

An Inline View is Not A Schema Object.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

An Inline View in The FROM Clause of A SELECT Statement Defines A Data

Source For The Select Statement.

SQL> SELECT E1.Ename, E1.Sal,

E1.Deptno,
E2.Maxsal
FROM Emp E1, (SELECT Deptno, MAX(Sal) Maxsal
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno
) E2
WHERE
E1.Deptno = E2.Deptno AND
E1.Sal < E2.Maxsal;

Performing DML Operations On A View:

DML Operatons Can Be Perfomed Upon A Table Through VIEW.

Rules To Follow

A Row Can Be Removed From A View Unless It Contains.

Group Function.

A GROUP BY Clause.

The ROWNUM PESUDO COLUMN.

The DISTINCT Key Word.

The Columns Defined By Expressions.

Data Can Be Added Through A View, Unless It Contains Any of The Above
Rules And There Does Not Exist Not Null Columns, And Without Default
Value.

SQL> CREATE VIEW

InsertDept(DeptID,
DeptName ,
Place
)
AS
SELECT
Deptno,
Dname,
Loc
FROM Dept;

Inserting Data Into Dept Table Using The InsertDept View

SQL> INSERT INTO
InsertDept(DeptID, DeptName, Place)
VALUES(50, ADMINISTRATION, DELHI);

Updating Data in Dept Table Using The InsertDept View

SQL> UPDATE InsertDept
SET PLACE = MUMBAI
WHERE DeptID = 50;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Deleting Data From Dept Table Using The InsertDept View

SQL> DELETE
FROM InsertDept
WHERE DeptID = 50;

Many Times These Transactions Look Consistent But It is Not TRUE, Hence
Care Should Be Taken When Implementing Them.

Using with CHECK Option Clause

To Ensure That DML on The View Stays Within The Domain of The VIEW We
Use The WITH CHECK Option Clause.

Views Make It Possible To Perform Referential Integrity Checks.

Using Views We Can Enforce Constraints At Database Level.

Using Views We Can Protect The Data Integrity, But The Use is Very Limited.

The WITH CHECK OPTION Clause Specifies That INSERTS, & UPDATES
Performed Through The VIEW Are Not Allowed To CREATE Rows, That The
VIEW Cannot SELECT.

Views Allow Integrity Constraints And Data Validation Checks To Be

Enforced On Data Being INSERTED OR UPDATED.

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW EDept30

AS
SELECT *
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30
WITH CHECK OPTION CONSTRAINT EDept30ChkView ;
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW Emanage
AS
SELECT *
FROM Emp
WHERE Job = MANAGER
WITH CHECK OPTION CONSTRAINT EmanagerView;

Applying With READ ONLY OPTION

By Adding The WITH READ ONLY Option We Can Ensure That No DML
Operations Are Executed Through VIEW.

An Attempt To Perform A DML Operation Results in Oracle Server Error.

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW

EDptRead(
EmpID,
Name,
Designation
)
AS
SELECT Empno, Ename, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20
WITH READ ONLY;

Understanding Constraint State

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

As Part of Constraint Definition, We Can Specify How And When Oracle

Should Enforce The Constraint.

CONSTRAINT_STATE

We Can Use The CONSTRAINT_STATE With Both INLINE And OUT-OF-LINE

Specification.

We Can Specify The Clauses of CONSTRAINT_STATE in Any Order, But We

Can Specify Each Clause Only Once.

Constraint Clauses
Deferrable And Not Deferrable Clauses

The Deferrable And Not Deferrable Parameters Indicate Whether OR Not, in

Subsequent Transactions, Constraint Checking Can Be Deferred Until The
End of The Transaction.

The Constraint State Can Be Changed Using The SET CONSTRAINT(S)

Statement.

If We Omit This Clause While Creating The Table, Then The Default is NOT
DEFERRABLE.

We Specify NOT DEFERRABLE To Indicate That In Subsequent Transactions

We Cannot Use The SET CONSTRAINT[S] Clause To Defer Checking of The
Constraint Until The Transaction is Committed.

We Specify DEFERRABLE To Indicate That in Subsequent Transactions We

Can Use The SET CONSTRAINT[S] Clause To Defer Checking of The
Constraint Until After The Transaction is Committed.

The DEFERRABLE Setting in Effect Lets Us Disable The Constraint

Temporarily While Making Changes To The Database That Might Violate The
Constraint Until All The Changes Are Complete.

Restriction on [NOT] DEFERRABLE

We Cannot Specify Either of The Above Clauses For A View Constraint.

INITIALLY Clause

The INITIALLY Clause Establishes The Default Checking Behavior For

Constraints That Are DEFERRABLE.

The INITIALLY Setting Can Be Overridden By A SET CONSTRAINT(S)

Statement in A Subsequent Transaction.

Specify Initially Immediate To Indicate That Oracle Should Check The

Constraint At The End of Each Subsequent SQL Statement.

If We Do Not Specify INITIALLY At All, Then The Default is INITIALLY

IMMEDIATE.

Specify INITIALLY DEFERRED To Indicate That Oracle Should Check This

Constraint At The End of Subsequent Transactions.

VALIDATE OR NOVALIDATE

The Behavior of VALIDATE And NOVALIDATE Always Depends on Whether

The Constraint is Enabled OR Disabled.

ENABLE Clause

Specify ENABLE if We Want The Constraint To Be Applied To The Data in The

Table.

ENABLE VALIDATE Specifies That All Old And New Data Also Complies With
The Constraint.

ENABLE NOVALIDATE
Ensures That All New DML Operations on The
Constrained Data Comply With The Constraint.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Restriction On The Enable Clause

We Cannot ENABLE A FOREIGN KEY That References A DISABLED UNIQUE

OR PRIMARY KEY.

DISABLE Clause

Specify DISABLE To DISABLE The INTEGRITY Constraint.

Disabled Integrity Constraints Appear in The Data Dictionary Along With

Enabled Constraints.

If We Do Not Specify This Clause When Creating A Constraint, Oracle

Automatically Enables The Constraint.

DISABLE VALIDATE Disables The Constraint And Drops The Index on The
Constraint, But Keeps The Constraint Valid.

This Feature is Most Useful in Data Warehousing Situations, Because It Lets

Us Load Large Amounts of Data While Also Saving Space By Not Having An
Index.

DISABLE NOVALIDATE Signifies That Oracle Makes No Effort To Maintain The

Constraint.

If We Specify Neither VALIDATE Nor NOVALIDATE, Then The Default is

NOVALIDATE.

RELY Clause

RELY And NORELY Are Valid Only When We Are Modifying An Existing
Constraint.

These Parameters Specify Whether A Constraint in NOVALIDATE Mode is To

Be Taken Into Account For Query Rewrite.

Specify RELY To Activate An Existing Constraint in NOVALIDATE Mode For

Query Rewrite in An Unenforced Query Rewrite Integrity Mode.

The Constraint is in NOVALIDATE Mode, So Oracle Does Not Enforce It.

The Default is NORELY.

Restriction on The RELY Clause

We Cannot Set A NONDEFERRABLE NOT NULL Constraint To RELY.

DEFERRABLE Constraints Illustration

Table With Default ENABLE State
SQL> CREATE TABLE MyMaster
(
MastID

NUMBER(2)

CONSTRAINT MastIDPK PRIMARY KEY

MastName

VARCHAR2(10)

CONSTRAINT MastNameCHK
CHECK(MastName = UPPER(MastName),
MastDate

DATE

CONSTRAINT MastDateNN NOT NULL

);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE TABLE MyMasterDetail

(
DetailID

NUMBER(2),

MastID

NUMBER(2),

DetailName

VARCHAR2(10)

CONSTRAINT DetailNameCHK
CHECK(DetailName = UPPER(DetailName)),
DetailDate

DATE

CONSTRAINT DetailDateNN NOT NULL,

CONSTRAINT DetailIDPK PRIMARY KEY(DetailID),
CONSTRAINT MastIDFK FOREIGN KEY(MastID)
REFERENCES MyMaster(MastID)
);

View Constraint

In Practicality Oracle Does Not Enforce View Constraints, But Operations on

VIEWS Are Subject To The INTEGRITY CONSTRAINTS Defined on The
Underlying Base Tables.

CONSTRAINTS on VIEWS Can Be Enforced Through CONSTRAINTS on Base

Tables.

Restrictions on VIEW CONSTRAINTS

The VIEW CONSTRAINTS Are Subset Of TABLE CONSTRAINTS.

Only UNIQUE, PRIMARY KEY And FOREIGN KEY Constraints Can Be Specified
on Views.

The Check Constraint is Imposed Using WITH CHECK OPTION.

As View Constraints Are Not Enforced Directly, We Cannot Specify INTIALLY

DEFERRED OR DEFERRABLE Clauses.

View Constraints Are Supported Only in DISABLE NOVALIDATE Mode.

The RELY And NO RELY Key Words Will Instruct The Oracle Server When The
View Constraint Should Be Enforced.

As View is A Logical Table The Constraints on View Are Not Highly

Considered in Practice.

The View Constraints Are Adopted For Maintenance Easiness.

SQL> CREATE VIEW EmpSalary

(
EmpID,
Ename,
Email UNIQUE RELY DISABLE NOVALIDATE,
CONSTRAINT ID_PK PRIMARY KEY(EmpID)
RELY DISABLE NOVALIDATE
)
AS
SELECT
Empno,
Ename,
Email
FROM Emp;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Let Us Increase The Speed and

Performance of the Database
Using Indexes

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Working With Indexes

Index

It Is A Schema Object Which Contains An Entry For Each Value That Appears
In The Indexed Column(s) Of The Table Or Cluster.

Index Provides Direct, Fast Access To Rows.

Types of Indexes
Normal Indexes

They Are Default Indexes.

They Are Created With B-tree Principle.

Bitmap Indexes

They Store ROWIDS Associated With A Key Value As A Bitmap.

Partitioned Indexes:

They Contain Partitions Containing An Entry For Each Value That Appears In
The Indexed Columns of The Table.

Function Based Indexes

They Are Based on Expressions.

Enable Query To Evaluate Value Retuned By An Expression.

Domain Indexes

They Are Indexes Which Are Instances of An Application Specific Index of

Type Indextype.

Pre Requisites

The TABLE OR CLUSTER To Be Indexed Must Be in The Own Schema.

INDEX OBJECT Privilege Should Be Available on The Table To Be Indexed.

CREATE ANY INDEX System Privilege Must Be Available.

Unlimited Tablespace System Privilege OR Space Quota On Table Spaces

Must Be Available.

For DOMAIN Indexes, EXECUTE OBJECT Privilege on The Indextype Should

Be Available.

For FUCTION Based Indexes, The Function Used For Indexing Must Be
Marked As Deterministic.

Restrictions

If INDEX is Locally Partitioned Then The TABLE Must Be Partitioned.

If The TABLE is INDEX ORAGANIZED, Then A Secondary INDEX is Created.

If The TABLE is TEMPORARY TABLE, Then INDEX is Also Temporary With The
Same Scope, As That of The Table.

Syntax
SQL> CREATE {[UNIQUE]/[BITMAP]}
INDEX IndexName
ON
TableName(ColumnName [,ColumnName..])
TABLESPACE TableSpaceName;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Simple Index OR Normal Index

A Simple Index OR Normal Index is Created Upon A Table By Considering

Only One Column.

These Indexes Are Generally Created Using The Algorithm of B-Tree Index.

We Can Create Index On Columns Containing NULL OR Repeated Data if

UNIQUE Key Word is Not Used.

These Are Default Indexes in Oracle.

SQL> CREATE INDEX EmpEmpnoIDX

ON Emp(Empno);
SQL> CREATE INDEX DeptDeptnoIDX
ON Dept(Deptno);

Creating Composite Indexes

COMPOSITE Index is An INDEX on Multiple Columns of A Table.

COMPOSITE Index Can Be Created Upon A Table To The Maximum Collection

of 32 Columns.

SQL> CREATE INDEX Stud_Fname_Lname_Idx

ON Student(Fname, Lname);
SQL> CREATE INDEX Emp_Name_Place_IDX
ON Emp(Ename , StreetName);

Creating Unique Indexes

Specify UNIQUE To Indicate That The Value of The Column OR Columns Upon
Which The INDEX is Based Must Be UNIQUE.

Restrictions

We Cannot Specify Both UNIQUE and BITMAP Indexes at a Time.

UNIQUE Key Word Cannot Be Specified For A DOMAIN INDEX.

SQL> CREATE UNIQUE INDEX EmpEmailIDxUNQ

ON Emp(Email);
SQL> CREATE UNIQUE INDEXStuPhnoIDxUNQ
ON Student(PhoneNo);
BITMAP Indexes

Specify BITMAP To Indicate That INDEX Has To Be Created With A BITMAP

For Each DISTINCT KEY in The Table.

BITMAP Indexes Store The ROWIDs Associated With A KEY Value As A

BITMAP.

Each BIT in The BITMAP Corresponds To A Possible ROWID.

These Indexes Are Used To Tune Queries That Use Non Selective Columns in
Their Limiting Conditions

BITMAP INDEXES Should Be Used Only When The Data is Infrequently

Updated.

BITMAP INDEXES Add To The Cost of All Data Manipulation Transactions

Against The Tables They INDEX.

The Oracle Optimizer Can Dynamically Convert BITMAP INDEX Entries To

ROWIDs During The Query Processing.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Restrictions

BITMAP Cannot Be Specified When Creating A Global Partitioned Index.

Bitmap Secondary Index Cannot Be Created on An INDEX ORGANIZED TABLE

Unless The Index Organized Table Has A Mapping Table Associated With It.

We Cannot Specify Both UNIQUE And BITMAP Indexes At A Time.

BITMAP Cannot Be Specified For A DOMAIN INDEX.

BITMAP INDEXES Should Not Be Used For Tables Involved in OLTP.

BITMAP Indexes Increase The Load Factor on The INTERNAL Mechanisms of

Oracle To Maintain Them.

Restricted With Usage To Tables Involved in BATCH Transactions.

SQL> CREATE BITMAP INDEX EmpBitMapDeptno

ON Emp(Deptno);
Bitmap Index Structure
Dept no

Start ROWID

End ROWID

Bit Pattern

AAANsYAAEAAABSGAAA

AAANsYAAEAAABSGAAN

10100000000001

AAANsYAAEAAABSGAAA

AAANsYAAEAAABSGAAN

00010000011110

AAANsYAAEAAABSGAAA

AAANsYAAEAAABSGAAN

01001111100000

Each Row in The Table Being Indexed Adds Only One Bit to The Size of The
Bitmap Pattern Column For The Bitmap Index.

Each Distinct Value Adds Another Row to The Bitmap Index.

Creating Function Based Indexes

These Are Indexes Based on Expressions in SELECT Statements.

The INDEX Expressions Are Built From Table Columns, Containing SQL
Functions OR User Defined Functions.

FUNCTION BASED INDEXES Defined With The UPPER(ColumnName) OR

LOWER( ColumnName) Allow Case Insensitive Searches.

We Should Have CREATE INDEX And QUERY REWRITE Privileges.

We Should Have EXECUTE Object Privilege on The Functions Used in The

Function Based Indexes.

Function Based Indexes Are Designed To Improve Query Performance When

The Function is Used in WHERE Clause.

To Ensure That Oracle Uses The INDEX Rather Than Performing A Full Table
Scan, We Should Be Sure That The Value of The Function is NOT NULL in The
Subsequent Queries.

Oracle Treats INDEXES With Columns Marked DESC As Function Based

Indexes.

The Function Based Indexes Are Used Only When The Query Statement is
Executed Through The Specified Function.

SQL> CREATE INDEX EmpFuncAnnSalIDX

ON Emp(Sal * 12);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

INDEX Creation is of Two Types

Automatic.

Manual.

Specifications of An INDEX

INDEX is A Schema Object.

Index is Used By The Oracle Server To Speed Up Retrieval of Rows By Using

A Pointer.

INDEX Reduces The Disk I/O By Using Rapid Path Access Method To Locate
The Data Quickly.

Indexs Are Independent of The Table it Indexes, Both Logically And

Physically.

Index is Used And Maintained Automatically By The Oracle Server.

Indexs Can Be Created OR Dropped At Any Time And Have No Effect on The
Base Tables OR Other Indexes.

When A Table is Dropped, The Corresponding Indexes Are Also Dropped

Automatically.

On One Table More Than One Index Can Be Created, But This Does Not Mean
That, More The Indexes, Lead To More Faster Performance.

Each DML Operation That is Committed on A Table With Index, Means That
The Index Must Be Updated.

Dropping An Index
Syntax
SQL> DROP INDEX INDEX_NAME;
When To Create An Index

The Column is Used Frequently in The WHERE Clause OR in A Join Condition.

The Column Contains A Wide Range Of Values.

The Column Contains A Large Number Of NULL Values.

Two OR More Columns Are Frequently Used Together in A Where Clause OR

Join Condition.

The Table is Large And Most Queries Are Expected To Retrieve Less Than 2
To 4 % of The Rows.

When Not To Create An Index

The Table is Too Small.

The Columns Are Not Often Used As Condition in The Query.

Most Queries Are Expected To Retrieve More than 2 To 4 % of The Rows.

The Table is Updated Frequently.

Querying For Indexes

The Indexes Can Be Confirmed From The USER_INDEXES Data Dictionary.

The
Column
That
USER_IND_COLUMNS.

Are

Involved

Index

Querying

SQL> SELECT UC.TABLE_NAME TabName,

UC.COLUMN_NAME ColName, UI.INDEX_NAME IDXName
FROM USER_IND_COLUMNS UC, USER_INDEXES UI
WHERE UC.INDEX_NAME = UI.INDEX_NAME;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Fundamentals of Data Base Security

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Database Security

The SECURITY Upon Databases is Applied By Defining And Describing

Separate SCHEMA OBJECTS And GRANTING Required PRIVILEGES Upon
Them.

In Oracle The Privileges Can Be Granted As Well As Revoked.

GRANT Command
Syntax
SQL> GRANT <PrivilageName1>, <PrivilageName2>,
ON <ObjectName>
TO <UserName>;

GRANT Command is Used When We Want The Database To Be Shared With

Other Users.

The Other Users Are GRANTED With Certain Type of RIGHTS.

GRANT Command Can Be issued Not Only on TABLE OBJECT, But Also on
VIEWS, SYNONYMS, INDEXES, SEQUENCES Etc.

SQL> GRANT SELECT

ON EMP
TO ENDUSERS;
SQL> GRANT INSERT, SELECT, DELETE
ON EMP
TO OPERATORS ;
SQL> GRANT INSERT (Empno, Ename, Job)
ON Emp
To EndUsers ;

REVOKE Command
Syntax
SQL> REVOKE <PrivilegeName1>, <PrivilegeName2>,
ON <ObjectName>
FROM <UserName>;

REVOKE is Used When We Want One Database To Stop Sharing The

Information With Other Users.

Revoke Privileges is Assigned Not Only On TABLE Object, But Also on

VIEWS, SYNONYMS, INDEXES Etc.

SQL> REVOKE INSERT, DELETE

ON EMP
FROM Operators;

Types of Privileges
System Privileges

They Allow A User To Perform Certain Actions Within The Database.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Object Privileges

An Object Privilege Allows A User To Perform Certain Actions on Database

Objects.

Checking The Object Privileges Granted

The Schema Object That Stores The Information About The Privileges
Granted is USER_TAB_PRIVS_MADE

The Columns of USER_TAB_PRIVS_MADE

GRANTEE

TABLE_NAME

GRANTOR

PRIVILEGE

GRANTABLE

HIERARCHY

SQL> SELECT
GRANTEE, TABLE_NAME "Table", GRANTOR, PRIVILEGE
FROM USER_TAB_PRIVS_MADE;

Checking Object Privileges Received

The Schema Object That Stores The Information About The PRIVILEGES That
Are Received is USER_TAB_PRIVS_RECD.

The Columns of USER_TAB_PRIVS_RECD

OWNER

TABLE_NAME

GRANTOR

PRIVILEGE

GRANTABLE

HIERARCHY

SQL> SELECT
OWNER, TABLE_NAME "Table", GRANTOR, PRIVILEGE
FROM USER_TAB_PRIVS_RECD;

Making Use Of Object Privileges

Once A Particular USER Has Been Granted An Object Privilege, The Specific
USER Can Perform The Tasks As Granted By The Privilege.

Steps To Be Performed

Connect To The Required User Using The USER Name and PASSWORD.

Execute The Required SQL Statement Using The Object Hierarchy.

SQL> SELECT *
FROM SCOTT.EMP;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Working With Roles

A ROLE is A Group of PRIVILEGES That Can Be Assigned To A USER OR

Another ROLE.

Advantages

Rather Than Assigning Privileges One At A Time Directly To A USER, We Can

CREATE A ROLE, Assign PRIVILEGES To That ROLE, And Then GRANT That
ROLE To Multiple USERS And ROLES.

When You Add OR Delete A Privilege From A Role, All Users And Roles
Assigned That ROLE Automatically Receive OR Lose Those Privileges.

We Can Assign Multiple Roles To A Single USER OR One ROLE To Another

ROLE.

A Role Can Be Assigned With A Password.

ROLEs Creation

To Create A Role We Should Have The CREATE ROLE SYSTEM Privilege.

The Steps in Implementing The Roles

Role Creation

Granting Privileges To Roles

Granting ROLES TO USERS OR OBJECTS

Syntax
SQL> CREATE ROLE <RoleName>
[IDENTIFIED BY <Password>];
SQL> CREATE ROLE Sales_Manger
IDENTIFIED BY SalesAudit;

Granting Privileges to ROLE

The ROLES Are Granted Privileges Using The GRANT Statement.

A Role Can Be Granted Both System As Well As Object Privileges At a Time.

SQL> GRANT SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE

ON EMP
TO Sales_Manager;

Granting A ROLE To a USER

SQL> GRANT Sales_Manager
TO
SCOTT;

Granting Multiple ROLES to Another ROLE

SQL> GRANT ROLE1, ROLE2,
TO <TARGET_ROLE_NAME>;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Checking ROLES Granted To A USER

The Schema Object USER_ROLE_PRIVS Specifies The ROLES Granted To A

USER.

The Columns of USER_ROLE_PRIVS

USERNAME

GRANTED_ROLE

ADMIN_OPTION

DEFAULT_ROLE

OS_GRANTED

SQL> SELECT USERNAME, GRANTED_ROLE

FROM USER_ROLE_PRIVS;

SYSTEM Privileges Granted to A ROLE

The Schema Object ROLE_SYS_PRIVS Specifies The SYSTEM PRIVILEGES

Granted To A ROLE.

The Columns of ROLE_SYS_PRIVS

ROLE

PRIVILEGE

ADMIN_OPTION

SQL> SELECT ROLE, PRIVILEGE

FROM ROLE_SYS_PRIVS;

OBJECT Privileges Granted to A ROLE

The Schema Object ROLE_TAB_PRIVS Specifies The OBJECT PRIVILEGES

Granted To A ROLE.

The Columns of ROLE_TAB_PRIVS

ROLE

COLUMN_NAME

OWNER

PRIVILEGE

TABLE_NAME

GRANTABLE

SQL> SELECT ROLE, PRIVILEGE

FROM ROLE_TAB_PRIVS;

Revoking a ROLE
SQL> REVOKE Sales_Manager
FROM SCOTT;

Revoking All Privileges From A ROLE

SQL> REVOKE ALL
ON Emp
FROM Sales_Manager;

Dropping A ROLE
Syntax
DROP ROLE <RoleName>;
SQL> DROP ROLE Sales_Manager;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Working With SYNONYMS

A Synonym is Schema Object, Which Acts As An Alternate Name For An

Existing Schema Object.

By Using A Synonym, We Can Avoid The Entry of The SCHEMA Name, When
Referencing Upon OBJECTS That Belong To Other SCHEMA.

The CREATE SYNONYM Privilege is Necessary To Execute The Creation of A

SYNONYM.

Syntax
SQL> CREATE [PUBLIC] SYNONYM <SynonymName>
FOR <SchemaName>. <ObjectName>;
Illustration
SQL> CREATE SYNONYM EmpInfo
FOR SCOTT.Emp;

SYNONYM Types

The Synonyms Are Practically of Two Types

PRIVATE SYNONYM

PUBLIC SYNONYM

We Should Have CREATE PUBLIC SYNONYM Privilege, Which Can Be

Accessed By All USERS in The Data Base.

SQL> CREATE PUBLIC SYNONYM EmpInfo

FOR SCOTT.Emp;

Dropping A Synonym
Syntax
DROP [PUBLIC] SYNONYM <SynonymName>;
Illustration
SQL> DROP SYNONYM EmpInfo;
SQL> DROP PUBLIC SYNONYM EmpInfo;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

OLAP Features in Oracle

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Some Features For Query Processing in ORACLE Include The Use Of ONLINE
ANALYTICAL PROCESSING(OLAP) Upon The Data Base.

OLAP Features Are Useful For Data Warehousing And Data Mart Applications.

The OLAP Operations Are Performance Enhancements.

TOP_N QUERIES.

GROUP BY.

CUBE.

ROLLUP.

ROLLUP Option

It is A GROUP BY Operation And is Used To Produce Subtotals At Any Level

Of The Aggregation.

The Generated Sub Totals Rolled Up To Produce Grant Total.

The Totaling is Based On A One Dimensional Data Hierarchy of Grouped

Information.

Syntax
GROUP BY ROLLUP ( Column1, Column2,..)
Illustrations
SQL> SELECT Deptno, SUM(SAL)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Deptno);
SQL> SELECT Job, SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Job);
SQL> SELECT Job, AVG(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Job);

Passing Multiple Columns To ROLLUP

When Multiple Columns Are Passed To ROLLUP, The ROLLUP, Groups The
Rows Into Blocks With The Same Column Values.

SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job, SUM(Sal) Salary

FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Deptno, Job);
SQL> SELECT Job, Deptno, SUM(Sal) Salary
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Job, Deptno);
SQL> SELECT Job, Deptno, AVG(Sal) Average
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Job, Deptno);

NULL Values in The Output Of ROLLUP Operations Typically Mean That The
Row Contains Subtotal Or Grant Total Information.

Use NVL() Function For Proper Meaning.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

CUBE Option

It is An Extension Similar To ROLLUP.

Cube Allows To Take A Specified Set of Grouping Columns And Crate Sub
Totals For All Possible Combinations of Them.

The Result of Cube is A Summary That Shows Subtotals For Every

Combination of Columns OR Expressions in The Group By Clause.

The Implementation
Tabulation.

of Cube is Also Called As N-Dimensional

Cross

SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job, SUM(Sal) Salary

FROM Emp
GROUP BY CUBE(Deptno, Job);
SQL> SELECT Job, Deptno , SUM(Sal) Salary
FROM Emp
GROUP BY CUBE( Job, Deptno);

Applying GROUPING() Function

The GROUPING() Function Accepts A Column And Returns 0 OR 1.

GROUPING() Function Returns 1 When The Column Value is NULL, And

Returns 0 When The Column Value is NOT NULL.

GROUPING() Function is Used Only Upon Queries That Use ROLLUP OR

CUBE.

GROUPING() Function is Useful When We Want To Display A Value When A

NULL Would Otherwise Be Returned in OLAP Queries.

SQL> SELECT GROUPING(Deptno), Deptno, SUM(Sal)

FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Deptno);
SQL> SELECT GROUPING(Job), Job, SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Job);

DECODE Function

It Is A Single Row Function.

The Function Works On The Same Principle As The If Then Else.

We Can Pass A Variable Number Of Values Into The Call Of The DECODE()
Function.

The First Item is Always The Name Of The Column That Need To Be Decoded.

Once All Value-Substitute Pairs Have Been Defined, We Can Optionally

Specify A Default Value.

Syntax
SQL> SELECT DECODE(ColumnName,
Value 1, Substitute1,
Value 2, Substitute2,
ReturnDefault)
FROM TableName;

The Function Has No Restriction on The INPUT And OUTPUT Data Type.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

It is The Most Power full Function in Oracle.

The Function Can Work For only an Analysis That Considers an Equality
Operator in The Logical Comparision.

SQL> SELECT Ename, Job, Sal,

DECODE(Deptno,
10, ACCOUNTING,
20, RESEARCH,
30 , SALES,
40 , OPERATIONS,
OTHER) Departments
FROM Emp
ORDER BY Departments;

GROUPING() With DECODE()

The DECODE() Function Can Be Used To Convert 1 And 0 Returned Through

GROUPING() into A Meaningful Output.

SQL> SELECT
DECODE(GROUPING(Deptno),
1, All Departments,
Deptno) Departments,
SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Deptno);
SQL> SELECT
DECODE(GROUPING(Job),
1, All Designations,
Job) Designations , SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Job);

DECODE() and GROUPING() To Converting Multiple Column Values

SQL> SELECT
DECODE(GROUPING(Deptno),
1, All Departments,
Deptno) Departments,
DECODE(GROUPING(Job),
1, All Designations,
Job) Designations,
SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Deptno, Job);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

GROUPING() With DECODE() and CUBE

SQL> SELECT
DECODE(GROUPING(Deptno),
1 , All Departments,
Deptno) Departments,
DECODE(GROUPING(Job),
1, All Designations,
Job) Designations,
SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY CUBE(Deptno, Job);

Applying GROUPING SETS Clause

The GROUPING SETS Clause is Used To Get The SUBTOTAL Rows.

SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job, SUM(Sal)

FROM Emp
GROUP BY
GROUPING SETS(Deptno, Job);

Working with CASE Expressions

The CASE Expression Can Be Used To Perform IfThenElse Logic in SQL.

CASE is Similar To DECODE But It is ANSI Compliant.

It Can be Used Even For Executing Conditions on range Based Comparison.

Case Expressions Are of Two Types

SIMPLE CASE Expressions

SEARCHED CASE Expressions.

Simple CASE Expressions

These Expressions Are Used To Determine The Returned Value.

They Work With Equality Comparison Only, Almost All Similar To DECODE.

It Has A Selector Which Associates To The Compared Value Either From The
Column or Constant.

The Value in The Selector is Used For Comparison With The Expressions
Used in The WHEN Clause.

Syntax
SQL> CASE Search_Expr
WHEN Expr 1 THEN Result 1
WHEN Expr 2 THEN Result 2
ELSE Default_Result
END

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Illustration
SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno,
CASE Deptno
WHEN 10 THEN ACCOUNTS
WHEN 20 THEN RESEARCH
WHEN 30 THEN SALES
WHEN 40 THEN OPERATIONS
ELSE NOT FOUND
END
FROM Emp;

Searched CASE Expressions

The Statement Uses Conditions To Determine The Returned Value.

It Helps in Writing Multiple Conditions For Evaluation.

Helps in Range Analysis of Values Also.

Syntax
SQL> CASE
WHEN Condition 1 THEN Result 1
WHEN Condition 2 THEN Result 2
WHEN Condition n THEN Resultn
ELSE DefaultResult
END
Illustration
SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno,
CASE
WHEN Deptno = 10 THEN ACCOUNTING
WHEN Deptno = 20 THEN RESEARCH
WHEN Deptno = 30 THEN SALES
WHEN Deptno = 40 THEN OPERATIONS
ELSE Not Specified
END
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, Sal,
CASE
WHEN Sal >= 800 AND Sal <= 2000 THEN LOWEST PAY
WHEN Sal >= 2001 AND Sal <= 4000 THEN MODERATE PAY
ELSE HIGH PAY
END
FROM Emp;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Materialized Views

Materialized Views Are Used in DATA WAREHOUSES AND DATA MARTS.

They Are Used To Increase The Speed of Queries on Very Large Scale
Databases.

Queries Making Use of Materialized Views Are

Aggregations on A Single Table.

Joins Between Tables.

Aggregations And Joins Together.

Materialized Views Can Be Used To Replicate Data.

Prior To Materialized Views, The Concept of Snapshot Was Implemented.

Query Rewrite

Materialized Views Improve Query Performance By Pre Calculating

Expensive Join And Aggregation Operations on The Database Prior To
Execution Time And Stores The Results in The Database.

The Query Optimizer Can Make Use of Materialized Views By Automatically

Recognizing When An Existing Materialized View Can And Should Be Used To
Satisfy A Request.

After Above Process is Completed Then The Query Optimizer Transparently

Rewrites The Request To Use The Materialized View.

Queries Are Then Directed To The Materialized View And Not To The
Underlying Detail Tables OR Views.

Rewriting Queries To Use Materialized Views Rather Than Detail Relations,

Results in A Significant Performance Gain.

Prerequisites For Materialized Views

Privileges
SQL> GRANT
QUERY REWRITE
TO SCOTT;
SQL> GRANT CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW
TO SCOTT;
SQL> ALTER SESSION
SET QUERY_REWRITE_ENABLED = TRUE;

Set the InitSid.ORA File

OPTIMIZER_MODE = CHOOSE
JOB_QUEUE_INTERVAL = 3600
JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES = 1
QUERY_REWRITE_ENABLED = TRUE
QUERY_REWRITE_INTEGRITY = ENFORCED

Materialized View With Aggregation

SQL> CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW EMP_SUM
ENABLE QUERY REWRITE
AS
SELECT Deptno , Job, SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

GROUP BY Deptno, Job;

Creating Optimizer Statistics and Refreshing Materialized Views

SQL> EXECUTE DBMS_UTILITY.ANALYZE_SCHEMA
(SCOTT, ESTIMATE);
SQL> EXECUTE DBMS_MVIEW.REFRESH(Emp_Sum);

Testing Materialized View

SQL> SET AUTOTRACE ON EXPLAIN;
SQL> SELECT Deptno, SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno, Job;

Materialized View with Join/Aggregation

SQL> CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW Emp_Dept_Sum
ENABLE QUERY REWRITE
AS
SELECT Dname, Job, SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp E , Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno = D.Deptno
GROUP BY Dname, Job;

Creating Optimizer Statistics and Refreshing Materialized Views

SQL> EXECUTE DBMS_UTILITY.ANALYZE_SCHEMA
(SCOTT, ESTIMATE);
SQL> EXECUTEDBMS_MVIEW.REFRESH(Emp_Dept_Sum);

Testing Materialized View

SQL> SET AUTOTRACE ON EXPLAIN;
SQL> SELECT Dname, Job, SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp E , Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno = D.Deptno
GROUP BY Dname, Job;

Putting the Things with ROLLUP

SQL> CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW Emp_Dept_Agg
ENABLE QUERY REWRITE
AS
SELECT Deptno, Job, COUNT(*), SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Deptno, Job);

GROUPING_ID() Function

The Function is Used To FILTER ROWS Using A HAVING Clause To Exclude

Rows That Do Not Contain A Subtotal OR Grand Total .

The Function Accepts One OR More Columns And Returns The Decimal
Equivalent of The GROUPING BIT VECTOR.

The GROUPING BIT VECTOR is Computed By Combining The Results Of A Call

To The GROUPING() Function For Each Column in Order.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Computing The GROUPING BIT VECTOR

GROUPING() Function Returns 1 When The Column Value is NULL, Else

Returns 0, Based On This Concept.

GROUPING_ID() Returns 0, When Deptno And Job Are NOT NULLS.

GROUPING_ID() Returns 1, If Deptno is NOT NULL And Job is NULL.

GROUPING_ID() Returns 2, If Deptno is NULL And Job is NOT NULL.

GROUPING_ID() Returns 3, If Deptno is NULL And Job is NULL.

SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job,

GROUPING(Deptno) GDPT,
GROUPING(Job) GJOB ,
GROUPING_ID(Deptno, Job) GRPID,
SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY ROLLUP(Deptno, Job);
SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job,
GROUPING(Deptno) GDPT,
GROUPING(Job) GJOB ,
GROUPING_ID(Deptno, Job) GRPID,
SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY CUBE(Deptno, Job);

GROUPING_ID() and HAVING Clause

SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job,
GROUPING_ID(Deptno, Job) GRPID,
SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY CUBE(Deptno , Job)
HAVING GROUPING_ID(Deptno, Job) > 0;

Representing Column Multiple Times in a GROUP BY Clause

A Column Can Be Represented Multiple Times in A GROUP BY Clause.

SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job, SUM(Sal)

FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno, ROLLUP(Deptno, Job);
SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job, SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno, CUBE(Deptno, Job);

Applying GROUP_ID Function

The GROUP_ID() Function is Used To Remove The Duplicate Rows Returned

By GROUP BY Clause.

The GROUP_ID() Does Not Accept Any Parameters.

If N Duplicates Exist For A Particular Grouping, GROUP_ID() Returns

Numbers in The Range 0 To N 1.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job, GROUP_ID(), SUM(Sal)

FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno, ROLLUP(Deptno, Job);
SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job, GROUP_ID(), SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno, CUBE(Deptno, Job);
SQL> SELECT Deptno, Job, GROUP_ID(), SUM(Sal)
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno, ROLLUP(Deptno, Job)
HAVING GROUP_ID() = 0;

Enhancing The Power of OLAP Using Analytic Functions

Analytic Functions Are Designed To Address Problems Such As

Calculate A Running Total.

Find Percentages With in A Group.

Top N Queries.

Compute Moving Averages.

Analytic Functions Add Greater Performance To The

Processing.

Standard Query

How Analytic Functions Work?

Analytic Functions Compute An Aggregate Value Based on A Group of Rows.

The Differences From Ordinary Aggregate Functions To Analytic Functions

Are, They Return Multiple Rows For Each Group.

The Group of Rows Are Called As WINDOW And is Defined By The Analytic
Clause.

For Each Row, A Sliding Window of Rows Are Defined.

The Window Define The Range of Rows Used To Perform The Calculation For
The Current Row.

Window Sizes Can Be Based Upon Either A Physical Number of Rows OR A

Logical Interval Such As Time.

Analytic Functions Are The Last Set Of Operations Performed in A Query,

Except For The Final ORDER BY Clause.

All JOINS, WHERE Clause, GROUP BY, And HAVING Clauses Are Completed
Before The Analytic Functions Are Processed.

Analytic Functions Can Appear Only in The SELECT List OR ORDER BY Clause.

Syntax
AnalyticFunction(Arg 1, Arg2, Ar3)
OVER(Partition Clause
ORDER BY Clause
Windowing Clause)

Analytic Function Takes 0 To 3 Arguments.

The PARTITION BY Clause Logically Breaks A Single Result Set Into N

Groups.

The Analytic Functions Are Applied For Each Group Independently, And They
Are Reset For Each Group.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The ORDER BY Clause Specifies How Data is Stored Within Each GROUP
(Partition).

The Output of Analytic Function is Affected By ORDER BY Clause.

The Windowing Clause Gives Us A Way To Define A

Function Will Operate, Within A Group.

Sliding (OR) Analytic

Analytic Functions Categories

Ranking Functions

They Enable US To Calculate Ranks, Percentiles and N-Tiles.

Inverse Percentile Functions

Enable To Calculate The Value Corresponding To A Percentile.

Window Functions

Enable To Calculate Cumulative And Moving Aggregates.

Reporting Functions

Enable To Calculate Area Like Market Shares.

LAG and LEAD Functions

Enable To Get A Value in A Row Where That Row is A Certain Number of

Rows Away From The Current Row.

First and Last Functions

Enable To Get The First And Last Values in An Ordered Group.

Linear Regression Functions

Enable To Fit An OrdinaryLeast Squares Regression Line To A Set of

Number Pairs.

Hypothetical Rank and Distribution Functions

Enable To Calculate The Rank And Percentile That A New Row Would Have If
A Value is Inserted Into A Table.

Normal Ranking
SQL> SELECT EName, Deptno, Sal,
RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY Sal) EmpRank
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno, EName, Sal ORDER By Emprank;
SQL> SELECT

EName, Deptno, Sal,

DENSE_RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY Sal DESC) EmpRank
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno, EName, Sal
ORDER BY EmpRank;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Ranking With Partition

SQL> SELECT EName, Deptno, Sal,
RANK()
OVER(PARTITION BY DeptNo
ORDER BY Sal DESC)
FROM

TOP Sal

Emp

ORDER BY Deptno, Sal DESC;

SQL> SELECT EName, DeptNo, Sal,
DENSE_RANK()
OVER(PARTITION BY Deptno
ORDER BY Sal DESC) TOP Sal
FROM Emp
ORDER BY DeptNo, Sal DESC;

Ranking With Partition And Filters

SQL> SELECT *
FROM(SELECT Ename, Deptno, Sal,
RANK()
OVER(PARTITION BY DeptNo
ORDER BY Sal DESC) TOP Sal
FROM Emp)
WHERE TOP Sal <=3
ORDER BY DeptNo, Sal DESC;

Applying Windows

The Windowing Clause Gives A Way To Define A SLIDING OR ANCHORED

WINDOW of Data, Upon Which The ANALYTIC FUNCTION Will Operate,
Within A GROUP.

The Default Window is An ANCHORED WINDOW That Simply Starts At The

FIRST ROW of A GROUP And Continues To The CURRENT ROW.

Window Can Be Based on

RANGES of Data Values.

ROWS OFFSET From The Current Row.

Existence of An ORDER BY in An Analytic Function Will Add A DEFAULT

WINDOW Clause of RANGE UNBOUNDED PRECEDING, Which Gets All Rows
in The Partition That Came Before The ORDER BY Clause.

Row WINDOW
SQL> SELECT DeptNo, Ename, Sal,
SUM(SAL)
OVER(PARTITION BY DeptNo
ORDER BY EName
ROWS 2 PRECEDING) Sliding Total
FROM Emp
ORDER BY DeptNo, EName;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Range WINDOW

RANGE WINDOWS Collect ROWS Together Based on A WHERE Clause.

The RANGE UNITS

Comparisons.

Range Units Are Not Valid if Data Type is Other Than Number OR Dates.

Can

Either

Numeric

Comparisons

Date

SQL> SELECT Ename,

HireDate, HireDate 100,
Count (*)
OVER (ORDER BY HireDate ASC
RANGE 100 PRECEDING) HireCnt
FROM Emp
ORDER BY HireDate ASC;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, Sal,
AVG(Sal)
OVER(ORDER BY HireDate ASC
RANGE 100 PRECEDING) AvgSal
FROM Emp
ORDER BY Hire Data ASC;

Accessing ROWS Around Current Row

LAG Function

Lag Provides Access To More Than One Row of A Table At The Same Time
Without The Use of SELF JOIN.

Given A Series of Rows Returned From A Query And A Position of The

Cursor, LAG Function Provides Access To A Row At A Given Offset Prior To
That Position.

If offset is Not Provided Than Default Offset is Considered As 1.

The Optional Default Value is Returned if The Offset Goes Beyond The Scope
of The Window.

If Default is Not Specified, Than The Default is Considered As NULL.

Syntax
LAG(ValueExpr(, Offset)(, DEFAULT))
OVER((Query-Partition-Clause)
ORDER BY CLAUSE)
LEAD Function

LEAD Provides Access To More Than One Row of A Table At The Same Time
Without The Use of A SELF JOIN.

Given A Series of Rows Returned From A Query And A Position of The

Cursor, LEAD Function Provides Access To A Row At A Given Physical Offset
Beyond That Position.

Syntax
LEAD(ValueExpr(, Offset)(, Default))
OVER((Query-Partition_Clause)
ORDER BY Clause)
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Illustration
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, Sal,
LAG(Sal, 1, 0)
OVER(ORDER BY HireDate) PreSal
FROM Emp;
SQL> SELECT Ename, HireDate, Sal,
LEAD(Sal, 1, 0)
OVER(ORDER BY HireDate) NextSal
FROM Emp;

FIRST_VALUE Function

FIRST_VALUE Returns The First Value in An Ordered Set of Values.

If The First Value in The Set is NULL, Then The Function Returns NULL
Unless IGNORE NULLS is Specified.

IGNORE NULLS Setting is Useful For Data Densification. If Specified Then

FIRST_VALUE Returns The Fist Non-Null Value in The Set, Else NULL is
Returned.

Syntax
FIRST_VALUE(EXPR IGNORE NULLS)
OVER(Analytic_Clause )

LAST_VALUE Function

LAST_VALUE Returns The LAST Value in An Ordered Set of Values.

If The Last Value in The Set is NULL, Then The Function Returns NULL Unless
IGNORE NULLS is Specified.

IGNORE NULLS Setting is Useful For Data Densification. If Specified Then

LAST_VALUE Returns The Fist Non-Null Value in The Set, Else NULL is
Returned.

Syntax
LAST_VALUE(EXPR IGNORE NULLS)
OVER(Analytic_Clause )
Illustration
SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno, Sal,
FIRST_VALUE(Ename)
OVER(PARTITION BY DeptNo
ORDER BY Sal DESC) Max_Sal_Name
FROM

Emp

ORDER BY DeptNo, Ename;

SQL> SELECT Ename, Deptno, Sal,
FIRST_VALUE(Ename)
OVER(ORDER BY Sal ASC) Min_Sal_Name
FROM (SELECT *
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

ROW_NUMBER Function

The ROW_NUMBER Function Assigns a Unique Number Sequentially, Starting

From 1, As Defined By ORDER BY To Each Row Within The Partition.

Syntax
ROW_NUMBER()
OVER([Query_Partition_Clause]
ORDER_BY_Clause )
SQL> SELECT
ROW_NUMBER()
OVER(PARTITION BY Deptno
ORDER BY Sal DESC NULLS LAST) RowNo,
Ename, Sal, Deptno,
FROM Emp;

CROSSTAB OR PIVOT Queries

A CROSSTAB Query Can Be Used To Get A Result With Rows And Columns in
A Matrix Form.

SQL> SELECT Deptno,

MAX(DECODE(Seqno, 1, Ename, NULL)) First,
MAX(DECODE(Seqno, 2, Ename, NULL)) Second,
MAX(DECODE(Seqno, 3, Ename, NULL) Third
FROM (SELECT Deptno, Ename,
ROW_NUMBER ( )
OVER (PARTITION BY Deptno
ORDER BY Sal DESC NULLS LAST) SeqNo
FROM Emp)
WHERE SeqNo <= 3
GROUP BY Deptno;

Centered SUM And Centered AVERAGE

CONSTRAINT ItemNameNN NOT NULL,

Description

VARCHAR2(100),

Price

NUMBER(5, 2)

);
SQL> CREATE TABLE Divisions
(
DivID

CHAR(3)

CONSTRAINT DivIDPK PRIMARY KEY,

DivName

VARCHAR2(15)

CONSTRAINT DivNameNN NOT NULL

);
SQL> CREATE TABLE JobMaster
(
JobID

CHAR(3)

CONSTRAINT JobIDPK PRIMARY KEY,

JobName

VARCHAR2(20)

CONSTRAINT JobNameNN NOT NULL

);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE TABLE EmpStores

(
EmpID

INTEGER

CONSTRAINT EmpSoresPK PRIMARY KEY,

DivID

CHAR(3)

CONSTRAINT DivIDFK REFERENCES Divisions(DivID),

JobID

CHAR(3)

CONSTRAINT JobIDFK REFERENCES JobMaster(JobID),

FirstName

VARCHAR2(10)

CONSTRAINT FNameNN NOT NULL,

LastName

VARCHAR2(10)

CONSTRAINT LNameNN NOT NULL,

Sal

NUMBER(6, 0)

);
SQL> CREATE TABLE AllSales
(
Year

INTEGER CONSTRAINT YearNN NOT NULL,

Month

INTEGER CONSTRAINT MonthNN NOT NULL,

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> INSERT INTO

EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (17, 'SUP', 'TEC', 'Matthew', 'Brant', 115000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (18, 'OPE', 'MGR', 'Tony', 'Clerke', 200000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (19, 'BUS', 'MGR', 'Tanya', 'Conway', 200000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (20, 'OPE', 'MGR', 'Terry', 'Cliff', 215000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (21, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Steve', 'Green', 275000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (22, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Roy', 'Red', 375000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (23, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Sandra', 'Smith', 335000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (24, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Gail', 'Silver', 225000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (25, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Gerald', 'Gold', 245000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (26, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Eileen', 'Lane', 235000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (27, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Doreen', 'Upton', 235000);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> INSERT INTO

EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (28, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Jack', 'Ewing', 235000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (29, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Paul', 'Owens', 245000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (30, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Melanie', 'York', 255000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (31, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Tracy', 'Yellow', 225000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (32, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Sarah', 'White', 235000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (33, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Terry', 'Iron', 225000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (34, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Christine', 'Brown', 247000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (35, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'John', 'Brown', 249000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (36, 'SAL', 'MGR', 'Kelvin', 'Trenton', 255000);
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpStores
(EmpID, DivID, JobID, FirstName, LastName, Sal)
VALUES (37, 'BUS', 'WOR', 'Damon', 'Jones', 280000);
SQL> COMMIT;

SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 3, 2003, 12, 3034.84);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 1, 3364.84);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 2, 4344.65);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 3, 4337.83);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 4, 2357.45);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 5, 6314.564);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 6, 4364.64);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 7, 2364.84);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 8, 3734.82);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 9, 3854.57);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 10, 3754.19);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 11, 1329.73);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (24, 4, 2003, 12, 7334.84);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (25, 1, 2003, 1, 1234.84);

SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (26, 5, 2003, 11, NULL);
SQL> INSERT INTO
AllSales (EmpID, ItemTypeID, Year, Month, SaleAmt)
VALUES (26, 5, 2003, 12, NULL);
SQL> COMMIT;

Illustrative Examples on The Above Database

Ranking Functions
The Different types of Ranking Functins are
1. RANK() Function

It returns the rank of items in a group.

RANK() leaves a gap in the sequence of rankings in the event of a tie.

2. DENSE_RANK() Function

It returns the rank of items in a group.

DENSE_RANK() doesnt leave a gap in the sequence of rankings in the

vent of tie.

SQL> SELECT ItemTypeID, SUM(SaleAmt),

RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC) Rank,
DENSE_RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC) Dense_Rank
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003 AND SaleAmt IS NOT NULL
GROUP BY ItemTypeID
ORDER BY ItemTypeID;

PARTITION BY Clause

The Clause is used to divide groups into subgroups.

SQL> SELECT ItemTypeID, Month, SUM(SaleAmt),

RANK()
OVER(PARTITION BY Month
ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC) Rank
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003 AND SaleAmt IS NOT NULL
GROUP BY ItemTypeID, Month
ORDER BY ItemTypeID, Month;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

APPLYING ROLLUP, CUBE AND GROUPING SETS

SQL> SELECT ItemTypeID, SUM(SaleAmt),
RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC) Rank
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY ROLLUP(ItemTypeID)
ORDER BY ItemTypeID;
SQL> SELECT ItemTypeID, EmpID, SUM(SaleAmt),
RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC) Rank
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY CUBE(ItemTypeID, EmpID)
ORDER BY ItemTypeID, EmpID;
SQL> SELECT ItemTypeID, EmpID, SUM(SaleAmt),
RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC) Rank
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY GROUPING SETS(ItemTypeID, EmpID)
ORDER BY ItemTypeID, EmpID;
SQL> SELECT ItemTypeID, SUM(SaleAmt),
RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC) Rank ,
DENSE_RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC) DENSE_RANK
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY ItemTypeID
ORDER BY ItemTypeID;

NULLS FIRST AND NULLS LAST CLAUSE

SQL> SELECT ItemTypeID, SUM(SaleAmt),
RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC NULL LAST ) Rank,
DENSE_RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC
NULLS LAST) Dense_Rank
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY ItemTypeID
ORDER BY ItemTypeID;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

CUME_DIST() Function

It returns the position of a specified value relative to a group of values.

The function represents the Cumulative distribution of the data.

PERCENT_RANK() Function

It returns the Percent Rank of a Value relative to a group by Values.

SQL> SELECT ItemTypeID, SUM(SaleAmt),

CUME_DIST()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC) Cumulative,
PERCENT_RANK()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt) DESC) Percent
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY ItemTypeID
ORDER BY ItemTypeID;

NTILE() Function

The NTILE (Buckets) is used to calculate ntiles.

Bucket specifies the number of buckets into which groups of rows are
placed.

SQL> SELECT ItemTypeID, SUM(SaleAmt),

NTILE(4)
OVER(ORDER BY Sum(SaleAmt) DESC ) AS Ntile
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003 AND SaleAmt IS NOT NULL
GROUP BY ItemTypeID
ORDER BY ItemTypeID;

ROW_NUMBER() Function

The Function is used to return a number with each row in a group.

The row number starts at 1.

SQL> SELECT ItemTypeID, SUM(SaleAmt),

ROW_NUMBER()
OVER(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt)
DESC) Row_Number
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY ItemTypeID
ORDER BY ItemTypeID;

INVERSE PERCENTAGE Function

These functions are used to get the value corresponding to a percentile.

The types of INVERSE percentile functions are

PERCENTILE_DIST()

It examines the cumulative distribution values in each group until

it finds one that is greater than or equal to x.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

PERCENTILE_CONT()

It examines the percent rank values in each group until it finds one
that is greater than or Equal to x.

SQL> SELECT
PERCENTILE_CONT(0.6)
WITHIN GROUP(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt)
DESC) Percentile_Cont ,
PERCENTILE_DIST(0.6)
WITHIN GROUP(ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt)
DESC) Percentile_Dist
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY ItemTypeID;

WINDOW FUNCTIONS

The WINDOW Functions are used to calculate Cumulative Sums and moving
averages within a specified range of rows.

Calculating Cumulative Sum

SQL> SELECT Month, SUM(SaleAmt) MonthlyAmt ,
SUM(SUM(SaleAmt)) OVER
(ORDER BY Month
ROWS BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PERCEDING AND
CURRENT ROW) CumulativeAmount
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY Month
ORDER BY Month;

UNBOUNDED PRECEDING

Specifies that the window starts at the first row of the partition.

UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING

Specifies that the window starts at the last row of the partition.

CURRENT ROW

Specifies that the window begins at the Current Row or Value.

SQL> SELECT Month, SUM(SaleAmt) MonthlyAmt ,

SUM(SUM(SaleAmt))
OVER(ORDER BY Month
ROWS UNBOUNDED PERCEDING
) CumulativeAmount
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003 AND Month BETWEEN 6 AND 12
GROUP BY Month
ORDER BY Month ;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Calculating Moving Averages

SQL> SELECT Month, SUM(SaleAmt) MonthlyAmt,
AVG(SUM(SaleAmt))
OVER(ORDER BY Month
ROWS BETWEEN 3 AND
CURRENT ROW
) MovingAverage
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY Month
ORDER BY Month ;

Calculating Centered Average

SQL> SELECT Month, SUM(SaleAmt) MonthAmt,
AVG(SUM(SaleAmt))
OVER(ORDER BY Month
ROWS BETWEEN 1 PRECEDING AND
1 FOLLOWING
) MovAvg
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY Month
ORDER BY Month;

Displaying First And Last Rows Using First_Value() and Last_Value()

SQL> SELECT Month, SUM(SaleAmt) MonthAmt,

FIRST_VALUE(SUM(SaleAmt))
OVER(ORDER BY Month
ROWS BETWEEN
1 PRECEDING AND
1 FOLLOWING
) PRVMonthAmt,
LAST_VALUE(SUM(SaleAmt)
OVER(ORDER BY Month
ROWS BETWEEN
1 PRECEDING AND
1 FOLLOWING
) NXTMonthAmt
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY Month
ORDER BY Month;

Working With REPORTING Functions

The Reporting function can be used to perform calculations across groups

and partitions within groups.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> SELECT Month, ItemTypeID,

SUM(SUM(SaleAmt))
OVER(PARTITION BY Month) Tot_Month_Amt,
SUM(SUM(SaleAmt))
OVER(PARTITION BY ItemTypeID) Tot_Pesd_Type_Amt
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003 AND Month < = 3
GROUP BY Month, ItemTypeID
ORDER BY Month, ItemTypeID;

RATIO_TO_REPORT() Function

The function is used to compute the ratio of a value to the sum of a set of
values.

SQL> SELECT Month, ItemTypeID, SUM(SaleAmt) ItemTypeAmt,

RATIO_TO_REPORT(SUM(SaleAmt))
OVER(PARTITION BY Month) ProTypeRatio
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003 AND Month < = 3
GROUP BY Month, ItemTypeID
ORDER BY Month, ItemTypeID;

LAG() and LEAD() Functions

They Are used to get a value in a row, where that row is a certain number of
rows away from the current row.

SQL> SELECT Month ,

SUM(SaleAmt) MonthAmt ,
AVG(SUM(SaleAmt), 1)
OVER(ORDER BY Month) PrevMthAmt ,
LEAD(SUM(SaleAmt), 1)
OVER(ORDER BY Month) NextMthAmt
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003 AND Month < = 3
GROUP BY Month
ORDER BY Month;
SQL> SELECT MIN(Month)
KEEP(DENSE_RANK FIRST
ORDER BY SUM(SaleAmt)) LowestSaleMonth
FROM AllSales
WHERE Year = 2003
GROUP BY Month
ORDER BY Month;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Data Updating And Deletion

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Updating The Data in A Table

The UPDATE Statement is Used To Change The Existing Values in A Table OR

in The Base Table of View.

It Can Be Used To UPDATE The Master Table of Materialized View.

Prerequisites

The Table Must Be in The Own Schema.

UPDATE Object Privilege Should Be Available.

Syntax:
SQL> UPDATE <Table_Name>
SET <Specification>
WHERE Clause;
SQL> UPDATE EMP
SET Comm = NULL
WHERE Job = CLERK;
SQL> UPDATE Emp
SET
(Job, Deptno) = (SELECT Job, Deptno
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = 7499)
WHERE Empno = 7698;
SQL> UPDATE Emp
SET Deptno = (SELECT Deptno
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = 7788)
WHERE Job = (SELECT Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = 7788);

Applying Default Values

It is Used To UPDATE A Value in A Column With DEFAULT Value Set in The

Constraints.

DEFAULT Key Word is Introduced From Oracle 9i Onwards.

SQL> UPDATE Emp

SET Sal = DEFAULT
WHERE Ename = SMITH;
SQL> UPDATE Emp
SET HireDate = DEFAULT
WHERE Ename = TAYLOR;

Returning Clause

The Returning Clause is Introduced From 10g.

It is Used To Return A Value From A Aggregate Function.

The Clause Can Be Specified For Tables And Materialized Views And For
Views With A Single Base Table.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Restrictions:

Each Expression Must Be A Simple Expression OR A Single Set Aggregate

Function.

It Cannot Be Specified For Multi Table Insert.

It Cannot Be Used With Parallel DML OR With Remote Objects.

It Cannot Be Used To Retrieve Long Types.

It Cannot Be Specified Upon A View Upon Which A Instead of Trigger is

Defined.

SQL> VARIABLE SumSal NUMBER

SQL> UPDATE Emp
SET Sal = Sal * 1.1
WHERE Deptno = 10
RETURNING SUM(Sal) INTO :SumSal;
SQL> PRINT SumSal;

MERGE Statement

The MERGE Statement is Used To SELECT Rows From One OR More Sources
For UPDATE OR INSERT Into One OR More Tables.

The MERGE Statement is Convenient To Combine Multiple Operations And

Avoid Multiple INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE.

MERGE is A Deterministic Statement, Using Which The Same Row of The

Target Table Can Be Transacted Multiple Times in The Same MERGE
Statement.

Illustrations
SQL> CREATE TABLE MyBonus
(
Empno NUMBER,
Bonus NUMBER DEFAULT 100
);
SQL> INSERT INTO MyBonus(Empno)
(SELECT E.Empno
FROM Emp E
WHERE Job = 'SALESMAN');
SQL> MERGE INTO MyBonus B
USING (SELECT Empno, Sal, Deptno
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30) S
ON (B.Empno = S.Empno)
WHEN MATCHED THEN
UPDATE
SET B.Bonus = B.Bonus + S.Sal * 0.1
DELETE
WHERE (S.Sal > 4000)
WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN
INSERT(B.Empno, B.Bonus)
VALUES(S.Empno, S.Sal * 0.1)
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

WHERE(S.Sal <= 4000;

SQL> CREATE TABLE ExamTimeTable
(
ExamName VARCHAR2(30),
ExamTime

VARCHAR2(12),

CONSTRAINT ExamNamePK PRIMARY KEY(ExamName)

);
SQL> INSERT INTO ExamTimeTable
VALUES ('PHYSICAL SCIENCES' , '9:00 AM');
SQL> MERGE INTO ExamTimeTable E1
USING ExamTimeTable E2
ON
(
E2.ExamName = E1.ExamName AND
E1.ExamName = 'PHYSICAL SCIENCES'
)
WHEN MATCHED THEN
UPDATE
SET E1.ExamTime = '10:30 AM'
WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN
INSERT(E1.ExamName, E1.ExamTime)
VALUES('PHYSICAL SCIENCES' , '10:30 AM');
SQL> MERGE INTO ExamTimeTable E1
USING ExamTimeTable E2
ON
(
E2.ExamName = E1.ExamName AND
E1.ExamName = 'CHEMICAL SCIENCES'
)
WHEN MATCHED THEN
UPDATE SET E1.ExamTime = '12:30 PM'
WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN
INSERT(E1.ExamName, E1.ExamTime )
VALUES('CHEMICAL SCIENCES' , '12:30 PM');

DELETE Statement

It is Used To Remove Rows From

An Un Partitioned OR Partitioned Table.

The Un Partitioned OR Partitioned Base Table of A View.

The Un Partitioned OR Partitioned Container Table of Writable Materialized

View.

Prerequisites

To DELETE Rows From A Table, The TABLE Must Be in The USERS SCHEMA.

To DELETE Rows From A Materialized View, DELETE OBJECT Privilege is A

Must.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DELETE ANY TABLE System Privilege Allows To DELETE Rows From Any
TABLE OR PARTITION TABLE OR Form The Base Table of Any VIEW.

Syntax
SQL> DELETE [FROM] <Table_Name>
[WHERE Condition];
Using RETURNING Clause
SQL> DELETE FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = 7864;
SQL> DELETE FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 20;
SQL> DELETE FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = (SELECT Deptno
FROM Dept
WHERE Dname = SALES);
SQL> VARIABLE Salary NUMBER;
SQL> DELETE FROM Emp
WHERE Job = SALESMAN AND HireDate < SYSDATE
RETURNING SUM(Sal) INTO :Salary;
SQL> PRINT :Salary;

Transaction Control

Oracle Server Ensures Data Consistency Based Upon Transactions.

Transactions Consist of DML Statements That Make Up One Consistent

Change To The Data.

Transaction Start And End Cases

A Transaction
Encountered.

The Transaction Terminates When The Following Specifications Occur.

Begins

When

The

First

A COMMIT OR ROLLBACK is Issued.

A DDL Statement Issued.

A DCL Statement Issued.

The User Exists The SQL * Plus

Failure of Machine OR System Crashes.

Executable

SQL

Statement

A DDL Statement OR A DCL Statement is Automatically Committed And

Hence Implicitly Ends A Transaction.

Explicit Transaction Control Statements

The Logic of Transaction Can Be Controlled By Using

COMMIT

It Ends The Current Transaction By Making All Pending Data Changes

Permanent.

SAVEPOINT <Name>

It Marks A SAVEPOINT Within The Current Transaction.

ROLLBACK [To Savepoint Name]

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

It Ends The Current Transaction By Discarding All Pending Data Changes.

State of Data Before Commit OR Rollback

Every Data Change Made During The Transaction is Temporary Until The
Transaction is Committed.

Data Manipulation Operations Primarily Do Not Affect The State of The Data,
Hence The Can Be Recovered.

The Current User Can Review The Results of The Data Manipulation
Operation By Querying The Tables.

Other Users Cannot View The Results of The Data Manipulation Operations
Made By The Current User.

The Oracle Server Institutes Read Consistency To Ensure That Each User
Sees Data As It Existed At The Time of Last Commit.

State of The Data After Commit is Issued

Data Changes Are Written To The Database Permanently.

The Previous State of The Data in The Database is Permanently Lost.

All Users Can View The Results of The Recent Transactional Change.

The Locks on The Affected Rows Are Automatically Released.

All SAVEPOINTS Are Erased.

SQL> COMMIT;
State OF The Data After Rollback

Rollback Statement is Used To Discard All Pending Changes.

The Data Changes Are Undone.

The Previous State of The Data is Returned OR Restored.

The LOCKS on The Affected Rows Are Released Automatically.

SQL> ROLLBACK;
Rolling Back Changes To A Savepoint

SAVEPOINT is Used To Create A Marker in The Current Transaction.

Using SAVEPOINT The Transaction Can Be Discarded Up To The Marker By

Using The ROLLBACK Statement.

SQL> ROLLBACK

<SAVEPOINTName>;

If a Second SAVEPOINT is Created With The Same Name As An Earlier

SAVEPOINT, The Earlier SAVEPOINT is Deleted.

Alterting The Table Definition

Syntax For Adding Column
SQL> ALTER TABLE <Table_name>
ADD
(
ColumnName DataType [DEFAULT Exp],
ColumnName DataType]
);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Syntax For Modifying Column

SQL> ALTER TABLE <TableName>
MODIFY
(
ColumnName DataType [DEFAULT Exp],
Column DataType]
);
Adding A Column To A Table

The ADD Clause is Used To Add Columns For An Existing Table.

SQL> ALTER TABLE Dept30

ADD
(
Job VARCHAR2(9)
);

Guidelines For ADDING Column

A Column Can Be ADDED OR MODIFIED But Cannot Be Dropped From A

Table.

We Cannot Specify The Location Where The Column Can Appear, It By

Default Becomes The Last Column.

If The Table Contains Records, Before The Column is Added, The New
Column Contains NULL Values.

Modifying A Column

A Column Data Type, Size And Default Value Can Be Changed.

A Change To The Default Value Affects Only Subsequent Insertions To The

Table.

Guidelines To Modify A Column

We Can Increase The Width OR Precision of A Numeric Column.

We Can Decrease The Width of A Column If The Column Contains Only NULL
Values And If The Table Has No Rows.

We Can Change The Data Type If The Column Contains NULLs.

We Can Convert A CHAR Column To The VARCHAR2 Data Type OR Convert A

VARCHAR2 Column To The CHAR Data Type If The Column Contains NULL
Values OR If The Size is Not Changed.

Dropping A Column

A Column Can Be Dropped From A Table By Using The ALTER TABLE

Statement.

The DROP COLUMN Clause is Used For This Purpose And The Feature is
Enabled From Oracle 8i Onwards.

Guidelines To Drop A Column

The Column May OR May Not Contain Data.

Only One Column Can Be Dropped At A Time.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Table Must Have At Least One Column Remaining in It After It is

Altered.

Once A Column is Dropped It Cannot Be Recovered.

SQL> ALTER TABLE Dept30

DROP Column Job;

SET UNUSED Option

The SET UNUSED OPTION Marks One OR More Columns As Unused Such That
They Can Be Dropped When The Demand on System Resources is Less(8i).

The Response Time is Faster Than The DROP Clause.

Unused Columns Are Treated As if They Were Dropped, Even Trough Their
Column Data Remains in The Tables Rows.

After A Column Has Been Marked Unused, We Cannot Have Access To That
Column.

The Names And Types of Columns Marked Unused Will Not Be Displayed
During A Describe.

We Can ADD To A TABLE A New Column With The Same Name As An Unused
Column.

SQL> ALTER TABLE Dept30

SET UNUSED(Ename);

DROP UNUSED Columns Option

This Option Removes From The Table All Columns Currently Marked As
Unused.

The Option is Used When We Want To Reclaim The Extra Disk Space From
Unused Columns in The Table.

If The Table Does Not Contain UNUSED Columns The Statement Returns
With No Errors.

SQL> ALTER TABLE Dept30

DROP UNUSED COLUMNS;

Dropping A Table

It Removes The Definition of The ORACLE TABLE.

The Command Not Only Drops The TABLE But The ENTIRE DATABASE is Lost
Along With The ASSOCIATED INDEXES.

Syntax
SQL> DROP TABLE <TableName>
[CASCADE CONSTRAINTS];
SQL> DROP TABLE Dept30
CASCADE CONSTRAINTS;

Guidelines To Drop Table

The Data is Totally Deleted From The Table.

Any VIEWS And SYNONYMS Will Remain But Are Kept in Invalid State.

Any Pending Transactions Are Committed.

Only The Creator OR Owner of The Table OR A USER With DROP ANY TABLE
Privilege Can Remove A Table From Database.

The DROP TABLE Statement Once Executed is Irreversible.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Changing The Name of An Object

The RENAME Command Can Be Used To Change The Name of A

TABLE

VIEW

SEQUENCE

SYNONYM

To RENAME The OBJECT We Must Be The OWNER of The OBJECT.

Syntax
SQL> RENAME <OldName> TO <NewName>;
Illustration
SQL> RENAME Dept TO Department;

Truncating A Table

It Is Used To Remove All Rows From A TABLE And To Release The STORAGE
SPACE Used By The Specific TABLE.

The TRUNCATE TABLE Will Not Facilitate For ROLLBACK.

Syntax
SQL> TRUNCATE TABLE <TableName>;
Illustration
SQL> TRUNCATE TABLE Department;

To TRUNCATE A TABLE We Must Be The OWNER of The TABLE.

Applying Comments Upon A Table

The COMMENTS Command is Used To ADD Comments

COLUMN OR VIEW Etc.

Each Comment Can Be Up To 2000 Bytes.

To A TABLE OR A

The Data Dictionary In Which Comments Are Stored Are

ALL_COL_COMMENTS

ALL_TAB_COMMENTS

USER_COL_COMMENTS

USER_TAB_COMMENTS

Syntax
SQL> COMMENT ON TABLE <TableName>/ COLUMN
<Tablename.Column> is Text;
Illustration
SQL> COMMENT ON TABLE Emp
IS
The Table Storing Employee Information;
SQL> COMMENT ON COLUMN Emp.MGR
IS
This Column is Actually Storing The Registered Employee Numbers As
Manager Numbers, With A Self Relation;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Dropping A Comment

A Comment is Dropped From The Database By Setting It To An Empty String.

SQL> COMMENT ON TABLE Emp

IS ;

Advanced Table Creation Strategies

Creating A Table From An Existing Table
ON The FLY Tables

Oracle Allows The Creation of A New Table On-The-Fly, Depending on A

SELECT Statement on An Already Existing Table.

Syntax
SQL> CREATE TABLE <TableName>
AS
SELECT Columns
FROM TableName;
[WHERE Condition];

The CREATE TABLE AS SELECT Command Will Not Work If one of The
Selected Columns Use LONG Data Type.

When The New Table is Described It Reveals That It Has INHERITED The
Column Definition From The Existing Table.

Using This Style We Can Include All Columns Using Asterisk OR A Subset of
Columns From Table.

The New Table Can Contain INVENTED COLUMNS Which Are The Product of
Function of The Combination of Other Columns.

The Column Definition Will Adjust To The Size Necessary To Contain The
Data in The INVENTED COLUMNS.

Creating An Exact Copy

SQL> CREATE TABLE SampDept
AS
SELECT *
FROM Dept;

Creating An Exact Copy With Different Column Names

SQL> CREATE TABLE SampDept1
(
DeptID,
DeptName,
Place
)
AS
SELECT *
FROM Dept;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Creating A Copy With Required Columns

SQL> CREATE TABLE SampDept3
AS
SELECT DeptNo, Dname
FROM Dept;

Creating A Copy With Required Columns

SQL > CREATE TABLE SampDept3
(
DeptID,
DeptName
)
AS
SELECT DeptNo, Dname
FROM Dept;

Creating A Copy With Invented Columns

SQL> CREATE TABLE SampDept3
(
DeptID,
DeptName,
DeptBudget
)
AS
SELECT D.DeptNo, D.Dname, SUM(E.Sal)
FROM Emp E, Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno = D.Deptno
GROUP BY D.Deptno, D.Dname;

Creating A Copy Without Data

SQL> CREATE TABLE Sampdept3
AS
SELECT *
FROM Dept
WHERE 1 = 2;

Creating A TABLE Without Generating REDO LOG Entries

REDO LOG Entries Are Chronological Records of Database Actions Used

During Database Recoveries.

The REDO LOG Entries Generation Can Be Avoided By Using The NOLOGGING
Keyword.

By Circumventing With NOLOGGING Key Word The Performance of The

CREATE TABLE Command Will Improve As Less Work is Being Done.

As The New Table Creation is Not Being Written To The REDO LOG Files ,The
Table Will Not Be Able To Re-Create, Following A Database Failure.

The REDO LOG Files Are Used To Recover The Database.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE TABLE SampDept

NOLOGGING
AS
SELECT *
FROM Dept;

Creating Index Organized Table:

An Index Organized Table Keeps Its Data Stored According To The PRIMARY
Key Column Values in The Table.

An Index Organized Table Stores Its Data As if The Entire Table Was Stored
in An INDEX.

To Create An Index Organized Table The ORGANIZATION INDEX Clause of

The CREATE TABLE is Used.

To Create A Table As An Index Organized Table We Must Create A PRIMARY

KEY Constraint on It.

Illustration
SQL> CREATE TABLE Sample
(
SampID

NUMBER(4),

SampName

VARCHAR2(20),

SampDate

DATE,

CONSTRAINT SampIDSampNamePK
PRIMARY KEY(SampID, SampName)
)
ORGANIZATION INDEX;

To Minimize The Amount of Active Management of The Index Organized

Table, We Should Create it Only if The Tables Data is Very Static.

An Index
Organized Table is Most Effective When The Primary Key
Constitutes A Large Part of The Tables Columns.

Working With Partitioned Tables

Dividing The Rows of A Single Table Into Multiple Parts is Called Partitioning
of A Table.

The Table That is Partitioned is Called PARTITIONED TABLE And The Parts
Are Called PARTITIONS.

The Partitioning is Useful For Very Large Tables Only.

Important Goals Behind Partitioning

The Performance Of Queries Against The Tables Can Improve Performance

The Management Of The Table Becomes Easier

As The Partitioned Table Data is Stored In Multiple Parts, It is Easier To Load

And Delete Data in Partitions Than in The Large Table.

The Backup And Recovery Operation Can Be Performed Better.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Normal Un Partitioned Table

SQL> CREATE TABLE SampleTable
(
SampleID NUMBER(4)
CONSTRAINT SampIDPK
PRIMARY KEY,
SampName VARCHAR2(20),
SampDate DATE,
SampDesc LONG
);

Creating Range Partition Table

SQL> CREATE TABLE SampleTablePart
(
SampID NUMBER(4) PRIMARY KEY ,
SampName VARCHAR2(20),
SampDate DATE,
SampDesc VARCHAR2(4000)
)
PARTITION BY RANGE(SampID)
(
PARTITION SampIDPart1
VALUES LESS THAN(500),
PARTITION SampIDPart2
VALUES LESS THAN(1000)
PARTITION SampIDPart3
VALUES LESS THAN(MAXVALUE)
);

The Maximum Value Need Not Be Specified For The Last Partition, The
MAXVALUE Keyword is Specified.

The MAXVALUE Specifies Oracle To Use The Partition To Store Any Data That
Could Not Be Stored In The Earlier Partitions.

We Can Create Multiple Partitions Each With Its Own Upper Value Defined.

The Minimum Value For The Range is Implicitly Determined By Oracle From
The Definition of The Preceding Partition.

Hash Partitions Upon A Table

A Hash Partition Upon A Table Determines The Physical Placement of Data.

The Physical Placement of Data is Determined By Performed A Hash

Function On The Values of The Partition Key.

In Hash Partition Consecutive Values of The Partition Key Are Not Generally
Stored in The Same Partition.

Hash Partitioning Distributes A Set of Records Over A Greater Set of

Partitions, Decreasing The Likelihood For I/O Contention.

To Create A Hash Partition We Use The PARTITION BY HASH Clause.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE TABLE Emptablehash

(
Empno

NUMBER(6)

CONSTRAINT Empnopk PRIMARY KEY,

Ename

VARCHAR2(30),

Job

VACHAR2(30),

Deptno

NUMBER(2)

CHECK Deptno IN(10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90),
Sal

NUMBER(8, 2),

CONSTRAINT Deptnofk_Hash
FOREIGN KEY(Deptno)
REFERENCES Dept(Deptno )
)
PARTITION BY HASH(Deptno)
PARTITIONS 9;

Format Choices

Specify The Number of Partitions And The Table Space To Use.

Specify The Named Partitions.

SQL> CREATE TABLE Emptablehash

(
Empno NUMBER(6)
CONSTRAINT Empnopk PRIMARY Key
..
)
PARTITION BY HASH(Deptno)
PARTITION 2 STRORE IN (Deptnopart1TS, Deptnopart2TS);

Working With List Partitioning

In LIST PARTITIONING We Specify Oracle All The Possible Values And

Designate The Partition Into Which The Corresponding Rows Should Be
Inserted.

SQL> CREATE TABLE Empsamplelist

(
Emp

NUMBER(4)

Constraint Empnopk PRIMARY KEY,

Ename

VARCHAR2(20),

Sal

NUMBER(8, 2),

Hiredate Date,
Deptno

NUMBER(2),

Job

VARCHAR2(15),

CONSTRAINT DeptnoFK
FOREIGN KEY(Deptno) REFERENCES Dept(Deptno)
)

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

PARTITION BY LIST(Job)
(
PARTITION Jpart1
VALUES (PRESIDENT, ANALYST),
PARTITION Jpart2
VALUES(MANAGER, SALESMAN, CLERK)
);

Generating Sub Partitions

Sub Partitions Are Partitions of Partitions.

Sub Partitions Can Be Used To Combine The Two Types of Partitions

RANGE Partitions

HASH Partitions

In Very Large Tables, The Composite Partition Strategy is An Effective Way

of Separating The Data Into Manageable And Tunable Divisions.

SQL> CREATE TABLE Empsamplesubpart

(
Empno

NUMBER(6) PRIMARY KEY,

Ename

VARCHAR2(30),

Sal

NUMBER(8, 2),

Deptno

NUMBER(2),

Job

VARCHAR2(30),

CONSTRAINT Deptnofk
FOREIGN KEY(Deptno)
REFERENCES Dept(Deptno)
)
PARTITION BY RANGE(Ename)
SUBPARTITION BY HASH(JOB)
SUBPARTITIONS 5
(
PARTITION Namep1
VALUES LESS THAN(M),
PARTITION Namep2
VALUES LESS THAN(MAXVALUE)
);

Splitting Table Partitions

SQL> ALTER TABLE SampleTablePart
SPLIT PARTITION Sampidpart3 AT (2000)
INTO
(
PARTITION Sampidpart3,
PARTITION Sampidpart4
);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> ALTER TABLE Empsamplelist

SPLIT PARTITION Jpart2
VALUES(SALESMAN)
INTO
(
PARTITION JSalesMan,
PARTITION SSalesMan
);

Merging Table Partitions

SQL> ALTER TABLE Empsamplelist
MERGE PARTITIONS
Jpart1,

Jsalesman

INTO PARTITION Jpart1;

SQL> ALTER TABLE Sampletablepart
MERGE PARTITIONS
Sampidpart2, Samplepart3
INTO PARTITION Sampidpart3;

Dropping A Table Partition

SQL> ALTER TABLE Sampletablepart
DROP PARTITION Sampleidpart3;
SQL> ALTER TABLE Empsamplelist
DROP PARTITION Jpart1;

Creating Indexes upon Partitions

Once A Partitioned Table is Created, We Have To Create An Index Upon That

Table.

The Index May Be Partitioned According To The Same Range of Values As

That Were Used To Partition The Table.

The Indexed Partitions Can Be Placed Into Specific Table Spaces.

SQL> CREATE INDEX Empsamplelistinx

ON Empsamplelist(Job)
LOCAL
(
PARTITION Jpart1, Jpart2
);

The LOCAL Keyword Tells Oracle To Create A Separate Index For Each
Partition on The Table.

The GLOBAL Keyword Tells Oracle To Create A Non Partitioned Index.

LOCAL Indexes Are Easier To Manage Than GLOBAL Indexes.

GLOBAL Indexes Can Perform Uniqueness Checks Faster Than LOCAL

Indexes.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Object Oriented Concepts in Oracle

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Object Tables

Object Tables Are Created By Using The User Defined Data Types.

In An Object Table Each Row OR Record is Treated As An Object.

Each Row in An Object Table Has An Object Identifier(OID), Which is Unique

Through Out The Database.

The OID is Generated And Assigned By Oracle When The Row OR Object is
Created.

The Rows OR Objects of An Object Table Can Be Referenced By Other

Objects With in The Database.

An Object Table is Created Using The CREATE TABLE Command.

All Object Tables Automatically Inherit The Data Types From The User
Defined Data Types.

All Object Types Are Associated With Default Methods Applied Upon The
Relational Tables i.e. INSERT, DELETE, UPDATE And SELECT.

The Relational DML Operation Style is Accepted Only When The User Defined
Data Type is A Collection of Built-in Data Types, And The Object Table Does
Not Contain Any REF Constraints.

Creating An User Defined Object Type

Syntax
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE <TypeName>
AS OBJECT
(
ColumnName1 DataType(Size),
Column Name2 DataType(Size),
ColumnNameN DataType(Size)
);

All User Defined Data Types Are Schema Objects of The Database.

The User Defined Object Data Type Can Be Used As Reference in Other
Tables, OR Instantiated As Object Table Directly.

All User Defined Data Types And Objects Are Stored Permanently in The
Data Dictionaries

USER_TYPES

USER_OBJECTS

We Can Query For The User Defined Data Types And Objects Using The
Relational SELECT.

SQL> SELECT TYPE_NAME, TYPECODE,

ATTRIBUTES, METHODS
FROM USER_TYPES;
SQL> SELECT OBJECT_NAME,
OBJECT_TYPE
FROM USER_OBJECTS;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Creating User Defined Student Type

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE Student
AS
OBJECT
(
Studid

NUMBER(6)

,Sname

VARCHAR2(20)

,DOB

DATE

,DOA

DATE

,FEES

NUMBER(7, 2)

);

The Above Statement Creates The User Defined Object Data Type Called As
Student And Stores it in The Data Dictionary Called USER_TYPES.

This Data Type is Also Called As Collection in Oracle, And This Collection is
Reusable Where Ever The Same Data Type Collection is Expected in Project
Development.

Creating An object Table

Syntax
SQL> CREATE TABLE TableName
OF TypeName;
Illustration
SQL> CREATE TABLE McaStudent
OF Student;

The Above Statement Creates The Object Table McaStudent As An Abstract

Data Type.

Each Row in The Object Table Has An OID Value Generated By Oracle Server.

The Rows in The Object Table Are Referenced As OBJECTS.

Inserting Rows Into OBJECT TABLES

To INSERT A Record into An OBJECT TABLE We May Use The CONSTRUCTOR

METHOD of The Actual Data Type OR Directly Implement The RELATIONAL
INSERT Statement.

The Normal INSERT OR RELATIONAL INSERT is Possible Only When The

Table Does Not Contain Any Nested Data Types.

Relational INSERT
SQL> INSERT INTO McaStudent
VALUES(1234, Kumar, 07-Oct-98, SYSDATE, 15000);

INSERT Records into Specific Columns

SQL> INSERT INTO McaStudent(StudID, SName)
VALUES(1234, Krishna);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

INSERT Using CONSTRUCTOR Method

SQL> INSERT INTO McaStudent
VALUES(Student(
1234,
Satish,
05-SEP-99,
SYSDATE,
1300
)
);

UPDATE Data From OBJECT TABLE

SQL> UPDATE McaStudent
SET Sname = Sri Ram
WHERE StudID = 1234;

DELETE Data From OBJECT TABLE

SQL> DELETE FROM McaStudent
WHERE StudID = 1234;
SQL> DELETE FROM McaStudent;

SELECT Data From OBJECT TABLE

The Abstract Data Types Column Can Be Referred As A Part of The Tables
Columns.

SQL> SELECT *
FROM McaStudent;
SQL> SELECT StudID, Sname
FROM McaStudent;
SQL> SELECT StudID, Sname
FROM McaStudent
WHERE StudID = 1234

Creating Table With User Defined Data Type

SQL> CREATE TABLE MBAStudent
(
StudentColl

STUDENT,

Semester

VARCHAR2(10),

SemStartDate

DATE,

SemEndDate

DATE,

Specialization

VARCHAR2(20)

);

Once The User Defined Data Types Are Created We Can Instantiate Them in
The Normal Relational Tables.

These Instances Look As Normal Attributes With in The Table, But Can Be
Operated Only With CONSTRUCTOR METHOD OR OBJECT VIEWS.

In Any of The Operation We Have To Provide Reference To All Attributes

With in The Instance, But Partial Association is Not Accepted.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> INSERT INTO MBAStudent

VALUES(
STUDENT(
1234,
SAMPATH,
10-DEC-85,
SYSDATE,
25000
),
FIRST,
25-JUL-07,
25-OCT-07,
MARKETING
);

The REF() Function

The REF() Function Allows To Reference Existing Row Objects.

The OID Assigned To Each Row Can Be Seen By Using The REF Function

SQL> SELECT REF(A)

FROM McaStudent A
WHERE SName = SATISH;

REF() Always Returns The OID of The Registered Objects in The Object
Table.

REF() Always Expects The Alias of The Object Table As Argument.

The REF(A) Value Will Be Different Under Different Systems And May Be
Wrapped Onto Multiple Lines.

The REF() Function Can Only Reference Row Objects ,Hence We Cannot Use
REF() For Referencing Column Objects.

The Column Objects Can Be of

Abstract Data Types.

LOBs.

Collections.

The REF() Function By Itself Does Not Give Any Useful Information.

DEREF() Function

The DEREF() Function Takes A Reference Value i.e, The OID Generated For A
Reference And Returns The Original Value of The Row Object.

SQL> CREATE TABLE StudentIncharges

(
InchargeName

VARCHAR2(30),

StudentIncharge

REF STUDENT

);

The StudentIncharge Column References The Data That is Stored Elsewhere

in The System.

The REF() Function Points The StundentIncharge Column To A ROW OBJECT

of The STUDENT Data Type.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

As McaStudent is An OBJECT TABLE of The

StudentIncharge Column Can Point To

STUDENT Data Type, The

The ROW OBJECT Within The McaStudent OBJECT TABLE.

The StudentIncharge Table Can Be Described As An Ordinary Table.

SQL> DESC StudentIncharge;

Seeing Full Details of The Reference Column

SQL> SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 2;

SQL> DESC StudentIncharge;

INSERT Records Into REFERENCE TABLE

To Insert Records Into Reference Tables We Have To Use The REF()

Function.

The REF Column Always Contains Only OIDs

SQL> INSERT INTO StudentIncharges

SELECT SUBRAMANYAM SHARMA,
REF(A)
FROM McaStudent A
WHERE SName = SATISH KUMAR;

In The Above Case

The McaStudent Table is Queried First.

The REF() Function Returns The OID For The ROW OBJECT Selected.

The Selected OID is Stored in The StudentIncharge Table As A Pointer To

That ROW OBJECT in The McaStudent OBJECT TABLE.

The
StudentIncharges Table Actually
Contains The Name of The
StudentIncharge And A REFERENCE To A ROW OBJECT in The McaStudent
Table.

The REFERENCE OID Can Be Seen By Querying Upon The StudentIncharge

Table.

SQL> SELECT *
FROM StudentIncharges;

The Reference Value Cannot Be Seen Until We Use The DEREF() Function.

The Parameter For The DEREF() Function is The Column Name of The REF
Column But Not The Table Name.

SQL> SELECT DEREF(X.StudentIncharge)

FROM StudentIncharges X
WHERE InchargeName = SUBRAMANYAM SHARMA;

Points To Note

The Query Uses A Reference To A Row Object To Travel From One Table To
The Second.

A Join is Performed in The Background Without Specifying The Join Criteria.

The Object Table It Self is Not Mentioned in The Query.

The Name of The Object Table Need Not Be Known To DEREF The Values.

The Entire Referenced Object is Returned Not Just Part of The Row.

Implementing VALUE() Function

The VALUE() Function is Useful When Debugging REFERENCES.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The VALUE() Function Allows To Query The Formatted Values Directly From
The Object Table.

We Can Select The Values From Object Table Without Using The DEREF
Query Upon The StudentIncharges, StudentIncharge Column.

SQL> SELECT VALUE(A)

FROM MCAStudent A
WHERE SName = SESHU;

Invalid References

We Can DELETE The Object To Which A REFERENCE Points.

We Can DELETE A Row From

StudentIncharge Record Points.

MCAStudent

Object

Table

Which

SQL> DELETE
FROM MCAStudent
WHERE SName = SESHU;

DANGLING REF

It is A Record Which Has An OID Pointing To A Record in An Object Table,

For Which The Reference Record is Not Existing in The Original Object Table.

As Oracle Generates A OID For The Row Object Which Can Be Referenced By
Any Other Row From Other Object Table When The Row Object is DELETED
The OID is Lost And The Oracle Doesnt Reuse The OID Numbers.

Hence If A New Record For SESHU is Inserted This is Given An OID Value,
But The StudentIncharge Record Still Points To The OLD Value Only.

In A Relational System The Join Between Two Tables is Dependent Only On

The Current Data.

In An OOP System The Join is Between Objects, Hence The Fact That Two
Objects Having The Same Data Does Not Mean They Are Same.

OBJECT VIEWS With REFs

OBJECT VIEWS Are Very Important To Super Impose OOPS Structures on An

Exiting Relational Table.

We Can Create Abstract Data Type And Use Them Within The Object View of
An Existing Table.

OBJECT VIEW Acts As A Bridge Between The Existing Relational Application

To Object Relational Applications.

Integrating User Defined Data Types To Relational Tables

Relational Stage
SQL> Create Table Students
(
Studid

NUMBER(6)

CONSTRAINT StudIDPK PRIMARY KEY,

SName

VARCHAR2(30),

Street

VARCHAR2(40),

CityName

VARCHAR2(25),

StateName

VARCHAR2(40),

Pincode

NUMBER(6)

);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Creating Abstract Data Types

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE
TYPE MyAddress
AS OBJECT
(
Street

VARCHAR2(40),

CityName

VARCHAR2(25),

StateName

VARCHAR2(40),

Pincode

NUMBER(6)

);
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE MyStudent
AS OBJECT
(
SName

VARCHAR2(30),

Saddress

Myaddress

);

As Student Table Was Created Without Using The MyAddress And MyStudent
Data Types It Has To Be Accessed Via OBJECT VIEWS.

The Above Principle of Accessing Data is Called As Object Based Access.

An OBJECT VIEW Can Be Specified Upon The Abstract Data Types To Apply
Onto The Relational Table.

Creating An Object View

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW
StudentOV(StudID, StudDEF)
AS
SELECT StudID,
MyStudent(SName,
Myaddress(
Street,
CityName ,
StateName,
Pincode
)
)
FROM Students;

We Can Access The Students Table Directly As A Relational Table OR Via The
CONSTRUCTOR Methods of The Abstract Data Types.

Relational SELECT on Students Table

SQL> SELECT *
FROM Students;

Selecting Data From The Relational Table Using The OBJECT VIEW
SQL> SELECT *
FROM StudentOV;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Object Views With References

If The Students Table is Related To Another Table, Then The Object Views
Can Be Created As A Reference Between These Tables.

By Using The Above Concept ORACLE Uses The Existing PRIMARY KEY OR
FOREIGN KEY Relationships To Simulate OIDs For Use By REFs Between
The Tables.

By Implementing The Above Concept We Can Access The Table Either As

Relational Table OR As OBJECTS.

When The Tables Are Treated As OBJECTS We Can Use The REFs, To
Automatically Perform JOINS Upon The Tables Using The DEREF() Function.

Create A Reference Table For Students

SQL> CREATE TABLE StudentBooks
(
LibTranNO

NUMBER(6),

StudID

NUMBER(6),

BookTitle

VARCHAR2(50),

LendingDate

DATE,

CONSTRAINT LibtreamNoPK
PRIMARY KEY(LibTranNO, Studid),
CONSTRAINT StudentBooksFK
FOREIGN KEY(Studid)
REFERENCES Students(StudID)
);

Inserting The Data Into Library Table

SQL> INSERT INTO StudentBooks
VALUES(2000, 1200, THERMO DYNAMICS, SYSDATE);
SQL> SELECT *
FROM StudentBooks;
SQL> SELECT Sname, BookTitle, LendingDate
FROM Students S, StudentBooks SB
WHERE S.StudID = SB.StudID;

GENERATING OIDs

We Can Use An Object View To Assign OIDs To The Records in Students

Table.

OIDs Are Assigned To Records in an OBJECT TABLE And An OBJECT TABLE in

Turn is Based on An Abstract Data Type.

As First Step Create An ABSTRACT DATA TYPE That Has The Same Structure
As The Student Table i.e. The Relational Table.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE

StudentType AS OBJECT
(
Studid

NUMBER(6),

Sname

VARCHAR2(30),

Street

Varchar2(40),

Cityname

VARCHAR2(25),

Statename

VARCHAR2(40),

Pincode

NUMBER(6)

);

As The Next Step Create A View Based Upon The StudentType By Assigning
OID Values To The Records in Student Table.

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW STUDENTOV

OF StudentType
WITH OBJECT IDENTIFIER(StudID)
AS
SELECT
StudID, Sname, Street, Cityname, Statename, Pincode
FROM Students;

The First Part of The Statement Tells The Database To CREATE A VIEW Based
on The Structure Defined in Student Type.

The Next Part of The CREATE VIEW Tells The Database How To Construct
OID Values For The Rows in Students Table.

With The Above Step The Rows of Students Are Now Accessible As ROW
OBJECTS Via The StudentOV View.

The OID Values Generated For The StudentOV Rows Are Called As PKOIDs
As They Are Based Upon Students Primary Key Values.

The Relational Tables Can Be Accessed As Row OBJECTS If The Object Views
Are Created Upon Them.

Generating References

Actually The Rows of StudentBooks Reference Rows in Students Table.

As Per Relational Concept The Relationship is Determined By The FOREIGN

KEY Pointing From The StudentBooks.StudID Column To The Student.StudID
Column.

From The StudentOV Object View That Has Been Created, The Rows in
Students Table Can Be Accessed Via OIDs.

We Have To CREATE REFERENCE VALUES in StudentBooks That Reference

Students Table.

Once The REFs Are Created We Can Use DEREF() Function To Access The
Students Data From Student Books.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE VIEW StudentBooksOV

AS
SELECT
MAKE_REF(StudentOV, StudID) StudID,
LibTranNo, BookTitle, LendingDate
FROM StudentBooks;

MAKE_REF() Function

It Creates REFERENCES Which Are Called PKREFs From An Existing View To

Another View.

PKREFs Are Named So As They Are Based on PRIMARY KEYS.

The Function Takes As An Argument(s) As The Name of The OBJECT VIEW

Being REFERENCED And The Name of The Column OR Columns That Form
The FOREIGN KEY in The Local Table.

Since MAKE_REF() Creates A View The Result of An Operation Must Be Given

A COLUMN ALIAS.

Querying Through OBJECT VIEWS

We Use The DEREF() Function To SELECT The Value of The Referenced Data.

The Concept is Almost All Same As That of OBJECT VIEWS.

SQL> SELECT DEREF(SB.StudID)

FROM StudentBooksOV SB
WHERE BookTitle = THERMO DYNAMICS;

Steps Performed

The Query Finds The Records in The StudentBooks Table For Which The
LendingDate is The Current System Date.

Taking The StudID Value From That Record Evaluates Its Reference.

The Evaluated Reference StudID is Pointed To The PKOID Value in The

StudentOV OBJECT VIEW Using MAKE_REF.

The StudentOV Object View Returns The Record Whose PKOID Matched The
Referenced Value.

The DEREF() Function Then Gets Activated Returning The Value of The
Referenced Row.

The Query Returns Rows From Students Even Though The USER Actually
Queried on StudentBooks.

Things To Note

Object Views of Column Objects Enable To Work With Table As if They Were
Both Relational Tables And Object Relational Tables.

When OBJECT Views Are Extended To Row OBJECT They Enable To Generate
OID Values Based on Established FOREIGN KEY OR PRIMARY KEY
Relationship.

OBJECT Views Allow Us To Continue To Use The Existing Constraints And

Standard INSERT, DELETE UPDATE And SELECT Statements.

They Help in Using OOP Features Such As REFERENCES Against The Object
TABLES.

They Provide A Technological Bridge For Migrating To An OOPS DB

Architecture.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Oracle Performs JOINS That Resolve The References Defined in The

Database.

When Referenced Data is Retrieved It Beings The Entire Row

Was Referenced.

To Reference The Data We Need To Establish PKOIDs in The Table That is

PRIMARY KEY Table Relationship.

Use MAKE_REF() To Generate References In The Table That is FOREIGN

KEY Table Relationship.

Once The Above Specifications Are Completed We Can Work With The Data
As if it Was Stored in OBJECT TABLES.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Object That

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Procedural Extensions To
Structured Query Language
Using
PL/SQL

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

General Points To Ponder

PL/SQL Stands For PROCEDURAL Language Extensions To SQL.

PL/SQL Extends SQL By Adding Programming Structures And Subroutines

Available in Any High Level Language.

PL/SQL Can Be Used For Both Server-Side And Client-Side Development.

PL/SQL Has Syntax And

Statements Work Together.

PL/SQL is Not A Stand Alone Programming Language.

Hence it Cannot Be Used Individually for Developing Applications.

PL/SQL is A Part of The Oracle RDBMS, And Hence Can Reside in Two
Environments, The Client And The Server.

Any Module That is Developed Using PL/SQL An Be Moved Easily Between

Server Side And Client Side Applications.

Either in Client OR Server Environment Any PL/SQL Block OR Sub Routine is

Processed By The PL/SQL Engine.

PL/SQL Engine is A Special Component That Processes And Executes Any

PL/SQL Statements And Sends Any SQL Statements To The SQL Statement
Processor.

The SQL Statement Processor is Always Located On The Oracle Server And
Hence All SQL Statements Are Processed on The Server Only.

As Per The Necessity The PL/SQL Engine Can Be Located Either At

SERVER Side.

CLIENT Side.

Rules

That

Determine

How

Programming

When PL/SQL Engine is Located Upon The SERVER, The Whole PL/SQL Block
is Passed To The PL/SQL Engine on The ORACLE SERVER For Processing
Including Client Components.

This Concept Gives Security, Less Load And Performance For Applications.

When The PL/SQL Engine is Located Upon The Client, The PL/SQL
Processing is Done on The Client Side.
All SQL Statements That Are
Embedded Within The PL/SQL Block, Are Sent To The ORACLE SERVER For
Further Processing.

If The PL/SQL Block Does Not Contain Any SQL Statements,

Block is Executed on The Client Side it Self.

Because of The Above Concept, The Application Load in The Network Will
Highly Reduce And The System Becomes highly Loose Coupled in The
Development Process, Giving High Accessibility For Easy Maintenance.

The Entire

Advantages of PL/SQL

Completely Portable.

High Performance Transaction Processing Language.

Support For SQL.

Support For Object Oriented Programming.

Better Performance.

Higher Productivity.

Tight Integration With Oracle Products.

Tight Security.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Anatomy of PL/SQL Engine AndOracle Server

PL/SQL Block
PL/SQL Statements And
SQL Statements

PL/SQL
Block

PL/SQL Statement Processor

PL/SQL
Statements
SQL
Statements

PL/SQL Engine

SQL Statement Processor

Oracle Server
PL/SQL in Client/Server Architecture

Client Side
Application
Using SQL

Application Using
PL/SQL

Block of SQL
Statements
And Their
Result Sets
SQL Statement
Processor

PL/SQL Engine
Server Side

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Application Development Architecture Using PL/SQL

Main Features of PL/SQL

It Combines The DATA MANIPULATING Power of SQL With The Processing

Power of PROCEDURAL LANGUAGES.

Program Flow Can Be Controlled Using The Statements Like IF And

LOOP.

We Can Declare Variables, Define Procedures And Functions And Trap

Runtime Errors.

Can Be Used To Break Complex Problems Down Into Easily Understandable

Procedural Code.

The Code Can Be Reused For Multiple Applications.

SQL Commands Can Be Directly Embedded Inside The PL/SQL Without

Learning New APIs.

The PL/SQL Data Types Correspond With SQLs Column Types Making
Learning Process Easier.

Block Structure Approach

The Basic Units That Make Up A PL/SQL Program Are Logical Blocks.

The Blocks in PL/SQL Can Be Nested With One Another.

A Block Groups Related Declarations And Statements into One Single Unit.

The Declarations Are Local To The Block And Cease To Exist OR Lost When
The Block Completes.

Block Structure Approach Avoids

Declarations And Procedures.

The Basic Parts of A PL/SQL Block Are

Cluttered

Declarative Part (Optional)

Executable Part (Mandatory)

Exception Handling Part (Optional.)

Namespaces

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

For

Variable

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Order of The Parts of PL/SQL Block is Logical.

Declarative Part

It is Used To Define User Defined Types, Variables And Similar Items.

Executable Part

It Contains The Operational Code For The Program.

The Items in Declarative Part Are Manipulated Here.

Exception Handling Part

Any Exceptions That Are Raised During The Program Execution Are Handled
Here.

Some Points To Note

Block Can Be Nested in The Executable And Exception Handling Parts of A

PL/SQL Block, OR A Sub Program.

Local Sub Programs Can Be Defined in The Declarative Part of Any Block.

Local Sub Programs Can Be Called From The Block in Which They Are
Declared.

A PL/SQL is Marked With Either A DECLARE OR BEGIN Keyword, And

Ends With The Keyword END.

Only BEGIN and END Keywords Are Mandatory.

A Semicolon(;) Has To be Placed After The END Keyword.

SQL> DECLARE
Variable Declarations,
Cursor Declarationa,
User_Defined Execption

BEGIN
SQL Statements
PL/SQL Statement

EXCEPTION
Action To Perform When Errors

Occur.

END;

Each Logical Block of PL/SQL Corresponds To A Problem OR Sub Problem To

Be Solved in A Real Time System.

PL/SQL Supports The Divide-And-Conquer Approach To Solve A Real Time

Problem, Which is Also Called As Stepwise Refinement.

We Can Define Local Sub Programs in The Declarative Part of Any Block.

However, We Can Call Local Subprograms Only From The Block in Which
They Are Defined.

A Simple PL/SQL Block

SQL> BEGIN
NULL;

NULL BLOCK

END;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> BEGIN
RETURN;

BLOCK With RETURN Clause

END;
SQL> DECLARE
BEGIN

NULL BLOCK With DECLARE

NULL;
END;
SQL> DECLARE
BEGIN
NULL;
EXCEPTION

NULL BLOCK With DECLARE And EXCEPTION

Associated With A PRAGMA Clause

WHEN OTHERS THEN

NULL;
END;

Executing Statements And PL/SQL Blocks From SQL*Plus

Place A Semicolon(;) At The End of The SQL Statement OR PL/SQL Control

Statement.

Use A Forward Slash(/) To Run The Anonymous PL/SQL Block in SQL*Plus

Buffer.

Place A Period (.) To Close A SQL*Plus Buffer With Out Running The PL/SQL
Program.

A PL/SQL Block is Treated As One Continuous Statement in The SQL*Plus

Buffer.

Semicolon Within The PL/SQL Block Does Not Closes OR Runs The SQL
Buffer.

In PL/SQL An Error is Called As An Exception.

Sections Keywords DECLARE, BEGIN, And EXCEPTION Should Not

Contain A Semicolon.

END And All Other PL/SQL Statements Should Be Applied With A

Semicolon At The End.

Types of Blocks In PL/SQL

A PL/SQL Program Can Be Written in Various Types of Blocks, They Are

Anonymous Blocks

They Are Un-Named Blocks.

They Are Declared At The Point in An Application, Where They Are To Be

Executed And Are Passed To The PL/SQL Engine For Execution At Runtime.

An Anonymous Block Can Be Embedded Within A Pre-Compiler Program And

Within SQL*Plus OR Server Manager.

SQL> DECLARE
BEGIN
NULL;
EXCEPTION
WHEN OTHERS THEN

Anonymous NULL BLOCK With DECLARE

And
EXCEPTION
Associated
With
A
PRAGMA Clause

NULL;
END;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Named Blocks

They Have All The Features As Specified For The Anonymous Blocks,
The Only Difference is That Each Block Can Be Named if Necessary.

But

Named Blocks Help in Associating With The Scope And Resolution of

Variables in Different Blocks.

They Give The Specifications of The Named Spaces As Provided in High Level
OO Languages Like C++ And JAVA.

Named Blocks Are Conveniences For Variable Management.

SQL> <<FirstBlock>>
DECLARE
BEGIN
NULL;
EXCEPTION

Named NULL BLOCK With DECLARE And

EXCEPTION Associated With A PRAGMA
Clause

WHEN OTHERS THEN

NULL;
END FirstBlock;

Named Blocks Make The PL/SQL Blocks More Clear and Readable.

Named Blocks Increase The Clarity of Programming When We Attempt The

Nesting Process, And Control Structures.

Sub-Programmed Blocks

These Are Named PL/SQL Blocks That Can Take Parameters And Can Be
Invoked With in The Other Anonymous OR Sub-Programmed PL/SQL Blocks.

These Blocks Are Either Declared As Procedures OR Functions.

A Procedural Block is Used For Performing An Action, And A Functional Block

is Used For Performing Computations in General.

The Sub-Programmed Blocks Add The Concept of Code Reusability and Help
The Developer To Achieve The Modular Approach.

Let Us Understand Variables in PL/SQL

Usage of Variables
Temporary Storage

Data Can Be Temporarily Stored in One OR More Variables For Use When
Validating Data Input For Processing The Data in The Data Flow Process.

Data Manipulation

Variables Help in The Data Manipulation of Stored Values.

Variables Can Be Used For Calculations And Other Data Manipulations

Without Accessing The Database Each And Every Time, Hence They Help
in Reducing The I/O Cycles.

Reusability

Once Declared Can Be Used Repeatedly By Even in Other Blocks.

Ease of Maintenance

Variables Can Be Declared Based on The Declarations of The Definitions

of Database Columns.

Provide Data Independence, Reduces Maintenance Costs And Allows

Programs To Adapt The Changes As The Database Changes.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Handling Variables

All Variables Are Declared And Initialized Only in The DECLARATIVE

SECTION of PL/SQL Block.

Declarations Allocate Storage Space For A Value According to Its Defined

Size.

Declarations Can Be Assigned With An Initial Value And Can Be Imposed

With A NOT NULL Constraint.

We can Reassign New Values To Variables in The Executable Section, In This

Case The Existing Value of The Variable is Replaced With A New One.

Forward References Are Not Allowed in PL/SQL.

We Can Pass Values Into PL/SQL Subprograms Through Parameters With

The Assistance of Variables.

There Are Three Parameter Modes, They Are IN (The Default), OUT And IN
OUT.

View The Results From A PL/SQL Block Through Output of Variables.

Reference Variables Can Be Used For Input OR Output in SQL Data

Manipulation Statements.

Variable Types in PL/SQL

All PL/SQL Variables Have A Data Type Specifying

Storage Format

Constraints

Valid Range

PL/SQL Supports Four Data Type Categories

Scalar Data Types:

Composite Data Types

Reference Data Types

LOB Data Types

Scalar Data Types

They Hold A Single Value.

Main Data Types Are Those That Correspond To Column Types in Oracle
Server Tables.

Supports Boolean Variables.

Composite Data Types:

Composite Data Types Are Similar To Structures in C Language.

They Help in Keeping All The Related Data Items Together As One Collection.

They Are Applied in Three Ways

%ROWTYPE.

RECORD Type.

PL/SQL TABLE Type.

Records Allows Groups of Fields To Be Defined And Manipulated In PL/SQL

Blocks Very Easily.

Reference Data Types

They Hold Values, Acting As Pointers, Which Designate Other Program

Items.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

They Are Very Essential When Manipulating Collection of Data Items in SubPrograms.

LOB Data Types

They Hold Values Called Locators, Specifying The Location of Large Objects
That Are Stored Out of Line in The PL/SQL Program.

Declaring PL/SQL Variables

Syntax
IdentifierName [CONSTANT] DataType [NOT NULL] [:= [DEFAULT] Expr];

IdentifierName

Specifies The Name of The relevant Variable For That Block.

Constant

Constraints The Variable Such

Program Process.

That Its Value Cannot Change During The

Constants Must Be Initialized Else Raise An Exception.

DataType

It Is A Scalar, Composite, Reference OR LOB Data Type As Applicable To The

Required Situation.

NOT NULL

Constraints A Variable Such That It Must Contain A Value And Raises If NULL
is Identified.

NOT NULL Variables Should Be Initialized Else Raise An Exception.

DEFAULT

Sets The Default Value For The Value in The PL/SQL Program if Not
Attended.

Expr

It Is Any PL/SQL Expression That Can Be A Literal, Another Variable OR An

Expression Involving Operations And Functions For Initialization.

Illustration
DECLARE
V_Sample1

NUMBER(2);

V_Sample2

CONSTANT NUMBER(2) := 99;

V_Sample3

NUMBER(2) NOT NULL := 0;

V_Sample4

NUMBER(2) := 50;

V_Sample5

NUMBER(2) DEFAULT 25;

Detailed Aspects of PL/SQL Language

Character Set

PL/SQL Programs Are Written As Lines of Text Using A Specific Set of

Characters.

The Characters That Can Be Used Are

A To Z OR a OR z

0 To 9
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

() + - */< > = ! ~ ^ : Etc.

Tabs, Space And Carriage Returns

PL/SQL Key Words Are Not Case Sensitive, Hence Lower Case Letters Are
Equivalent To Corresponding Upper Case Letters.

Lexical Units

A
Group of Characters That Are Contained Within A Line of PL/SQL
Statement Are Called As Lexical Units.

The Types of Lexical Units Are

Delimiters

Identifiers

Literals

Comments

Delimiters

It is A Simple OR Compound Symbol That Has Special Meaning To PL/SQL.

The Delimiters Are Used To Represent Arithmetic Operations Etc in PL/SQL

Program.

Identifiers

They Are Used To Name PL/SQL Program Items And Units.

Identifiers Can Include

Constants

Variables

Exception

Cursor Variables

Subprograms

Packages

An Identifiers Consists of A Letter Followed By A Set of Letters, Numbers,

Dollar Signs Etc.

Identifiers Are Not Case Sensitive, Until They Are Not Declared Within
Quotes.

An Identifiers Length Cannot Exceed 30 Characters.

Valid Identifier

Invalid Identifier

This&That

YouMe

V_Phone#

Show/Off

V_Phone$

Number

Delimiters

It is A Simple OR Compound Symbol That Has Special Meaning To PL/SQL.

The Delimiters Are Used To Represent Arithmetic Operations Etc in PL/SQL

Program.

Reserved Words

Reserved Words Have Special Syntactic Meaning To PL/SQL.

Reserved Words Can Be Used in Combination With Other Words For

Declaration.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

It is Better To Represent Reserved Words in Upper Casing For Clarity.

Predefined Identifiers

The Identifiers Globally Declared In Package STANDARD Can Be Re

Declared.

Declaring Predefined Identifiers Again is

Declaration Overrides The Global Declaration.

Error

Prone

The

Local

Quoted Identifiers

Identifiers Declared in Double Quotes Are Called Quoted Identifiers.

The Maximum Size of A Quoted Identifier Cannot Exceed 30 Characters.

Using PL/SQL Reserved Words As Quoted Identifiers is Not Advisable.

Example :

Employee(s)
Status On/Off

Literals

A Literal is An Explicit Numeric, Character, String OR Boolean Value Not

Represented By An Identifier.

Comments In PL/SQL

PL/SQL Compiler Ignores Comments.

Comments Promote Readability And Aids Understanding.

PL/SQL Supports Two Styles.

Single Line Comments (--)

Multi Line Comments (/* ..

*/)

Comments Should Appear Within A Statements At The End of A Line, And

Cannot Be Nested.

It is Most Preferable To Use Multi Line Comments Rather Than Single Line
Comments.

Declarations in PL/SQL

The Program Stores Values in Variables.

As The Program Executes, The Values of Variables Can Change But The
Values of Constants Cannot Change.

Declarations Allocate Storage Space For A Value, Hence Should Be Specified

By A Data Type, And Name For Further Reference.

Any Variable Can Be Declared Only in The Declarative Part of Any PL/SQL
Block, Subprogram OR Package.
Illustration
DECLARE
AdmnDate

DATE;

PatientName

VARCHAR2(30);

BPCount

SMALLINT := 0;

Assigning Values To A Variable

In PL/SQL A Variable Can Be Assigned In Three Ways.

By Using Assignment Operator (:=).

By Selecting OR Fetching Database Values.

By Passing It As An OUT OR IN OUT Parameter To A Subprogram.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Presenting Data On To The Screen

For Producing Outputs On The Video Device We Need The Assistance of

DBMS_OUTPUT Package.

The Package Enables To Display Output From PL/SQL Blocks And SubPrograms.

The Procedure PUT_LINE Outputs Information To A Buffer in The SGA.

The Information Can Be Displayed By Calling The Procedure GET_LINE OR By

Setting SERVEROUTPUT in SQL*Plus.

Syntax
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(Message);

DBMS_OUTPUT Has Limitation For Maximum of 255 Character Per Line.

The DBMS_OUTPUT Package is Owned By The Oracle User SYS.

It Writes Information To The Buffer For Storage.

The Size of The Buffer Can Be Set Between 2000 To 10,00,000 Bytes.

The Specifications To Set Buffers Are

SET SERVEROUTPUT ON;

SET SERVEROUTPUT ON SIZE 5000;

SET SERVEROUTPUT OFF;

Illustrations
SQL> BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('First Program in PL/SQL');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Illustration By');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('''Satish K Yellanki''');
END;
/
Steps To Compile And Produce Output

At SQL Prompt Type

Place Forward Slash And Press Enter Key.

SQL> SET SERVEROUTPUT ON;

SQL>/
SQL> BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.ENABLE;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('First Program in PL/SQL');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Illustration By');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('''Satish K Yellanki''');
END;
/

DBMS_OUTPUT.ENABLE Once
Process to Get Activated.

Declared

Will

Make

The

SERVEROUTPUT

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
V_Sample1 NUMBER(2);
V_Sample2 CONSTANT NUMBER(2) := 99;
V_Sample3 NUMBER(2) NOT NULL := 0;
V_Sample4 NUMBER(2) := 50;
V_Sample5 NUMBER(2) DEFAULT 25;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value in Sample1 : '|| V_Sample1);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value in Sample2 : '|| V_Sample2);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value in Sample3 : '|| V_Sample3);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value in Sample4 : '|| V_Sample4);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value in Sample5 : '|| V_Sample5);
END;
/
SQL> BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Text With Out Quotes');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('''Text With in Quotes''');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('''Text'' ''With'' ''in'' ''Quotes''');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(Q'!'Text With in Quotes'!');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(Q'!'Text' 'With' 'in' 'Quotes'!');
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
MyNumber1 NUMBER := 10;
MyNumber2 NUMBER := 20;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your First Number is : '||MyNumber1);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your Second Number is : '||MyNumber2);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Sum of '||MyNumber1||' and
'||MyNumber2||' is : '||TO_CHAR(MyNumber1 + MyNumber2,
'999D99'));
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
String1 VARCHAR2(30) := '&String1';
String2 VARCHAR2(30) := '&String2';
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your First String is : '||String1);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your Second String is : '||String2);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your Final String is : '||String1||String2);
END;
/

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
V_FirstName

VARCHAR2(30) := '&FName';

V_MiddleName

VARCHAR2(30) := '&MName';

V_LastName

VARCHAR2(30) := '&LName';

V_DOB

DATE := '&DateOfBirth';

BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your First Name is : '||V_FirstName);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your Middle Name is : '||V_MiddleName);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your Last Name is : '||V_LastName);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('******Concatenating******');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your Full Name is : '||V_FirstName||'
'||V_MiddleName||' '||V_LastName);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your Date of Birth is : '|| V_DOB);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your Were Born on : '|| TO_CHAR(V_DOB,
'Day'));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Your Present Age is : '|| TRUNC((SYSDATE V_DOB)/365));
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_FirstNum NUMBER := &FNumber;
V_SecondNum NUMBER := &SNumber;
V_Result NUMBER := 0;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You Gave Me '||V_FirstNum||' And
'||V_SecondNum);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('I Executed Their Sum And The Result is : '||
TO_CHAR(V_FirstNum + V_SecondNum, '9999.99'));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('As You Did Not Reinitialize The Result
Variable It is Having : '||V_Result||' Only');
END;
/

Operators in PL/SQL

Logical

: AND, OR, NOT

Arithmetic

: +, -, *, /

Concatenation

: ||

Parenthesis To Control Order of Operations

Exponentiation

: **

Comparison

: =, !=, <, >, <=, >=

SQL*Plus

: IS NULL, LIKE, BETWEENAND, IN

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Operator Precedence

Equal Precedence

**, NOT

+, - (Identity, Negation)

*, /

+, -

=, !=, <, >, <=, >=, IS NULL, LIKE, BETWEENAND, IN(List).

AND, OR

Operators in PL/SQL, Things To Note

Comparison Involving NULLs Always Yields NULL Value.

Applying Logical Operator NOT To A NULL Yields NULL.

In Conditional Control Statements, If The Condition Yields NULL, Its

Associated Sequence of Statements Are Not Executed.

Scope And Visibility Of PL/SQL Identifiers

References To The Identifiers Are Resolved According To The Scope And

Visibility Concept in PL/SQL.

Scope

Scope of An Identifier is That Region of A Program Unit, From Which We Can

Reference The Identifier Either With Named Reference OR Without Named
Reference.

Once The Scope of The Variable is Lost it Means That The Life of The Variable
No More.

All Variables Loose Their Scope As Soon As The PL/SQL Block Ends OR
Terminates.

Oracle Automatically Releases The Space Upon That Variable Once its Scope
is Closed.

Visibility

It is The Region From Which We Can Reference The Identifier Using An

Unqualified Name.

If A Variable Looses Its Visibility But is Carrying Scope, Then We Can Extend
The Visibility of The Variable Using The Qualified Name.

Identifiers Declared In A PL/SQL Block Are Considered Local To That Block

And Global To All Its Sub-Blocks

If A GLOBAL IDENTIFIER is Re-Declared In A Sub Block, Both Identifiers

Remain In Scope.

Within The Sub Block, Only The Local Identifier Are Visible.

A Qualified Name Should Be Used To Reference The Global Identifier.

The Same Identifier Can Be Declared In Two Different Blocks, The Change In
One Does Not Affect The Other.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Concepts of Scoping

With In The Same Scope, All Identifiers Must Be Unique.

Even When The Data Types Are Differing, Variables And Parameters Cannot
Share The Same Name.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Boolean

BOOLEAN;

V_Boolean

VARCHAR2(5) := 'SAMPLE';

BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value is : '||V_Boolean);
V_Boolean := FALSE;
END;

Name Resolution Standards

The Names of Database Columns Take Precedence Over The Names of Local
Variables And Formal Parameters.

To Avoid The Ambiguity of Name Resolution, Add A Prefix To The Names of

The Local Variables And Formal Parameters, OR A Block Label Can Be Used
To Qualify References.

Hence it is Better Not To Declare A Variable Name in PL/SQL Block Which is

Equal To The Name of The SQL Table OR Column Name.

Scope And Visibility Diagram

SQL> DECLARE
X BINARY_INTEGER;
BEGIN
/*Some Operational Statements*/
DECLARE
Y NUMBER(4);
BEGIN
/*Some Operational Statements*/
END;
/*Some Operational Statements*/
END;
Nested Blocks And Variable Scope

The Variable Y Can Reference The Variable Named X, But The Variable X
Cannot Reference Variable Y.

If The Variable Named Y In The Nested Block is Given The Same Name As
The Variable Name X In The Outer Block Its Value is Valid Only For The
Duration of The Nested Block.

To Avoid The Practical Confusion It is Better Not To Repeat The Variable

Names in Declaration.

They Cannot Be Repeated in The Same Block, In Different Blocks They Are
Referenced Using The Name Resolution Technique.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
X REAL := 205;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value

of Outer X : '||X);

DECLARE
X REAL := 405;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Inner X : '||X);
END;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value

of Outer X : '||X);

END;
/

Using Named Blocks To Increase Visibility

SQL> <<OuterBlock>>
DECLARE
X REAL := 205;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer X : '|| X);
<<InnerBlock>>
DECLARE
X REAL := 405;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Inner X : '||X);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Inner X : '||OuterBlock.X);
END;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer X : '|| X);
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
A VARCHAR2(30) := 'Hello Guys';
B REAL := 300;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer String A is Available Here
: ' ||A);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer Real B is Availabe Here : '
||B);
DECLARE
A INTEGER := 2000;
B REAL := 400;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Inner Integer A is Availabe
Here : ' ||A);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Inner Real B is Availabe : '
||B);
END;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DECLARE
D REAL := 500;
A VARCHAR2(30) := 'Hello Gals';
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Last D is Availabe : ' ||D);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Last String A is Availabe
Here : ' ||A);
END;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer String A is Availabe : '
||A);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer Real B is Availabe : ' ||B);
END;
/
SQL> <<FirstBlock>>
DECLARE
A VARCHAR2(30) := 'Hello Guys';
B REAL := 300;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer String A is Availabe Here :
' ||A);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer Real B is Availabe Here : '
||B);
DECLARE
A INTEGER := 2000;
B REAL := 400;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Inner Integer A is Availabe
Here : ' ||A);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Inner Real B is Availabe : '
||B);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer String A is Availabe
Here : ' ||FirstBlock.A);
END;
DECLARE
D REAL := 500;
A VARCHAR2(30) := 'Hello Gals';
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Last D is Available : ' ||D);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer String and Last
String together is : ' ||FirstBlock.A||' and '||A);
END;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer String A is Available : '
||A);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Value of Outer Real B is Available : '
||B);
END <<FirstBlock>>;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Variable Types in PL/SQL Programming

While Passing The Values To Arguments At Runtime, The PL/SQL Variables

Can Be Treated As Two Types

Bind Variables

PL/SQL Variables

Bind Variables

Bind Variables Are Declared in SQL*Plus Session And Can Be Referenced in

Both SQL*Plus Sessions As Well As PL/SQL Program.

Before Referencing The Bind Variable in PL/SQL It Must Be Declared in

SQL*Plus Session.

Bind Variable Syntax

SQL> VARIABLE <VariableName> DataType

In PL/SQL To Reference Bind Variables, The Bind Variable Must Be Prefixed

With A Colon(:).

In SQL*Plus The Bind Variable Has To Be Displayed Using The PRINT

Command.

SQL> VARIABLE G_SALARY NUMBER;

SQL> DECLARE
V_sal NUMBER(7,2);
BEGIN
SELECT Sal INTO V_Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = 7369;
:G_Salary := V_Sal;
END;
/
SQL> PRINT G_Salary;
(OR)
SQL> SELECT :G_Salary FROM DUAL;
SQL> VARIABLE Bind_Variable NUMBER;
SQL> DECLARE
V_Number1 NUMBER(9,2):=&B_Number1;
V_Number2 Number(9,2) :=&B_Number2;
BEGIN
:Bind_Variable := (V_Number1 / V_Number2) + V_Number2;
END;
/
SQL> VARIABLE B_Total NUMBER
SQL> DECLARE
V_Salary NUMBER(9, 2) := &B_Salary;
V_Bonus NUMBER(9, 2) := &B_Bonus;
BEGIN
:B_Total := NVL(V_Salary, 0) * (1 + NVL(V_Bonus, 0)) / 100;
END;
/
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Step 1
SQL> DECLARE
V_Sal NUMBER(7, 2);
V_Empno NUMBER(4) := &GiveEmpno;
BEGIN
SELECT Sal INTO V_Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
:B_Sal := V_Sal;
:B_Empno := V_Empno;
END;
/
Step 2
SQL> DECLARE
V_Comm NUMBER(7, 2);
BEGIN
SELECT Comm INTO V_Comm
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = :B_Empno;
:B_Comm := V_Comm;
END;
/
Step 3
SQL> BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Total Salary of '||(:B_Empno)||' is
'||(:B_Sal + NVL(:B_Comm, 0)));
END;
/

PL/SQL Variables

These Are Substitution Variables That Are Directly Declared Within The
Program.

These Variables Can Be Associated To The Variables Declared In ACCEPT

Command OR At Run Time.

The PL/SQL Variables Can Be Projected Using The DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE

Method Within PL/SQL Program Only.

The Life of PL/SQL Variable is With in The Scope of The PL/SQL Block Only.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Number1 NUMBER(9, 2) := &P_Number1;
V_Number2 Number(9, 2) := &P_Number2;
V_Result NUMBER(9, 2);
BEGIN
V_Result := (V_Number1 / V_Number2) + V_Number2;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result);
END;
/
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Code Maintenance Can Be Made Easier By

Documenting Code With Comments.

Developing A Case Convention For The Code.

Developing Naming Conventions For Identifiers And Other Objects.

Enhancing Readability By Indenting.

SQL Statements,
Uppercasing.

Identifiers And Parameters, Database Tables And Columns Are Kept In

Lower Casing And Initcap Casing.

The Names of Local Variables And Formal Parameters Take Precedence Over
The Names of Database Tables.

The Names of Columns Take Precedence Over The Names of Local Variables.

PL/SQL

Key

Words

And

Data

Types

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Are

Kept

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Let Us Understand The Intelligence of

PL/SQL Using Control Structures

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

To Write Programs That Reflect The Real Time Requirement, We Need

Branching

Selection And

Looping.

Control Structures Are The Most Important PL/SQL Extensions To SQL.

PL/SQL Helps Us Manipulate And Process Oracle Data Using

Conditional Statements.

Iterative Statements.

Sequential Flow-Of-Control Statements.

The Statement Structures Provided By PL/SQL For This Purpose Are

IF-THEN-ELSE

END IF

ELSIF

CASE

END CASE

END

LOOP

FOR-LOOP

WHILE-LOOP

END LOOP

EXIT-WHEN And

GOTO.

By Integrating All The Above Statements In A Proper Way A PL/SQL

Programmer Can Handle Any Real Time Situation.

Conditional Statements

Conditional Statements In PL/SQL Are Provided In Two Different Flavors

Branching Statements.

Selection Statements.

Branching Statements

In PL/SQL Branching
Statements.

Implemented

PL/SQL Provides Three Types of Branching Control.

Simple IF..END IF Statements.

IF ELSE..END IF Statements.

IF..ELSIF..END IF Statements.

The

Using

The

IFTHENELSE

Branching Standards Can Be Implemented Either As

Simple IF Statements.
Nested IF Statements.
ELSE IF OR ELSIF Ladders.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

General Syntax
IF Condition1 THEN
Statement1;
Statement2;
END IF;
General Points To Ponder

IFTHEN is A Reserved Word And Marks The Beginning of The IF

Statement.

The END IF is A Reserved Phrase That Indicates The End of The IF..THEN
Construct.

When IFTHEN is Executed, A Condition is Evaluated To Either TRUE OR

FALSE.

The Condition Need Not Be Specified in Brackets.

Conditions Are Compared By Using Either The Comparison Operators OR

SQL*Plus Operators.

One IF Keyword Can Manage Any Number of Conditions At A Point of Time

Using The LOGICAL CONNECTIVITIES Like AND, OR.

Even Though The Multiple Conditions Need Not Be Constrained By Using

Brackets, It is Better To Control Their Precedence Using The Proper
Implementation of Brackets To Avoid Ambiguity.

Every IF That is Implemented Needs Compulsorily A TRUE State

Evaluation For its Successful Execution, But An Evaluation State is Not
Compulsory When The Condition is FALSE.

After The Actual Job of IF Has Been Completed, The Control Structure
Returns The Job To The Original State of The PL/SQL Block.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Number1 NUMBER := &Number1;
V_Number2 NUMBER := &Number2;
V_TEMP NUMBER;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Original V_Number1 = '|| V_NUMBER1);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Original V_Number2 = '|| V_Number2);
IF V_Number1 > V_Number2 THEN
V_TEMP := V_Number1;
V_Number1 := V_Number2;
V_Number2 := V_TEMP;
END IF;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Swapped V_Number1 = '|| V_NUMBER1);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Swapped V_Number2 = '|| V_Number2);
END;

IFTHENELSEEND IF Statement

IFTHENELSE Statement Enables Us To Specify Two Different Groups of

Statements For Execution.

One Group is Evaluated When The Condition Evaluates To TRUE, The Next
Group is Evaluated When The Condition Evaluates To FALSE.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Syntax
IF Condition THEN
Statement 1;
ELSE
Statement 2;
END IF;

This Concept Should Be Used When Trying To Choose Between Two Mutually
Exclusive Actions.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Num NUMBER := &EnterNumber;
BEGIN
IF MOD(V_Num,2) = 0 THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Num||' is an Even Number.');
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Num||' is an Odd Number.');
END IF;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Number1 NUMBER := &Number1;
V_Number2 NUMBER := &Number2;
BEGIN
IF
V_Number1 > V_Number2 THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Greatest Number is : '||V_Number1);
ELSE
IF V_Number2 > V_Number1 THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Greatest Numeber is :
'||V_Number2);
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Numbers are equal '||V_Number1
||' and '||V_Number2);
END IF;
END IF;
END;

Behavior of NULLs

In Simple IF When A Condition is Evaluated To NULL, Then The Statements

in TRUE State Will Not Be Executed, Instead The Control Will Be Passed To
The First Executable Statement After The END IF.

In IFTHENELSE Construct The FALSE Block is Executed Whenever The

Condition Evaluates To NULL.

Hence When Ever A Conditional Process is Executed it is Better To Cross

Verify The NULL Status of Any Variable OR Value Before Execution.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
V_Num1 NUMBER := &Number1;
V_Num2 NUMBER := &Number2;
BEGIN
IF V_Num1 = V_Num2 THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Given Numbers are Equal');
END IF;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Did you Watch The NULL Effect.');
END;
/

Note : Supply NULL At Runtime To Check The Affect of NULL.

Nested IF Statements

The IF Statements Can Be Nested Into One Another As Per Requirements.

Nested IF is A Situation in Which An IF Follows Another IF

Immediately For Every TRUE State of An IF Condition.

Each IF is Considered As An Individual Block of IF And Needs Proper

Nesting.

Each IF Block That is Opened Needs A Proper Close With END IF. Else
PL/SQL Raises Exceptions.

Nested IF Situations Have To Be Planned When We Have A Series of

Conditions Fall Sequentially.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Syntax:
IF Condition THEN
IF Condition THEN
IF Condition THEN
Statement1;
ELSE
Statement2;
END IF;
ELSE
Statement3;
END IF;
ELSE
Statement4;
END IF;
SQL> DECLARE
V_Year NUMBER := &Year;
BEGIN
IF MOD(V_Year,4) = 0 THEN
IF MOD(V_Year,100) <> 0 THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Year || ' is a Leap Year');
ELSE
IF MOD(V_Year,400) = 0 THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Year || ' is a Leap Year');
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Year || ' is a not a Leap Year');
END IF;
END IF;
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Year || ' is a not a Leap Year');
END IF;
END;
/

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Branching With Logical Connectivity's

In This Situation One IF is Associated With A Collection of Conditions

Using Either Logical AND OR Logical OR Operator.

Syntax1
IF Condition1 AND Condition2 THEN
Statement1;
Statement2;
ELSE
Statement3;
Statement4;
END IF;
Syntax2
IF Condition1 OR Condition2 THEN
Statement1;
Statement2;
ELSE
Statement3;
Statement4;
END IF;
Syntax3
IF Condition1 AND Condition2 OR Condition3 THEN
Statement1;
Statement2;
ELSE
Statement3;
Statement4;
END IF;
SQL> DECLARE
V_Name VARCHAR2(20) := INITCAP('&GiveName');
V_Graduate CHAR(1) := UPPER('&Graduate');
V_Passport CHAR(1) := UPPER('&Passport');
V_Toefl CHAR(1) := UPPER('&Toefl');
BEGIN
IF V_Graduate = 'Y' AND V_Passport = 'Y' AND V_Toefl = 'Y' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Congratulations '||V_Name||' You Are
Eligible To Apply For US Universities.');
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Sorry! '||V_Name||' Requirements Do
Not Match. Try Again.');
END IF;
END;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Name VARCHAR2(20) := INITCAP('&GiveName');
V_PAN CHAR(1) := UPPER('&PAN');
V_DRLicence CHAR(1) := UPPER('&DRLicence');
V_VoterCard CHAR(1) := UPPER('&VoterCard');
BEGIN
IF V_PAN = 'Y' AND
(V_DRLicence = 'Y' OR V_VoterCard = 'Y') THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Congratulations, '||V_Name||' You Are
Eligible For Taking The Bank Loan.');
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Sorry! '||V_Name||' Requirements Do Not
Match. Try Again.');
END IF;
END;

ELSEIF Ladder

This is A Situation Where A Condition is Followed For Every FALSE State of

An IF Condition.

Each False State is Immediately Associated With A Condition of Its Own.

This Concept of ELSEIF Should Be Used When We Have A Series of

Alternative Operations To Be Executed With An Association At Different
Levels.

In This Case Each FALSE State Has An ELSE With A Condition Applied With
One Block of Branching State.

To Avoid Confusion Proper Nesting And Indentation Has To Be Followed.

Syntax
IF Condition1 THEN
Statement1;
ELSE
IF Condition2 THEN
Statement2;
ELSE
IF Condition3 THEN
Statement3;
ELSE
Statement4;
END IF;
Statement5;
END IF;
Statement6;
END IF;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
V_Number1 NUMBER := &Number1;
V_Number2 NUMBER := &Number2;
BEGIN
IF V_Number1 > V_Number2 THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Greatest Number is : '||V_Number1);
ELSE
IF V_Number2 > V_Number1 THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Greatest Number is :
'||V_Number2);
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Numbers are equal '||V_Number1
||' and '||V_Number2);
END IF;
END IF;
END;
/

ELSIF Statements
Syntax:
IF Condition1 THEN
Statements1;
ELSIF Condition2 THEN
Statement2;
ELSIF Condition3 THEN
Statement3;
ELSE
Statement n;
END IF;

In This Construct For Every False State of An IF Condition Another IF

Follows.

This Construct is Also Specified As ELSIF Ladders.

ELSIF AND ELSEIF Comparison

Syntax:
IF Condition1 THEN
Statements1;
ELSIF Condition2 THEN
Statement2;
ELSIF Condition3 THEN
Statement3;
ELSE
Statement n;
END IF;

Syntax:
IF Condition1 THEN
Statement1;
ELSE IF Condition2 THEN
Statement2;
ELSE IF Condition3 THEN
Statement3;
ELSE
Statement4;
END IF;
END IF;
END IF;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
V_operator VARCHAR2(2) := '&Operator';
V_Number1 NUMBER := &Operand1;
V_Number2 NUMBER := &Operand2;
BEGIN
IF V_Operator = '+' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Sum of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 + V_Number2));
ELSIF V_Operator = '-' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Difference of '||V_Number1||'
and '||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 V_Number2));
ELSIF V_Operator = '*' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Product of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 *
V_Number2));
ELSIF V_Operator = '/' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Quotient of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 /
V_Number2));
ELSIF V_Operator = '**' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Power of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 **
V_Number2));
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Invalid Operator... Please Check Your
Self...!');
END IF;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Sal NUMBER(8,2) := 25005;
V_Name VARCHAR2(30) := INITCAP('&GiveName');
V_Result VARCHAR2(400);
V_Gender CHAR(1) := UPPER('&GiveGender');
V_Marital CHAR(1) := UPPER('&GiveMaritalStatus');
V_Country VARCHAR2(30) := UPPER('&GiveCountry');
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Country you Gave is : '||V_Country);
IF V_Marital IN('M','S') THEN
IF V_Gender = 'M' THEN
V_Result := 'Mr. '||INITCAP(V_Name)||', Your Salary as per
your country is';
ELSIF V_Gender = 'F' THEN
IF V_Marital = 'S' THEN
V_Result := 'Miss. '||INITCAP(V_Name)||', Your Salary as
per your country is';
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

ELSE
V_Result := 'Mrs. '||INITCAP(V_Name)||', Your Salary as
per your country is';
END IF;
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Sorry !'||INITCAP(V_Name)||'! the
gender you gave cannot be processed...Please Try Again.');
END IF;
IF V_Country IN('INDIA','BHUTAN') THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result||' : INR '||TO_CHAR(V_Sal,'0,99,999.99'));
ELSIF V_Country = 'MAURITIUS' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result||' : MUR '||TO_CHAR(V_Sal,'0,99,999.99'));
ELSIF V_Country = 'NEPALESE' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result||' : NPR '||TO_CHAR(V_Sal,'0,99,999.99'));
ELSIF V_Country = 'PAKISTAN' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result||' : PKR '||TO_CHAR(V_Sal,'0,99,999.99'));
ELSIF V_Country = 'SEYCHELLES' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result||' : SCR '||TO_CHAR(V_Sal,'0,99,999.99'));
ELSIF V_Country = 'SRI LANKAN' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result||' : LKR '||TO_CHAR(V_Sal,'0,99,999.99'));
ELSIF V_Country = 'INDONESIA' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result||' : LKR '||TO_CHAR(V_Sal,'0,99,999.99'));
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Sorry '|| INITCAP(V_Name) ||'! Your
Country Does not Exist...Plese Try Again.');
END IF;
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Sorry !'||INITCAP(V_Name)||'! Your Marital
Status Cannot be confirmed properly.');
END IF;
END;
/

Selections in PL/SQL

The SELECTION
STATEMENTS.

The Case Statements In PL/SQL Has Two Forms

Simple CASE

Searched CASE

Strategy

Implemented

PL/SQL

Using

CASE

In Simple CASE We Have To Specify A SELECTOR, Which Determines Which

Group of Action To Get Executed.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

In Searched Case, The Selector is Not Present, It Has Series of Search

Conditions, That Are Evaluated in Order To Determine Which Group of
Actions To Take Place.

Simple CASE Syntax

CASE SELECTOR
WHEN Expr1 THEN
Statement1;
WHEN Expr2 THEN
Statement2;
ELSE
Statement n;
END CASE;

The Reserved Word CASE Marks The Beginning of The CASE Statement.

The Selector is A Value That Determines, Which WHEN Clause Should Be

Executed.

Each When Clause Contains Ac Expression And One OR More Executable

Statements Associated With It.

The ELSE Clause is Optional.

Each CASE Statement is Marked With END CASE;.

The Selector is Evaluated Only Once For The Whole Selection Process.

Simple CASE Internally Evaluates The Selector Using The Equality

Operator, Directly Upon The Process And Compares With The Expression.

Simple CASE is Not Suitable for Multi Conditional Analysis And Other Than
The Equality Operator.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Grade CHAR := UPPER('&EnterGrade');
BEGIN
CASE V_Grade
WHEN 'A' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You are Awarded with Excellent Grade');
WHEN 'B' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You are Awarded with Very Good Grade');
WHEN 'C' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You are Awarded with Good Grade');
WHEN 'D' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You are Awarded with Fair Grade');
WHEN 'E' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You are Awarded with Poor Grade');
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Sorry!...No Such Grade is Existing');
END CASE;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_operator VARCHAR2(2) := '&Operator';
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

V_Number1 NUMBER := &Operand1;

V_Number2 NUMBER := &Operand2;
BEGIN
CASE V_Operator
WHEN '+' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Sum of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is :'||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 + V_Number2));
WHEN '-' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Difference of '||V_Number1||'
and '||V_Number2||' is :'||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 V_Number2));
WHEN '*' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Product of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is :'||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 * V_Number2));
WHEN '/' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Quotient of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is :'||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 / V_Number2));
WHEN '**' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The '||V_Number1||' to the Power of
'||V_Number2||' is :'||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 **
V_Number2));
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Invalid Operator... Please Check Your
Self...!');
END CASE;
END;
/

Searched CASE

A SEARCHED CASE Statement Has Search Conditions That Yield Boolean

Values, TURE, FALSE OR NULL.

When A Particular Search Condition Evaluates To TRUE, The Group of

Statements Associated With This Condition Are Executed.

The Searched CASE Can Evaluate Multiple Conditions Using The Range
Evaluation Method.

We can Evaluate Conditions Using The Normal Conditional Operators OR

SQL*Plus Operators.

Searched CASE Syntax

CASE
WHEN SearchCondition1 THEN
Statement1;
WHEN SearchCondition2 THEN
Statement2;
ELSE
StatementN;
END CASE;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

When A SEARCH CONDITION Evaluates To TRUE, Control is Passed To The

Statement Associated With It.

If No Search Condition Yields To TRUE, Then Statements Associated With

ELSE Clause Are Executed.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Grade CHAR := UPPER('&EnterGrade');
BEGIN
CASE
WHEN V_Grade = 'A' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You are Awarded with Excellent
Grade');
WHEN V_Grade = 'B' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You are Awarded with Very Good
Grade');
WHEN V_Grade = 'C' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You are Awarded with Good
Grade');
WHEN V_Grade = 'D' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You are Awarded with Fair Grade');
WHEN V_Grade = 'E' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('You are Awarded with Poor Grade');
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Sorry!...No Such Grade is Existing');
END CASE;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_operator VARCHAR2(2) := '&Operator';
V_Number1 NUMBER := &Operand1;
V_Number2 NUMBER := &Operand2;
BEGIN
CASE
WHEN V_Operator = '+' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Sum of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 +
V_Number2));
WHEN V_Operator = '-' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Difference of '||V_Number1||'
and '||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 V_Number2));
WHEN V_Operator = '*' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Product of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 *
V_Number2));
WHEN V_Operator = '/' THEN

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Quotient of '||V_Number1||'

and '||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 /
V_Number2));
WHEN V_Operator = '**' THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Power of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 **
V_Number2));
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Invalid Operator... Please Check
Your Self...!');
END CASE;
END;
/

CASE Expressions

The Result of An Expression Yields A Single Value Which Can Be Assigned To

A Variable At Run Time.

A CASE Expression is An Expression Where The CASE Evaluates An

Expression To A Single Value And Then The Result of The Expression is
Assigned To A Variable.

A CASE Expression Has A Structure Similar To A CASE Statement.

CASE Expressions Reduce The Redundancy of The Code And Help in Result
Reusability.

CASE Expression Syntax

ExprVar := CASE
WHEN SearchCondition1 THEN
Statement1
WHEN SearchCondition2 THEN
Statement2
ELSE
StatementN
END;
SQL> DECLARE
V_Number NUMBER := &Number;
V_Result VARCHAR2(30);
BEGIN
V_Result := CASE
WHEN MOD(V_Number,2) = 0 THEN
V_Number || ' is an Even Number'
ELSE
V_Number || ' is an Odd Number'
END;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Did You Get The Difference...!');
END;
/
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
V_operator VARCHAR2(2) := '&Operator';
V_Number1 NUMBER := &Operand1;
V_Number2 NUMBER := &Operand2;
V_Result VARCHAR2(300);
BEGIN
V_Result := CASE
WHEN V_Operator = '+' THEN
'The Sum of '||V_Number1||' and '||V_Number2||'
is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 + V_Number2)
WHEN V_Operator = '-' THEN
'The Difference of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 V_Number2)
WHEN V_Operator = '*' THEN
'The Product of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 *
V_Number2)
WHEN V_Operator = '/' THEN
'The Quotient of '||V_Number1||' and
'||V_Number2||' is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 /
V_Number2)
WHEN V_Operator = '**' THEN
'The Power of '||V_Number1||' and '||V_Number2||'
is : '||TO_NUMBER(V_Number1 ** V_Number2)
END;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result);
END;
/

Unconditional Branching Using GOTO

GOTO Provides The Ability To Jump Through A Program From One Place To
Another.

GOTO Can Be Used With Complex EXCEPTION Handlers in Nested Blocks,

To Make The Execution Section More Readable.

It is Better To Have A Limited Usage of GOTO In Programming Block.

When A Jump is Proposed Using GOTO It is Associated With An

Appropriate LABEL.

Syntax
GOTO LabelName;
Rules To Cross Check:

GOTO Cannot Reference A LABEL in A Nested Block.

GOTO Cannot Be Executed Outside An IF Clause To LABEL Inside The

IF Clause.

GOTO Cannot Be Executed From Inside An IF Clause To A LABEL Inside

Another IF Cause.

GOTO Cannot Navigate From The EXCEPTION Section To Any Other Section
of The PL/SQL Block.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
V_MyNumber NUMBER := &GiveNumber;
BEGIN
IF MOD(V_MyNumber, 2) = 0 THEN
GOTO L_EVEN;
ELSE
GOTO L_ODD;
END IF;
<<L_EVEN>>
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Even

Number.');

RETURN;
<<L_ODD>>
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Odd

Number.');

RETURN;
END;
/

GOTO Always Needs A Proper LABEL To Jump.

A LABEL Does Not Need Any GOTO For Execution.

Hence To Keeps Proper Meaning Within The Sequence RETURN Should Be

Used.

Iterations In PL/SQL

Loops Facilitate To Repeat A Statement OR Sequence of Statements Multiple

Times.

The Different Types of PL/SQL Loops Are

Basic OR Simple LOOP.

WHILE Loop.

FOR Loop.

BASIC OR SIMPLE LOOP

It is The Simplest Form of The LOOP Construct In PL/SQL.

It Encloses A Sequence of Statements Between The Keywords LOOP And

END LOOP.

It Allows Execution of Its Statements At Lease Once.

To Keep The Loop In Finite State The EXIT Statement is Used.

Syntax
LOOP
Statements;
EXIT [When Condition];
END LOOP;
EXIT Statement

EXIT Statement is Used To Terminate A LOOP.

Once The Loop is Terminated, The Control Passes To The Next Statement
After The END LOOP.

EXIT Can Be Issued Either As An Action Within An IF Statement OR As A

Stand Alone Statement With in The LOOP.

The EXIT Statement Should Always Be Placed Inside The Loop Only.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

EXIT Can Be Associated With A WHEN Clause To Allow Conditional

Termination of The Loop.

A Basic Loop Can Contain Multiple EXIT Statements.

The EXIT Condition Can Be At The Top of The Loop OR At The End of The
Loop As Per Logical Convenience.

Depending Upon The Circumstances We Can Make Use of This LOOP As PreTested Loop OR Post-Tested Loop Construct.

But Under Major Construct it is Convenient To Use This Loop As Post Tested
Loop Construct Only.

The Loop Terminates Its Process When The Conditional State is TRUE.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Num NUMBER := 1;
BEGIN
LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE ('The Line ' || V_Num || ' Output is ' ||
V_Num);
V_Num := V_Num + 1;
IF V_NUM > 5 THEN
EXIT;
END IF;
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE ('The Total Lines of Outputs are ' ||
(V_Num - 1));
END;
/

Nested Loops

It is A Situation Where One Loop is Embedded Into The Other.

The Outer Loop And The Inner Loop Get Associated With One Another And
Execute Simultaneously.

The Overall Loop Terminates is Dictated By The Outer Loops EXIT WHEN
Condition OR EXIT Condition.

In Nested Loops The Outer Loops Condition Evaluated As TRUE, Always

Makes The Inner Loop To Resume Its Process And The Inner Loops
Termination Actually Makes The Outer Loop To Update its Process.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Num NUMBER := 1;
BEGIN
LOOP
EXIT WHEN V_Num

> 10;

LOOP
EXIT WHEN V_Num > 5;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Inner Loop : ' ||
V_Num := V_Num

V_Num);

+ 1;

END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Outer Loop : ' ||
V_Num

:= V_Num

V_Num);

+ 1;

END LOOP;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

END;
/

Nested Loops and Labels:

Loops Can Be Nested To Multiple Levels.

All The Loops Can Be Nested Into One Another.

Loops Can Be Labeled As Per The Requirements.

A Label is Placed Before The Statement, Either On The Same Line OR On A

Separate Line.

Label Loops By Placing The Label Before The Word Loop Within The Label
Delimiters.

When The Loop is Labeled, The Label Name Can Be Optionally Included After
The END LOOP Statement For Clarity.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Num NUMBER := 1;
BEGIN

<<OuterLoop>>
LOOP

<<InnerLoop>>
LOOP
EXIT WHEN V_Num > 5;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Inner Loop : ' || V_Num);
V_Num := V_Num

+ 1;

END LOOP InnerLoop;

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Outer Loop : ' || V_Num);
V_Num

:= V_Num

EXIT WHEN V_Num

+ 1;
> 10;

END LOOP OuterLoop;

END;
/

WHILE Loop

It Can Be Used To Repeat A Sequence of Statements Until The Controlling

Condition is No Longer TRUE.

The Condition is Evaluated At The Start of Each Iteration.

The Loop Terminates When The Condition is FALSE.

Syntax
WHILE Condition
LOOP
Statement1;
Statement2;
END LOOP;

If The Condition Yields NULL, The LOOP is Bypassed And Control Passes To
The Next Statement.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Number NUMBER(2) := 1;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

V_Output VARCHAR2(100);
BEGIN
WHILE V_Number <= 5
LOOP
V_Output := V_Output ||' '||V_Number;
V_Number := V_Number + 1;
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Output);
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Num NUMBER;
V_Position NUMBER;
V_Result NUMBER := 0;
BEGIN
V_Num := &NumberToReverse;
WHILE V_Num > 0
LOOP
V_Position := MOD(V_Num, 10);
V_Result := (V_Result * 10) + V_Position;
V_Num := TRUNC(V_Num / 10);
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Reverse of the Entered Number is : ');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result);
END;

FOR Loop

It Has The Same General Structure As The Basic Loop.

FOR LOOP Contains A Control Statement At The Front of The LOOP

Keyword, To Determine The Number of Iterations That PL/SQL Performs.

Syntax:
FOR Counter IN [REVERSE] LowerBound..UpperBound
LOOP
Statement1;
Statement2;
END LOOP;
Counter

It Is An Implicitly Declared INTEGER Whose Value is Automatically

Increased OR Decreased By 1 On Each Iteration of The LOOP Until The Upper
Bound OR Lower Bound is Reached.

Reverse

It Is A Keyword, And Causes The Counter To Decrement With Each Iteration

From The Upper Bound To The Lower Bound.

The Counter Need Not Be Declared, As It Is Implicitly Declared As An

Integer.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Lower Bound And The Upper Bound of The Loop Can Be Literals,
Variables, OR Expressions, But They Should Be Evaluated To Integers.

The Lower And Upper Bounds of A Loop Statement Need Not Be Numeric
Literals, They Can Be Expressions That Covert To Numeric Values At Run
Time.

FOR Loops Should Be Planned in Such Circumstances When We Have To

Implement An Operation Upon A Range Analysis.

For Loops Take Their Range Itself As The Conditional Statement, Hence They
Are More Suitable When Working On Database Oriented Logic.

SQL> DECLARE
V_StartRange NUMBER := &StartRange;
V_EndRange NUMBER := &EndRange;
V_Result VARCHAR2(500) := NULL;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Illustration of For Loop...!');
FOR MyIndex IN V_StartRange..V_EndRange
LOOP
V_Result := V_Result||' '||V_StartRange;
V_StartRange := V_StartRange + 1;
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Result);
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_NumFact NUMBER := &GiveNumber;
V_Factorial NUMBER := 1;
BEGIN
FOR IndexI IN 1..V_NumFact
LOOP
V_Factorial := V_Factorial * IndexI;
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(' The Factorial of '||V_NumFact|| ' is :
'||V_Factorial);
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_NumFact NUMBER := &GiveNumber;
V_Factorial NUMBER := 1;
BEGIN
FOR IndexI IN REVERSE 1..V_NumFact
LOOP
V_Factorial := V_Factorial * IndexI;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(' The IndexI Number is
'||IndexI);
END LOOP;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(' The Factorial of '||V_NumFact|| ' is :

'||V_Factorial);
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Name VARCHAR2(30);
V_Position VARCHAR2(100) := NULL;
BEGIN
V_Name := '&EnterYourName' ;
FOR I IN 1..LENGTH(V_Name)
LOOP
V_Position := V_Position || ' ' ||SUBSTR(V_Name, I, 1);
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Position);
END;
/

Illustrations on Nested FOR Loops

SQL> DECLARE
V_OuterLoopRange NUMBER := 5;
V_InnerLoopRange NUMBER := 3;
BEGIN

<<OuterLoop>>
FOR MyIndex IN 1..V_OuterLoopRange
LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('When Outer Loop Index Value =
'||MyIndex);

<<InnerLoop>>
FOR MyIndex2 IN 1..V_InnerLoopRange
LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Outer Loop Index Value
='||OUTERLOOP.MyIndex||' , '||'Inner Loop Index Value =
'||MyIndex2);
END LOOP InnerLoop;
END LOOP OuterLoop;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_MyChar VARCHAR2(20);
BEGIN

<<OuterLoop>>
FOR MyIndex1 IN 1..15
LOOP

<<InnerLoop>>
FOR MyIndex2 IN 1..MyIndex1
LOOP
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

V_MyChar := V_MyChar|| '*';

END LOOP InnerLoop;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_MyChar);
V_MyChar := NULL;
END LOOP OuterLoop;
END;
/

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Using SQL Within PL/SQL

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

All Most Everything We Learned in SQL Can Be Implemented in PL/SQL

Using Proper Control And Memory Management.

All SQL Functions Can Be Used Within The Same Syntax As That of The SQL.

The Data Manipulation Statements From SQL Can Be Used More Intelligently
in PL/SQL As We Have The Liberty of Controlling The Transactions And Data
Manipulations Using The Control Structures.

We Can Even Control The Transactions

ROLLBACK Statements From PL/SQL.

Using

The

COMMIT

And

Data Retrieval Standards

Data Retrieval Options Range From Basic SELECT Statements To Pattern

Matching With Regular Expressions.

The Data Retrieval Standards Are Implemented Using

Statements With Almost The Same Syntax of SQL.

The SELECT Statement in PL/SQL is Restricted To Select Only One Record

At A Time From The Database.

If More Records Have To Be Retrieved And Managed By The PL/SQL We Have

To Implement The Concepts of CURSORS

All The Data Retrieved From The Database Server Has To Be Transferred into
The Local PL/SQL Variables Before Processing The Business Logic.

The SELECT

SELECT Statement in PL/SQL

Syntax
SELECT
SelectList
[INTO VariableList]
FROM TableList
[WHERE WHERE Clause]
[GROUP BY Clause]
[HAVING Clause]
[ORDER BY ColumnList]

The SELECT LIST

Can Be Columns, Strings, Built-In Functions OR
Projection Operator * To Retrieve Data.

Arithmetic Operations Are Allowed In The SELECT LIST.

Variables Can Be Declared As A

Single Data Type (Scalar Data Types).

Anchor Data Type.

Entire Record Types And

PL/SQL Tables.

The TABLE LIST in The FROM Clause Can Be One OR More TABLES,
VIEWS OR INLINE VIEWS.

The WHERE Clause Restricts The Result Set As Per The Condition Defined.

When Selecting A Value Into A Variable, Be Sure To Return One And Only
One Value into The Variable.

Only One Record Can Be Returned Through A SELECT Statement In PL/SQL.

The Common Errors Encountered Are:

ORA 01403 NO Data Found

ORA 01422 Exact Fetch Returns More Than Requested Number of
Rows.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Note

The SELECT Statements Should Be Restricted With Rules What We Discussed

in Single Row Sub-Queries in SQL*Plus, To Avoid The ORA -01422 Exception.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno

NUMBER := &EnterEmpno;

V_EName

VARCHAR2(30);

V_Job

VARCHAR2(30);

V_Sal

NUMBER(7, 2);

BEGIN
SELECT
Ename, Job, Sal
INTO
V_Ename, V_Job, V_Sal
FROM EMP
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Name : '||V_Ename);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The job : '||V_Job);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Sal: '||V_Sal);
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno

NUMBER(4):=&EnterEmpno;

V_EName

VARCHAR2(30);

V_Sal

NUMBER(7,2);

V_Comm

NUMBER(7,2);

BEGIN
SELECT
EName, Sal, Comm
INTO V_EName, V_Sal, V_Comm
FROM EMP
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Name : '||INITCAP(V_Ename));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Salary : '||TO_CHAR(V_Sal,
'99,999.99'));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Commission :
'||NVL(TO_CHAR(V_Comm), 'No Commission'));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Total Sal is : '||TO_CHAR(V_Sal +
NVL(V_Comm, 0)));
END;
SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno

NUMBER(4) :=

V_Ename

VARCHAR2(30);

V_Deptno

NUMBER(2);

V_Job

VARCHAR2(30);

V_MGR

NUMBER(4);

&EnterEmpNo;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

V_HireDate DATE;
V_Sal

NUMBER(7,2);

V_Comm

NUMBER(7,2);

BEGIN
SELECT
Ename, Deptno, Job, MGR, HireDate, Sal, Comm
INTO
V_Ename, V_Deptno, V_Job, V_MGR, V_HireDate,
V_Sal, V_Comm
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Details of Employee Number
'||V_Empno||' Requested by You Are ...');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Employee Name : '||V_Ename);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Department Number : '||V_Deptno);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Designation : '||V_Job);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Manager Number : '||V_MGR);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Joining Date : '||V_HireDate);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Basic Salary : '||V_Sal);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Commission Earned : '||V_Comm);
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno

NUMBER(4) := &EnterEmpNo;

V_Ename

VARCHAR2(30);

V_Deptno

NUMBER(2);

V_Job

VARCHAR2(30);

V_MGR

NUMBER(4);

V_HireDate DATE;
V_Sal

NUMBER(7,2);

V_Comm

NUMBER(7,2);

V_MGRName

VARCHAR2(30);

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

FROM Emp
WHERE MGR IS NULL;
END IF;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Details of Employee Number
'||V_Empno||' Requested by You Are ...');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Employee Name :
'||INITCAP(V_Ename));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Department Number : '||V_Deptno);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Designation : '||INITCAP(V_Job));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Manager Number :
'||NVL(TO_CHAR(V_MGR),'"Cannot be Managed"')||', and his Name is :
'||V_MGRName);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Joining Date :
'||TO_CHAR(V_HireDate,'FMDD, Month Year'));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Basic Salary : '||CONCAT('INR
',TO_CHAR(V_Sal,'99,999.99')));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Commission Earned :
'||NVL(TO_CHAR(V_Comm),'No Commission...Sorry!'));
END;
/

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Achieving Data Independency And

Structural Independency in PL/SQL
Using Anchor Type And
Composite Type Variables

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

%TYPE Variable Declaration:

The %TYPE Variable is Used To Anchor PL/SQL Variable To The Database

Type Columns Directly.

This Methodology is More Suitable Where The Variable That is Declared in

The Program is Mapping Directly To A Column in The Database Table.

Syntax
Variablename

TableName.ColumnName%TYPE;

This Method Keeps The PL/SQL Program To Be Unaffected Even When The
Data Types Within The Database Are Changing.

The Methodology Provides Data Independency For The PL/SQL Program.

Using This Methodology We Can Achieve Architectural Independency

Between The Oracle Server Environment And The Client Environment.

This Declaration Eliminates The bit Architectural Differences That Arise

Between The Server And The Client.

By Any Means if The Data Type of A Particular Column is Changing in The

Back End Process of The Server, Either With Data Type OR Width, Will Never
Effect The PL/SQL Modules With Their Operations.

Illustration
SQL> DECLARE
V_EmpNo
Emp.Empno%TYPE;
V_Ename
Emp.Ename%TYPE;
V_Sal
Emp.Sal%TYPE;
BEGIN
/*Executable Statements*/
END;

It is Always Better To Declare The Variables That Are Acting As

Communication Agents Between SQL And PL/SQL Environments With This
Notation.

All Remaining Variables Can Be Declared As Scalar Types.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno

Emp.Empno%TYPE := &EnterEmpno;

V_EName

Emp.EName%TYPE;

V_Job

Emp.Job%TYPE;

V_Sal

Emp.Sal%TYPE;

BEGIN
SELECT
Ename, Job, Sal
INTO
V_Ename, V_Job, V_Sal
FROM EMP
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Name : '||V_Ename);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Job : '||V_Job);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Sal : '||V_Sal);
END;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno

Emp.Empno%TYPE := &EnterEmpNo;

V_Ename

Emp.Ename%TYPE;

V_Deptno

Emp.Deptno%TYPE;

V_Job

Emp.Job%TYPE;

V_MGR

Emp.MGR%TYPE;

V_HireDate

Emp.HireDate%TYPE;

V_Sal

Emp.Sal%TYPE;

V_Comm

Emp.Comm%TYPE;

V_MGRName

Emp.Ename%TYPE;

BEGIN
SELECT Ename, Deptno, Job, MGR, HireDate, Sal, Comm INTO
V_Ename , V_Deptno, V_Job, V_MGR, V_HireDate, V_Sal, V_Comm
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
IF V_MGR IS NOT NULL THEN
SELECT Ename INTO V_MGRName
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_MGR;
ELSE
SELECT Ename INTO V_MGRName
FROM Emp
WHERE MGR IS NULL;
END IF;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Details of Employee Number
'||V_Empno||' Requested by You Are ...');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Employee Name :
'||INITCAP(V_Ename));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Department Number : '||V_Deptno);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Designation : '||INITCAP(V_Job));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Manager Number :
'||NVL(TO_CHAR(V_MGR),'"Cannot be Managed"')||' , and his Name is :
'||V_MGRName);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Joining Date :
'||TO_CHAR(V_HireDate,'FMDD, Month Year'));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Basic Salary : '||CONCAT('INR
',TO_CHAR(V_Sal,'99,999.99')));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Commission Earned :
'||NVL(TO_CHAR(V_Comm),'No Commission...Sorry!'));
END;
/

Applying Composite Data Types in PL/SQL

The Composite Data Types in PL/SQL Are Also Called As COLLECTIONS.

The Types of Composite Data Types in PL/SQL Are

%ROWTYPE.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

PL/SQL RECORD Type.

PL/SQL TABLE Type.

NESTED TABLE.

VARRAY.

%ROWTYPE Declaration

To Declare A Record Based On A Collection of Columns in A Database Table

OR View, We Can Use The %ROWTYPE Attribute.

The Fields in The Record Take Their Names And Data Types From The
Columns of The Table OR View.

The Record Can Also Store An Entire Row of Data Fetched From CURSOR
Variable.

Prefix %ROWTYPE With The Database Table Name.

Syntax
VariableName TableName%ROWTYPE;
Illustration
V_EmpRecord Emp%ROWTYPE;
Advantages

The Number of Columns And Data Types of The Underlying Database

Columns Need Not Be Known.

The Number of Columns And Data Types of The Underlying Database

Columns May Change At Runtime.

It is Mostly Useful When Retrieving The Data For The Entire Row With The
SELECT Statement Using Projection * Operator.

The %ROWTYPE Declaration Provides The Structural Independency When

Designing The Applications.

SQL> DECLARE
V_EmpRecord Emp%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
SELECT * INTO V_EmpRecord
FROM EMP
WHERE Empno = &EnterEmpno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Name : '|| V_EmpRecord.Ename);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Job : '|| V_EmpRecord.Job);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Salary : '||V_EmpRecord.Sal);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Commission : '|| V_EmpRecord.Comm);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Gross Salary : ' ||(V_EmpRecord.Sal +
NVL(V_EmpRecord.Comm, 0)));
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
EmpRecord Emp%ROWTYPE;
V_EmpRecord EmpRecord%TYPE;
BEGIN
SELECT * INTO V_EmpRecord
FROM EMP
WHERE Empno = &EnterEmpno;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Name : '|| V_EmpRecord.Ename);

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Job : '|| V_EmpRecord.Job);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Salary : '||V_EmpRecord.Sal);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Commission : '|| V_EmpRecord.Comm);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Gross Salary : ' ||(V_EmpRecord.Sal +
NVL(V_EmpRecord.Comm, 0)));
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno Emp.Empno%TYPE := &EnterEmpNo;
V_EmpRecord Emp%ROWTYPE;
V_DeptRecord Dept%ROWTYPE;
V_SalGradeRecord SalGrade%ROWTYPE;
V_MGRName Emp.Ename%TYPE;
BEGIN
SELECT * INTO V_EmpRecord
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
SELECT * INTO V_DeptRecord
FROM Dept
WHERE Deptno = V_EmpRecord.Deptno;
SELECT * INTO V_SalGradeRecord
FROM SalGrade
WHERE V_EmpRecord.Sal BETWEEN LoSal AND HiSal;
IF V_EmpRecord.MGR IS NOT NULL THEN
SELECT Ename INTO V_MGRName
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_EmpRecord.MGR;
ELSE
SELECT Ename INTO V_MGRName
FROM Emp
WHERE MGR IS NULL;
END IF;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Details of Employee Number
'||V_EmpRecord.Empno||' Requested by You Are ...');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Employee Name :
'||INITCAP(V_EmpRecord.Ename));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Department Number :
'||V_EmpRecord.Deptno||', Department Name is
'||INITCAP(V_DeptRecord.Dname)||', and is Situated at
'||INITCAP(V_DeptRecord.Loc));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Designation :
'||INITCAP(V_EmpRecord.Job));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Manager Number :
'||NVL(TO_CHAR(V_EmpRecord.MGR),'"Cannot be Managed"')||', and
his Name is : '||V_MGRName);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Joining Date :

'||TO_CHAR(V_EmpRecord.HireDate,'FMDD, Month Year')||' You Are
Serving Us Since : '||TRUNC((SYSDATE V_EmpRecord.HireDate)/365)||' Years.');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Basic Salary : '||CONCAT('INR
',TO_CHAR(V_EmpRecord.Sal,'99,999.99'))||' and his Grade as Per
Salary is '||V_SalGradeRecord.Grade);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Commission Earned : '||CONCAT('INR ',
NVL(TO_CHAR(V_EmpRecord.Comm, '99G999D99'),'No
Commission...Sorry!')));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Gross Salary Earned : '|| CONCAT('INR ',
TO_CHAR((V_EmpRecord.Sal + NVL(V_EmpRecord.Comm,0)),
'99G999D99')));
END;
/

PL/SQL Records

A PL/SQL RECORD is A Group of Related Data Items Stored in Individual

Fields, Each With Its Own Attribute Name And Data Type.

When A RECORD TYPE of Fields Are Declared Then They Can Be

Manipulated As A Unit Through Out The Application.

The Points To Note Are

Each RECORD Defined Can Have As Many Fields As Necessary.

RECORDS Can Be Assigned Initial Values And Can Be Defined As NOT

NULL.

Fields Without Initial Values Are Initialized To NULL.

The DEFAULT Key Word Can Also Be Used When Defining Fields.

RECORD Types Can Be Declared As User Define Records In The Declarative

Part of Any PL/SQL Block.

A RECORD Can Be The Component of Another RECORD.

We Can DECLARE And Reference Nested Records in The Program As Per

Our Convenience And Analysis.

After The Record Data Type is Created It Should Be Instantiated, Before The
Operational Process Can Be Implemented.

Syntax
TYPE TypeName IS
RECORD
(
FieldName1,
FieldName2,
FieldNameN
);

The FieldName Can Have The Following Syntax

FieldName { FieldDataType(Width) OR
RecordVariable%TYPE OR
Table.Column%TYPE OR
Table%ROWTYPE }
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

[NOT NULL]
[:=[DEFAULT] Expr]
Defining And Declaring A PL/SQL Record

To Create A User Defined RECORD Data Type, We Define A RECORD TYPE

And Then Declare Records of That Type.

Type Name is The Name Of The Record Type.

Field Name It is The Name of The Field Within The Record.

Field Type Is The Data Type of The Field.

Expr It is The Field Type OR An Initial Value.

The NOT NULL Constraint Prevents The Assigning of NULLs To Those

Fields.

Field Declarations Are Like Variable Declarations Each Field Has A Unique
Name And A Specific Data Type.

The Most Important Point To Note is We Must Create The Data Type First
And Then Declare An Identifier Using The Declared Data Type.

Illustration
DECLARE
TYPE EmpRecordType IS RECORD
(
Empno NUMBER(4) NOT NULL := 0,
Ename Emp.Ename%TYPE,
Job
Emp.Job%TYPE
);

After The RECORD Type Has Been Created, We Should Instantiate The
Individual RECORD Type Variables For Operations.

Illustration
EmpRecordInstance

EmpRecordDataType;

Fields in a RECORD Are Accessed By Their Name.

To Reference OR Initialize An Individual Field, We Must Use Dot Notation.

Syntax
RecordName.FieldName
Illustration
EmpRecord.Ename := SAMPATH;
SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno NUMBER(4) := &EnterEmpNo;
TYPE EmpRecordType IS RECORD
(
V_Ename VARCHAR2(30),
V_Deptno NUMBER(2),
V_Job

VARCHAR2(30)

);
EmpRecord EmpRecordType;
BEGIN
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SELECT Ename, Deptno, Job

INTO
EmpRecord.V_Ename,
EmpRecord.V_Deptno,
EmpRecord.V_Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Details of Employee Number
'||V_Empno||' Requested by You Are ...');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Employee Name :
'||EmpRecord.V_Ename);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Department Number :
'||EmpRecord.V_Deptno);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Designation : '||EmpRecord.V_Job);
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno NUMBER(4) := &EnterEmpNo;
TYPE EmpRecordType IS RECORD
(
Ename

VARCHAR2(30),

Deptno
Job

NUMBER(2),
VARCHAR2(30),

MGR

NUMBER(4),

HireDate DATE,
Sal

NUMBER(7,2),

Comm

NUMBER(7,2)

);
EmpRecord EmpRecordType;
BEGIN
SELECT
Ename,
Deptno,
Job, MGR,
HireDate,
Sal,
Comm
INTO
EmpRecord.Ename ,
EmpRecord.Deptno,
EmpRecord.Job,
EmpRecord.MGR,
EmpRecord.HireDate,
EmpRecord.Sal,
EmpRecord.Comm
FROM Emp
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

WHERE Empno = V_Empno;

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Details of Employee Number
'||V_Empno||' Requested by You Are ...');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Employee Name :
'||EmpRecord.Ename);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Department Number :
'||EmpRecord.Deptno);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Designation : '||EmpRecord.Job);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Manager Number : '||EmpRecord.MGR);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Joining Date : '||EmpRecord.HireDate);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Basic Salary : '||EmpRecord.Sal);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Commission Earned :
'||EmpRecord.Comm);
END;
/

Illustration1
Atomic Type Collection
TYPE AtomicTypesRec IS RECORD
(
Empno
Emp.Empno%TYPE,
MgrName
Emp.Ename%TYPE
);
Nested Type Collection
TYPE AllTablesRecord IS RECORD
(
EmpRecord
Emp%ROWTYPE,
DeptRecord
Dept%ROWTYPE,
SalGrRecord SalGrade%ROWTYPE,
AtomicType
AtomicTypesRec
);
Type Instantiation
V_AllTablesRecord AllTablesRecord;
Illustration2
Employee Type Creation
TYPE EmpRecordType IS RECORD
(
Ename
Emp.Ename%TYPE,
Deptno
Emp.Deptno%TYPE,
Job
Emp.Job%TYPE,
MGR
Emp.MGR%TYPE,
HireDate
Emp.HireDate%TYPE,
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Pointers in C Language.

They Help in Integrating The Cursors For Dynamic Management of Records

At Run Time.

They Make Runtime Management of Result Sets Very Convenient.

Things To Note

It is Similar To An Array in Third Generation Languages.

PL/SQL Table Should Contain Two Components.

A PRIMARY KEY of Data Type BINARY_INTEGER, That Indexes The

PL/SQL Table.

A Column of A Scalar OR Record Data Type Which Stores The PL/SQL

Table Elements.

PL/SQL Tables Can Increase in Size Dynamically As They Are Unconstrained.

Creating A PL/SQL Table

There Are Two Steps Involved In Creating A PL/SQL Table.

Declare A PL/SQL Table Data Type.

Declare A Variable of That Data Type.

Syntax
TYPE TypeName IS
TABLE OF
{Column Type OR Variable%TYPE OR Table.Column%TYPE OR
Table%ROWTYPE} [NOT NULL]
INDEX BY BINARY_INTEGER;
PLSQLTableInstance TypeName;
Illustration
Primary Key

Emp.Ename%TYPE

KING

BLAKE

CLARK

JONES

ADAMS

SMITH

Binary Integer

Declared Data Type

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

TYPE EnameTableType
IS
TABLE OF
Emp.Ename%TYPE
INDEX BY BINARY_INTEGER;
EnameTable
EnameTableType;

The Number of Rows in A PL/SQL Table Can Increase Dynamically, Hence A

PL/SQL Table Can Grow As New Rows Are Added.

PL/SQL Tables Can Have One Column For data Storage And A Primary Key
For Index Management, Neither of Which Can Be Named.

The Data Column Can Belong To Any Scalar OR Record Data Type, But The
PRIMARY KEY Must Belong To Type BINARY_INTEGER Only.

We Cannot Initialize A PL/SQL Table In Its Declaration.

Referencing A PL/SQL Table

Syntax
PLSQL_TableName(Primary_Key_Value);

PRIMARY_KEY_VALUE Belongs To Type BINARY_INTEGER.

The Primary Key Value Can Be Negative Indexing Need Not Start With 1.

The Methods That Make PL/SQL Tables Easier To Use Are

EXISTS(N)

COUNT

Returns The FIRST And LAST Index Numbers in A PL/SQL Table.

Returns NULL If The PL/SQL Table is Empty.

PRIOR(N)
Returns The Index Number That Precedes Index N In A PL/SQL
Table.

NEXT(N)

Returns The Number of Elements That A PL/SQL Table Currently

Contains.

FIRST And LAST

Returns TRUE If The Nth Element In PL/SQL Table Exists.

Returns The Index Number That Succeeds Index N In A PL/SQL

Table.

EXTEND(N.I)

It Increases The Size Of A PL/SQL Table.

It Appends One NULL Element To A PL/SQL Table.

EXTEND(N)

EXTEND(N, i)

Appends N Copies of The ith Element To A PL/SQL Table.

TRIM

Appends N NULL Elements Into A PL/SQL Table.

It Removes One Element From The End Of A PL/SQL Table.

TRIM(N)

Removes N Elements From The End of A PL/SQL Table.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DELETE

It Removes All Elements From A PL/SQL Table.

DELETE(N), Delete (M, N)

To Reference PL/SQL Table of Records We Use The Notation On The Index

Number of The Table.

TableName(Index).Field

SQL> DECLARE
TYPE Dept_Table_Type
IS
TABLE OF
Dept.Dname%TYPE
INDEX BY BINARY_INTEGER;
My_Dept_Table Dept_Table_Type;
V_Count

NUMBER(2);

BEGIN
SELECT COUNT(*)
INTO V_Count
FROM Dept;
FOR MyIndex IN 1..V_Count LOOP
SELECT Dname
INTO My_Dept_Table(MyIndex)
FROM Dept
WHERE Deptno = MyIndex * 10;
END LOOP;
FOR MYIndex IN

1..V_Count LOOP

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(My_Dept_Table(MyIndex));
END LOOP;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
TYPE Dept_Table_Type
IS
TABLE OF
Dept%ROWTYPE
INDEX BY

BINARY_INTEGER;

My_Dept_Table
V_Count

Dept_Table_Type;

NUMBER(2);

BEGIN
SELECT COUNT(*)
INTO V_Count
FROM

Dept;

FOR MyIndex IN 1..V_Count

LOOP
SELECT *
INTO My_Dept_Table(MyIndex)
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

FROM Dept
WHERE
END

Deptno = MyIndex * 10;

LOOP;

FOR MyIndex IN 1..V_Count

LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Dept. '||
My_Dept_Table(MyIndex).Deptno ||' '
||My_Dept_Table(MyIndex).Dname||' is Located in ' ||
My_Dept_Table(MyIndex).Loc);
END LOOP;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
TYPE Emp_Table_Type IS TABLE OF Emp%ROWTYPE
INDEX BY BINARY_INTEGER;
My_Emp_Table Emp_Table_Type;
V_RowID NUMBER(2) := 65;
V_EmpCount NUMBER(2);
BEGIN
SELECT COUNT(*)
INTO V_EmpCount
FROM Emp;
FOR MyIndex IN 1..V_EmpCount LOOP
SELECT *
INTO My_Emp_Table(MyIndex)
FROM Emp
WHERE SUBSTR(ROWID,18,1) = CHR(V_RowID);
V_RowID := V_RowID + 1;
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('Employees Information', 80));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('-', 80,'-'));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('EmpNo', 8)|| RPAD('Ename',
12)||RPAD('Job', 12)||RPAD('Deptno', 8)||RPAD('Mgr',
10)||RPAD('Hiredate', 12)||RPAD('Sal', 12)||RPAD('Comm', 10));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('-', 80,'-'));
FOR MyIndex IN 1..V_EmpCount LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD(My_Emp_Table(MyIndex).Empno,
8) ||RPAD(My_Emp_Table(MyIndex).Ename,
12)||RPAD(My_Emp_Table(MyIndex).Job,
12)||RPAD(My_Emp_Table(MyIndex).Deptno,
8)||NVL(TO_CHAR(RPAD(My_Emp_Table(MyIndex).MGR, 10)),'No
Manager')||RPAD(My_Emp_Table(MyIndex).Hiredate,
12)||RPAD(My_Emp_Table(MyIndex).Sal,
12)||NVL(TO_CHAR(RPAD(My_Emp_Table(MyIndex).Comm,
12)),'-NA-'));
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(My_Emp_Table.COUNT||' Rows Selected.');
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
TYPE Dept_Table_Type IS TABLE OF Dept.Dname%TYPE
INDEX BY BINARY_INTEGER;
My_Dept_Table Dept_Table_Type;
V_Count

NUMBER(2);

V_RecNo

NUMBER(2) := &EnterRecordNumber;

BEGIN
SELECT COUNT(*)
INTO V_Count
FROM Dept;
FOR MyIndex IN 1..V_Count LOOP
SELECT Dname
INTO My_Dept_Table(MyIndex)
FROM Dept
WHERE Deptno = MyIndex * 10;
END LOOP;
FOR MYIndex IN

1..V_Count LOOP

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Department Number,

'||MyIndex*10||' is named as : '||My_Dept_Table(MyIndex));
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The PLSQL Table Contains
'||My_Dept_Table.COUNT||' Records.');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The First Index Number of PLSQL Table is
'||My_Dept_Table.FIRST||' and the First Record is :
'||My_Dept_Table(My_Dept_Table.FIRST));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Last Index Number of PLSQL Table is
'||My_Dept_Table.LAST||' and the Last Record is :
'||My_Dept_Table(My_Dept_Table.LAST));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Previous Record of
'||My_Dept_Table.LAST||'th Record of PLSQL Table is
'||My_Dept_Table.PRIOR(My_Dept_Table.LAST)||' and the Data is : '||
My_Dept_Table( My_Dept_Table.PRIOR( My_Dept_Table.LAST)));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Next Record of
'||My_Dept_Table.FIRST||'st Record of PLSQL Table is
'||My_Dept_Table.NEXT(My_Dept_Table.FIRST)||' and the Data is : '||
My_Dept_Table( My_Dept_Table.NEXT( My_Dept_Table.FIRST)));
IF My_Dept_Table.EXISTS(V_RecNo) THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Department Exists');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Department Name is,
'||My_Dept_Table(V_RecNo));
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Sorry! ... Your Requested Data does not
Exist...Check the Record Range.');
END IF;
END;
/
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Data Manipulation Through PL/SQL

The Data in The Database is Manipulated Using The DML Commands From
PL/SQL.

The DML Commands INSERT, UPDATE And DELETE Can Be Used in PL/SQL
Without Any Restrictions.

The ROW LOCKS And TABLE LOCKS in The Database Are Released Using The
COMMIT And ROLLBACK Statements.

Inserting Data

The SQL INSERT Statement is Used As it Exists, in The PL/SQL Block For
Data Insertion Standards.

We Can Use All The Required SQL Built-in Functions, Like SYSDATE As Per
Requirements.

The PRIMARY
SEQUENCES.

We Can Derive Values Within The PL/SQL Block As Per Necessity.

Add Column Default Values If Any, As Per The Necessity.

Any Identifiers in INSERT Clause Must Be An Database Column Name Only,

To Avoid Ambiguity, And The Difference in bit Architecture.

KEY

Values

Can

Generated

Using

The

Database

SQL> BEGIN
INSERT INTO
Emp(Empno, Ename, Deptno, Job, MGR, HireDate, Sal, Comm)
VALUES(
EmpSequence.NEXTVAL,
SATISH,
10,
MANAGER,
7839,
22-NOV-1998,
4500,
NULL
);
COMMIT;
END;

/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno NUMBER(4) := &EnterEmpNo;
V_Ename VARCHAR2(15) := '&EnterEname';
V_Deptno NUMBER(2) := &EnterDepto;
V_Job VARCHAR2(15) := '&EnterJob';
V_MGR NUMBER := &EnterMGRNo;
V_HireDate Emp.HireDate%TYPE := '&EnterHireDate';
V_Sal Emp.Sal%TYPE := &EnterSal;
V_Comm Emp.Comm%TYPE := &EnterComm;
BEGIN
INSERT INTO
Emp(Empno, Ename, Deptno, Job, MGR, HireDate, Sal, Comm)
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

VALUES(
V_Empno,
V_Ename,
V_Deptno,
V_Job,
V_MGR,
V_HireDate,
V_Sal,
V_Comm
);
COMMIT;
END;
/

Updating Data

The Data Updation is Also Similar To The UPDATE Statements Used In SQL.

A Small Amount of Ambiguity Can Arise in The SET Clause of The UPDATE
Statement, As The Identifier on The Right Side of The Assignment Operator
Can Be A PL/SQL Variable, OR Another Database Column Also.

In The Set Clause, The Identifier on The Left is Always A Database Column.

It is Always Better To Implement A WHERE Clause To Check That The

Required Rows Only, Are Updated.

If Any Rows Are Not Updated, Then NO ERROR is Returned.

A Point To Note At This State is

PL/SQL Variable Assignment Use :=.

SQL Column Assignment Uses =.

SQL> DECLARE
V_SalRaise Emp.Sal%TYPE := 3500;
BEGIN
UPDATE Emp
SET Sal = Sal + V_SalRaise
WHERE Job = 'ANALYST';
END;
SQL> DECLARE
V_JobChng Emp.Job%TYPE := UPPER(&GiveJob);
V_Empno

Emp.Empno%TYPE := &GiveEmpno;

BEGIN
UPDATE Emp
SET
Job = V_JobChng
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
END;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Deleting Data

Data Deletion Through PL/SQL is Also

Statement Used in SQL.

Practically Similar To The DELETE

When Deleting The Data Utmost Care Has To Be Taken By Implementing

WHERE Clause, Else Unwanted Data May Also Be Lost Along The Wanted
Data.

Points To Note

The Child And Parent Relations Should Be Cross Checked While Deletion
Takes Place, To Avoid Orphan Records Generation.

The ON DELETE Option If Set Through Constraints At The Time of Table

Creation Will Get Activated As Per The Statement Requirement.

Commit if Issued Releases All LOCKS That Are Existing.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Deptno Emp.Deptno%TYPE := 30;
BEGIN
DELETE FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = V_Deptno;
END;
SQL> DECLARE
V_Deptno Dept.Deptno%TYPE := 40;
BEGIN
DELETE FROM Dept
WHERE Deptno = V_Deptno;
END;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Data Manipulation Using

Cursors in PL/SQL

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

To Process SQL Statements Oracle Needs To Create An Area of Memory

Known As The CONTEXT AREA, OR PROCESS GLOBAL AREA (PGA).

The CONTEXT AREA Contains The Information Needed To Process The

Statement.

The CONTEXT AREA Information Includes

The Number of Rows Processed By The Statement.

A Pointer To The Parsed Representation of The Statement.

Every Query Contains An ACTIVE SET, Which Refers To The Rows That Will
Be Returned By The Query.

CURSOR Definition

CURSOR is a Handle, OR Pointer To The CONTEXT AREA.

CURSOR Usage

Using A CURSOR, The PL/SQL Program Can Control The CONTEXT AREA, As
The SQL Statement is Being Processed.

CURSOR Features

CURSOR Allows To FETCH And PROCESS Rows Returned By A SELECT

Statement, One Row At A Time.

A CURSOR is Named, Such That It Can Be Referenced By The PL/SQL

Programmer Dynamically At Run Time.

Cursor Types

CURSORS Are Broadly Recognized As Two Types.

Implicit Cursors

Explicit Cursors

Implicit Cursors

It is A CURSOR That is Automatically Declared By Oracle Every Time An SQL

Statement is Executed.

The Programmer Cannot Control OR Process The Information in An Implicit

Cursor.

Explicit Cursor

It is A CURSOR That is Defined By The Programmer Within The Program For

Any Query That Returns More Than One Row of Data.

This Cursor is Declared Within The PL/SQL Block, And Allows Sequential
Process of Each Row of The Returned Data From Database.

Implicit Cursors

The Process Flow of An Implicit Cursor is.

Any Given PL/SQL Block Issues An Implicit Cursor Automatically

Whenever An SQL Statement is Executed, As Long As Explicit CURSOR
Does Not Exist.

A CURSOR is Automatically Associated With Every DML Statement.

All UPDATE And DELETE Statements Have Cursors That Identify The Set
of Rows That Will Be Affected By The Operations.

An INSERT Statement Needs A Place To Receive The Data That is To Be

Inserted in The Database, Which is Handled By The IMPLICIT Cursor.

The Most Recently Opened Cursor Is Called SQL% Cursor, Which is A

Representation For An IMPLICIT Cursor.

During Processing of An IMPLICIT Cursor, Oracle Automatically Performs

The Operations Like OPEN, FETCH, AND CLOSE of The Context Area.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Cursor Attributes

%ISOPEN

%NOTFOUND

%FOUND

%ROWCOUNT

The Attributes Return Information About The Execution Status of The Data
Manipulation Statement Through CURSOR.

%ISOPEN

Returns BOOLEAN Value.

Evaluates To TRUE If The Cursor is Open Else Evaluates To FALSE.

%NOTFOUND

Returns BOOLEAN Value.

Evaluates To TRUE If The Most Recent Fetch Does Not Return A Row Else
Evaluates To FALSE.

%FOUND

Returns BOOLEAN Value.

Evaluates To TRUE If The Most Recent Fetch Returns A Row Else Evaluates
To FALSE.

%ROWCOUNT

Returns A Number.

Evaluates The Total Number of Row Returned So Far By The Cursor.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Deptno Emp.Deptno%TYPE := &DepartmentNumber;
BEGIN
UPDATE Emp
SET Sal = 1500
WHERE Deptno = V_Deptno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(SQL%ROWCOUNT||' Rows were Updated.');
IF SQL%NOTFOUND
THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Data Not Found... Updation Abruptly
Terminated.');
END IF;
END;
/

As The Records Are Retrieved Into Memory At The Time The Cursor Is
Opened, The Data Throughout The Transaction Has A Consistent View.

After A Cursor is Opened, The New OR Changed Data is Not Reflected In The
Cursor Result Set.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
V_Deptno Emp.Deptno%TYPE := &DeptNumber;
BEGIN
DELETE FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = V_Deptno ;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(SQL%ROWCOUNT||' Row(s) Affected.');
IF SQL%NOTFOUND
THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Data Not Found... Deletion Abruptly
Terminated.');
END IF;
END;
/

Explicit Cursor

An EXPLICIT CURSOR is Generated Using A Name With Association of A

SELECT Statement in The DECLARE Section of The PL/SQL Block.

Advantages

Explicit Cursors Provide More Programmatic Control For Programmers.

Explicit Cursors Are More Efficient in Implementation, Hence Easy To Trap

Errors.

Explicit Cursors Are Designed To Work With SELECT Statements That Return
More Than One Record At A Time.

Explicit Cursor Require Additional Steps To Operate Than Implicit Cursors.

There Are Four Steps That Should Be Performed By An Explicit Cursors.

Cursor Declaration.

CURSOR Opening.

CURSOR Fetching.

CURSOR Closing.

The Pseudo Structure

SQL> DECLARE
Cursor Declaration
BEGIN
Opening of Cursor.
Fetching of Cursor.
CLOSE Cursor.
END;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Illustration1
SQL> DECLARE
V_Deptno Dept.Deptno%TYPE := &Deptno;
CURSOR EDeptCursor
IS
SELECT Empno, Ename, Deptno, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = V_Deptno;
BEGIN
OPEN EDeptCursor;
Place Required FETCH Statements;
CLOSE EDeptCursor;
END;
Illustration2
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpDetailsCursor
IS
SELECT Empno, Ename, D.Deptno, Dname
FROM Emp E, Dept D
WHERE E.Deptno = D.Deptno;
V_EmpDept EmpDetailsCursor%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
OPEN EmpDetailsCursor;
Place Required FETCH Statements;
CLOSE EmpDetailsCursor;
END;
Cursor Declaration

The CURSOR is Declared in The Declarative Block And is Provided With A

Name And A SELECT Statement.

Syntax
CURSOR CursorName{parameter List}
[RETURN ReturnType]
IS Query
[FOR UPDATE[OF(ColumnList)]
[NOWAIT]];

The CursorName Can Be Any Valid Identifier.

Parameter List is Optional And Can Be Any Valid Parameter Used For Query
Execution.

The Return Clause is Optional And Specifies The Type of Data To Be

Returned.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Query Can Be Any SELECT Statement.

The FOR UPDATE Clause LOCKS The Records When The Cursor is Opened,
And Maintains The Status of The Cursor As READ ONLY.

If NOWAIT is Specified, The Program Will Exit Immediately On Open If An

Exclusive Lock Cannot Be Obtained.

Illustration1
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor
IS
SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 10;
Illustration2
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor(V_EmpDept NUMBER)
IS
SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = V_EmpDept;
Opening The Cursor

To Process Any Cursor For The Business Logic, It is Mandatory That It

Should Be Opened.

The Opening of Cursor Enables The Creation of Process Global Area(PGA) OR

Context Area.

Cursor Can Be Opened Only in The EXECUTION OR EXCEPTION Section of

The PL/SQL Block.

Any Cursor Can Be Opened Only Once in The PL/SQL Module, Second Time
Opening of The Cursor Raises An Exception.

Only Opened Cursors Can Be Processed.

Syntax
OPEN CursorName[(Parameter Values)];
Illustration1
1. OPEN EmpCursor;
2. OPEN EmpCursor(20);
Things To Note When Cursor is Opened

The Query is Parsed, When Executed.

Any Bind Values Are Evaluated First.

The Rows Are Fetched And Recorded In The Context Area.

The Result Set is Made Ready For Processing.

There Can Be Only One Active Record in A Cursor At A Time.

On The Opening of The Cursor, The Active Record Set is The First One
Returned By The Cursors Query.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

OPEN Cursor
Active Record Set
To First Row
Actual Table
Row1
Row2
Row3
Row4
Row5
Row6
Row7

Evaluate
Binds

CURSOR
SELECT

Context Area
Row1
Row3
Row6

Fetching Records From The Cursor

FETCH Retrievers Records From The CONTEXT AREA Into A Variable Such
That The Variable Can Be Used For Business Logic.

The FETCH Command Operates On The Current Record Only And Processes
Through The Result Set One Record At A Time.

Syntax
FETCH CursorName INTO VariableName(s) OR PL/SQL_RECORD;

The VariableName(s) Can Be One OR More Comma Delimited Variables That

Match The Number And Type of Columns Included in The Result Set.

Illustration
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_EmpRecord;
Closing The Cursor

The Explicit Cursor Should Be Closed, Else It May Lead To Memory Leak.

Until The CURSOR is Closed, The Memory is Not Released.

Syntax
CLOSE CursorName;

CLOSE If Unnecessarily Used Raises An Exception.

Illustration
SQL> DECLARE
V_Ename EMP.ENAME%TYPE;
V_Sal EMP.SAL%TYPE;
CURSOR MyCursor IS
SELECT Ename, Sal
FROM EMP;
BEGIN
OPEN MyCursor;
FETCH MyCursor INTO V_Ename, V_Sal;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Ename||' Salary is $ '||V_Sal);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

FETCH MyCursor INTO V_Ename, V_Sal;

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Ename||' Salary is $ '||V_Sal);
CLOSE MyCursor;
END;
/

Note

It is Always Better To Declare All The Bind Variables Processed By Cursor,

Before The Cursor Declaration.

After All Bind Variables Are Declared Declare The Required Cursor.

To Process The Data Selected By Cursor, It is Necessary To Declare A

%ROWTYPE Upon The Cursor.

Explicit Cursor Attributes

The Cursor Attributes That Are Implemented Upon The Implicit Cursor Can
Be Used As They Exit Along With Some Additional Attributes

%BULK_EXCEPTIONS

The Attribute is Used For ARRAY OR BULK COLLECT Operations Done in OLAP
Applications.

It Provides Information Regarding Exception Encountered During The

Operation.

%BULK_ROWCOUNT

Used On Bulk Collect Operations, The Attribute Provides Information

Regarding The Number of Rows Changed During The Operation.

Cursor Loops

CURSORS Are Generally Very Active With LOOPS, To Provide A Way To

Navigate Through The ACTIVE RECORD SET.

Cursors With Simple Loops

It Can Be Used With The Same Syntax As Discussed In Simple Loops OR

Basic Loops.

Within The Loop Each Record in The Active Set is Retrieved And Used.

Each Loop Iteration Advances The Cursor Pointer By One Record in The
Active Set.

The EXIT WHEN Statement is Mandatory To Be Part of The Loop.

Points To Note

The Loop Can Be Implemented As Pre Tested And Post Tested Loop.

The Loop is Terminated

%NOTFOUND Status.

Before The Attribute Can Be Implemented The Context Area Status Han To
Be Maintained With Minimum One Record of Fetching.

If Proper Attributes Are Not Implemented OR The Attribute Position in The

Loop is Not Proper Then The Loop Will Give Improper Results.

The Loop Terminates When The Condition is TRUE.

With

Proper

Cursor

Attribute

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Operating

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor
IS
SELECT *
FROM Emp;
V_EmpData EmpCursor%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
OPEN EmpCursor;
LOOP
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_EmpData;
EXIT WHEN EmpCursor%NOTFOUND;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_EmpData.Ename);
END LOOP;
CLOSE EmpCursor;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor IS
SELECT * FROM Emp;
V_EmpData EmpCursor%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
OPEN EmpCursor;
LOOP
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_EmpData;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Record Number :
'||EmpCursor%ROWCOUNT||' '||V_EmpData.Ename);
EXIT WHEN EmpCursor%NOTFOUND;
END LOOP;
CLOSE EmpCursor;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor IS
SELECT * FROM Emp;
V_EmpData EmpCursor%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
OPEN EmpCursor;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Details of Employees in Your
Organization are as Follows');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('--------------------------------------------------------------');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('
Salary '||' Annual Salary
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('
'||' --------------- ');

Name

'||' Designation

'||'

Basic

');
------

'||' -------------

'||'

------------

LOOP
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_EmpData;

EXIT WHEN EmpCursor%NOTFOUND;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD(V_EmpData.Ename,
12)||RPAD(V_EmpData.Job, 12)||LPAD(V_EmpData.Sal,
10)||LPAD(V_EmpData.Sal * 12, 20));
END LOOP;
CLOSE EmpCursor;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_RowCount NUMBER(4);
CURSOR EmpCursor IS
SELECT *
FROM Emp;
V_EmpData EmpCursor%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
OPEN EmpCursor;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('Employees Information', 80));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('-', 80,'-'));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('Ename', 12)||RPAD('Job',
12)||RPAD('Sal', 12)||RPAD('Comm', 10));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('-', 80,'-'));
LOOP
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_EmpData;
EXIT WHEN EmpCursor%NOTFOUND;
V_RoWCount := EmpCursor%ROWCOUNT;
IF V_EmpData.Job = 'SALESMAN'
THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD(V_EmpData.Ename,
12)||RPAD(V_EmpData.Job, 12)||RPAD(V_EmpData.Sal,
12)||V_EmpData.Comm||' Eligible For Commission.');
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD(V_EmpData.Ename,
12)||RPAD(V_EmpData.Job, 12)||RPAD(V_EmpData.Sal,
12)||'Sorry! Not Eligible For Commission.');
END IF;
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_RowCount||' Rows Processed So Far...');
CLOSE EmpCursor;
END;
/

Cursors With While Loops

It Can Be Used With The Same Syntax As Discussed In While Loops.

Within The Loop Each Record in The Active Set is Retrieved And Used.

Each Loop Iteration Advances The Cursor Pointer By One Record in The
Active Set.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Loop Depends on Minimum One TRUE State To Commence And Minimum
One Condition To Terminate.

The Loop Needs One FETCH Before The Loop To Make it To Commence, And
One FETCH Inside The Loop To Keep it in Processing State.

SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor IS
SELECT * FROM Emp;
V_EmpData EmpCursor%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
OPEN EmpCursor;
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_EmpData;
WHILE EmpCursor%FOUND
LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_EmpData.Ename);
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_EmpData;
END LOOP;
CLOSE EmpCursor;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor IS
SELECT * FROM Emp;
V_EmpData EmpCursor%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
OPEN EmpCursor;
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_EmpData;
WHILE EmpCursor%FOUND
LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Record Number :
'||EmpCursor%ROWCOUNT||' '||V_EmpData.Ename);
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_EmpData;
END LOOP;
CLOSE EmpCursor;
END;
/

Cursors With For Loops

It Can Be Used With The Same Syntax As Discussed In For Loops.

Within The Loop Each Record in The Active Set is Retrieved And Used.

Each Loop Iteration Advances The Cursor Pointer By One Record in The
Active Set.

The Loop Works On The Range Oriented Operational Logic.

The Loop is Very Useful When Traveling The Entire Data in The Database
Table.

It is More Dynamic in Operation Than The Simple Loop And Basic Loop.

Most Applications Are Implemented in Real Time Using The FOR LOOP
Concept.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

While Using A FOR LOOP, The Cursor Does Not Require Explicit OPEN,
FETCH, And CLOSE.

The Processing of The Cursor is Implicitly Handled By The PL/SQL.

The INDEX Variable Within The FOR LOOP Need Not Be Explicitly Declared.

The Cursor For Loops Make The Program More Compact And Simple in
Representation.

If Proper Care is Not Taken in Implementing The Cursor Attributes, The Loop
Can Be Confusional.

The Loop Range is Associated With Proper Cursor Attributes, To Keep The
Loop in Finite State.

SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor IS
SELECT * FROM Emp;
V_EmpData EmpCursor%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
FOR V_EmpData IN EmpCursor
LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_EmpData.Ename);
END LOOP;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor IS
SELECT * FROM Emp;
BEGIN
FOR EmpCursorIndex IN EmpCursor
LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Record Number :
'||EmpCursor%ROWCOUNT||' '||EmpCursorIndex.Ename);
END LOOP;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor IS
SELECT * FROM Emp
ORDER BY Sal DESC;
BEGIN
FOR V_EmpData IN EmpCursor
LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Rank No : '||EmpCursor%ROWCOUNT||'
'||V_EmpData.Ename||' With Salary of '||V_EmpData.Sal);
EXIT WHEN EmpCursor%ROWCOUNT = 5;
END LOOP;
END;
/

Cursor For Loops Using Sub Queries

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

If A Sub Query is Instituted Into A PL/SQL Block Then A CURSOR

DECLARATION is Not Necessary.

In This Case The Sub Query is Embedded Into The FOR LOOP.

In This Case The Performance of The Cursor Improves.

The Cursor is Totally Implemented Implicitly By The FOR Loop.

This Methodology Improves The Quality of The Cursor Management, And

Makes The Process Compact.

But This Methodology Can Be Some What Complicated If Not Followed

Properly.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Dname Dept.Dname%TYPE;
V_Loc Dept.Loc%TYPE;
BEGIN
FOR EmpRecord IN (SELECT Ename, Deptno
FROM Emp
ORDER BY Deptno
)
LOOP
SELECT
Dname,
Loc
INTO
V_Dname,
V_Loc
FROM Dept
WHERE Deptno = EmpRecord.Deptno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(EmpRecord.Ename||
||EmpRecord.Deptno|| ||V_Dname|| ||V_Loc);
END LOOP;
END;
SQL> BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Departments Available in Our
Organization Are...');
FOR DeptRecord IN (SELECT *
FROM Dept
)
LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Department '||DeptRecord.Deptno||'
Named '||DeptRecord.Dname||' Located At '||DeptRecord.Loc);
END LOOP;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_EmpCount

NUMBER(2);

V_SumInvest

NUMBER(7);

V_AvgInvest

NUMBER(7, 2);

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Departments Available in Our
Organization Are...');
FOR DeptRecord IN (SELECT *
FROM Dept
)
LOOP
SELECT
COUNT(*),
SUM(Sal),
AVG(Sal)
INTO
V_EmpCount,
V_SumInvest,
V_AvgInvest
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = DeptRecord.Deptno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Department '||DeptRecord.Deptno||' Named
'||DeptRecord.Dname||' Located At '||DeptRecord.Loc||' With
'||V_EmpCount||' Employees '||' Invested With '||NVL(V_SumInvest,
0)||' Averaging '||NVL(V_AvgInvest, 0));
END LOOP;
END;
/

Applying Cursor Attribute Into Practice

FETCH Rows Only When The CURSOR is OPEN.

Use The %ISOPEN Cursor Attribute Before Performing A FETCH To Test

Whether The Cursor is OPEN OR not.

Use The %ROWCOUNT Cursor Attribute To Retrieve An Exact Number of

Rows.

Use The %NOTFOUND Cursor Attribute To Determine When To EXIT The

Loop.

The %FOUND Cursor Attribute Can Be Used in Situations Where We Can

Take A Decision For Business Logic Implementation, Depending on The
Identified Record.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno Emp.Empno%TYPe;
V_Ename Emp.Ename%TYPE;
V_Sal Emp.Sal%TYPE;
V_Desig Emp.Job%TYPE;
CURSOR EmpCursor
IS
SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp;
BEGIN
IF NOT EmpCursor%ISOPEN THEN
OPEN EmpCursor;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

END IF;
LOOP
FETCH EmpCursor
INTO V_Empno, V_Ename, V_Sal, V_Desig;
EXIT WHEN
EmpCursor%ROWCOUNT > 10 OR EmpCursor%NOTFOUND;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Row Number : '||EmpCursor%ROWCOUNT||'
'||RPAD(V_Empno, 12)||RPAD(V_Ename, 12)||RPAD(V_Desig,
12)||LPAD(V_Sal, 10));
END LOOP;
CLOSE EmpCursor;
END;
/

Applying Transactions Based On Data Fetched Through Cursor

Cursors In Real Time Practice Are Used To Handle Business Logic More
Effectively.

In Practicality, The Data Fetched By A Cursor Can Be Used For Transactional

Purpose Many Times.

Cursors Can Help in Very Complicated Business Validations Involving The

Cross Table Manipulations.

The Data Fetched From One Table Can Be Used For Validation Purpose,
Before Transacting On Another Table.

SQL> CREATE TABLE BigHeads

(
Ename VARCHAR(20),
Salary NUMBER(6)
);
SQL> DECLARE
V_Number NUMBER(2) := &GiveNumber;
V_Ename Emp.Ename%TYPE;
V_Sal Emp.Sal%TYPE;
CURSOR EmpCursor
IS
SELECT Ename, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal IS NOT NULL
ORDER BY Sal DESC;
BEGIN
DELETE BigHeads;
COMMIT;
OPEN EmpCursor;
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_Ename, V_Sal;
WHILE EmpCursor%ROWCOUNT <= V_Number AND
EmpCursor%FOUND
LOOP
INSERT INTO BigHeads(Ename, Salary)
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

VALUES(V_Ename, V_Sal);
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_Ename, V_Sal;
END LOOP;
CLOSE EmpCursor;
COMMIT;
END;
/
SQL> CREATE TABLE BigHeads1
(
Ename VARCHAR(20),
Salary NUMBER(6)
);
SQL> DECLARE
V_Number NUMBER(2) := &GiveNumber;
V_Ename Emp.Ename%TYPE;
V_CurrentSal Emp.Sal%TYPE;
V_LastSal Emp.Sal%TYPE;
V_Job Emp.Job%TYPE;
CURSOR EmpCursor
IS
SELECT Ename, Sal, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Sal IS NOT NULL
ORDER BY Sal DESC;
BEGIN
DELETE BigHeads1;
COMMIT;
OPEN EmpCursor;
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_Ename, V_CurrentSal, V_Job;
WHILE EmpCursor%ROWCOUNT <= V_Number AND
EmpCursor%FOUND
LOOP
INSERT INTO
BigHeads1(Ename, Salary)
VALUES(V_Ename, V_CurrentSal);
V_LastSal := V_CurrentSal;
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_Ename, V_CurrentSal, V_Job;
IF V_LastSal = V_CurrentSal THEN
V_Number := V_Number + 1;
END IF;
END LOOP;
CLOSE EmpCursor;
COMMIT;
END;
/
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Cursors With Parameters

A Cursor Can Be Declared With Parameters.

The Advantages Are

Enables Generation of Specific Result Sets As Required.

Marks The Cursor Reusable.

Cursor Parameters Can Be Assigned With Default Values.

The Mode of Cursor Parameters Can Be Only IN Mode.

If A Cursor is Declared As Taking Parameters Then It Must Be Called With

Values For Those Parameters.

Syntax
CURSOR CursorName(ParameterName Datatype,.)
IS
SELECT Statement;
Illustration
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor(
PDeptno NUMBER,
PDesig VARCHAR2
)
IS
SELECT Empno, Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = PDeptno AND Job = PDesig;
Methods of Opening A Parametric Cursor:
1. Open Empcursor(20, CLERK);
2. DECLARE
V_EmpJob Emp.Job%TYPE := &GiveJob;
BEGIN
OPEN(10, V_EmpJob);
3. DECLARE
V_EmpJob Emp.Job%TYPE := &GiveJob;
V_EmpDept Emp.DeptNo%TYPE := &GD;
BEGIN
OPEN(V_EmpDept, V_EmpJob);
4. DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor(
PDeptno NUMBER,
PDesig VARCHAR2
)
IS
SELECT Empno, Job
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = PDeptno AND Job = PDesig;
BEGIN
FOR EmpRecord IN
EmpCursor(10, ANALYST)
LOOP
Points To Note

Parameters Allow Values To Be Passed To A Cursor When It is Opened And

To Be Used in The Query When it Executes.

A Parametric Cursor Can Be Opened And Closed Explicitly Several Times in A

PL/SQL Block.

A Parametric Cursor Returns A Different Active Set on Each Occasion.

Each FORMAL PARAMETER in The Cursor Declaration

Corresponding ACTUAL PARAMETER in The OPEN Statement.

When A Cursor is Opened We Pass Values To Each Parameter Positionally.

PARAMETER Notation Does Not Offer Greater Functionality But Simply

Allows Us To Specify Input Values Easily And Clearly.

The Concept
Repeatedly.

Useful

When

The

Same

Cursor

Must

Have

Referenced

Working With Cursor Communication

The Values That Are Fetched By One Cursor Can Be Passed As Parameters To
The Other Cursor And Make The Programming More Dynamic.

In This Case The Data Fetched By The Outer Cursor Are Used As Parameters
By The Inner Cursor For Business Validation OR Transaction.

SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR DeptCursor
IS
SELECT Deptno, Dname
FROM Dept
ORDER BY Deptno;
CURSOR EmpCursor(V_Deptno Emp.Deptno%TYPE)
IS
SELECT Ename, Job, HireDate, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = V_Deptno;
V_CurrDeptno Dept.Deptno%TYPE;
V_CurrDname Dept.Dname%TYPE;
V_Ename Emp.Ename%TYPE;
V_Job Emp.Job%TYPE;
V_Mgr Emp.MGR%TYPE;
V_HireDate Emp.HireDate%TYPE;
V_Sal Emp.Sal%TYPE;
BEGIN
OPEN DeptCursor;
LOOP
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

FETCH DeptCursor INTO V_CurrDeptno, V_CurrDname;

EXIT WHEN DeptCursor%NOTFOUND;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Department Number : ' ||
V_CurrDeptno||'
Department Name : ' || V_CurrDname);
IF EmpCursor%ISOPEN THEN
CLOSE EmpCursor;
END IF;
OPEN EmpCursor(V_CurrDeptno);
LOOP
FETCH EmpCursor INTO V_Ename, V_Job, V_HireDate,
V_Sal;
IF EmpCursor%FOUND THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Ename||'
'||V_Job||' '||' '||V_HireDate||' '||V_Sal);
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('****End of
Employees, in Department :
'||V_CurrDeptno||'.');
END IF;
EXIT WHEN EmpCursor%NOTFOUND;
END LOOP;
IF EmpCursor%ISOPEN THEN
CLOSE EmpCursor;
END IF;
END LOOP;
IF EmpCursor%ISOPEN THEN
CLOSE EmpCursor;
END IF;
CLOSE DeptCursor;
END;
SQL> DECLARE
SUMAmount NUMBER := 0;
V_DeptNo Emp.Deptno%TYPE;
CURSOR MyCursor (PDeptno NUMBER) IS
SELECT Sal FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = PDeptno;
V_MyCursor MyCursor%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
BEGIN
SUMAmount := 0;
V_DeptNo := 10;
OPEN MyCursor(V_Deptno);
LOOP
FETCH MyCursor INTO V_MyCursor;
EXIT WHEN MyCursor%NOTFOUND;
SUMAmount := SUMAmount + V_MyCursor.Sal;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE ('The Investment on Department
'||V_Deptno||' is '||TO_CHAR(SUMAmount));
CLOSE MyCursor;
END;
BEGIN
SUMAmount := 0;
V_DeptNo := 20;
OPEN MyCursor(V_Deptno);
LOOP
FETCH MyCursor INTO V_MyCursor;
EXIT WHEN MyCursor%NOTFOUND;
SUMAmount := SUMAmount + V_MyCursor.Sal;
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE ('The Investment on Department
'||V_Deptno||' is '||TO_CHAR(SUMAmount));
CLOSE MyCursor;
END;
BEGIN
SUMAmount := 0;
V_DeptNo := 30;
OPEN MyCursor(V_Deptno);
LOOP
FETCH MyCursor INTO V_MyCursor;
EXIT WHEN MyCursor%NOTFOUND;
SUMAmount := SUMAmount + V_MyCursor.Sal;
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE ('The Investment on Department
'||V_Deptno||' is '||TO_CHAR(SUMAmount));
CLOSE MyCursor;
END;
END;
/

Cursors With For Update Clause

Many Times While Working in Real Time We Have To LOCK Rows During
Data UPDATION And Data DELETIONS.

The FOR UPDATE Clause in The Cursor Query is Used To LOCK The Affected
Rows While The Cursor is Opened.

When FOR UPDATE Clause is Used We Need Not Use COMMIT As Oracle
Server Releases LOCKS At The End of Each Transaction Automatically.

The FOR UPDATE Cursors Are Compulsory While Operating With Real Time
Data Updations And Deletions in Client Server Architecture.

Syntax
CURSOR CursorName IS
SELECT
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

FROM
FOR UPDATE [OF ColumnReference] [NOWAIT];

The FOR UPDATE Clause is The Last Clause in The SELECT Statement.

If The ORACLE SERVER Cannot Acquire The LOCKS on The Rows Then It
Needs To Wait Indefinitely IF NOWAIT Clause is Not Used.

Illustration
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR EmpCursor IS
SELECT EmpNo, EName, Sal FROM Emp
WHERE DeptNo = 30
FOR UPDATE OF Sal NOWAIT;
The WHERE CURRENT OF Clause:

The WHERE CURRENT OF Clause is Used When Referencing The CURRENT

ROW From An EXPLICIT FOR UPDATE CURSOR.

The Clause Allows To Apply UPDATES And DELETES To The Row Currently
Being Addressed By The Cursor, Without The Need To Explicitly Reference
ROWID From The SQL Architecture.

We Must Include The FOR UPDATE Clause in The Cursor Query, Such That
The Rows Are LOCKED Upon Opening The Cursor.

Syntax
{UPDATE OR DELETE Statement}
WHERE CURRENT OF CursorName;

We Can Update Rows Based On Criteria From A FOR UPDATE CURSOR.

We Can Write DELETE OR UPDATE Statement To Contain The WHERE

CURRENT OF CursorName To Refer To The Latest Row Processed By The
FETCH Statement of The FOR UPDATE Cursor.

WHERE CURRENT OF When Used, The Cursor Must Contain OR Should Be of

FOR UPDATE CLAUSE Cursor.

SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR SalCursor
IS
SELECT Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30
FOR UPDATE OF Sal NOWAIT;
BEGIN
FOR EmpRec IN SalCursor
LOOP
UPDATE Emp
SET
Sal = Sal + (EmpRec.Sal * 1.10)
WHERE CURRENT OF SalCursor;
END LOOP;
COMMIT;
END;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

/
SQL> DECLARE
V_FromSal Emp.Sal%TYPE;
V_ToSal Emp.Sal%TYPE;
V_CurrentRow ROWID;
CURSOR SalCursor
IS
SELECT ROWID, Ename, Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = 30
FOR UPDATE OF Sal NOWAIT;
V_EmpRec SalCursor%ROWTYPE;
BEGIN
OPEN SalCursor;
LOOP
FETCH SalCursor INTO V_EmpRec;
EXIT WHEN SalCursor%NOTFOUND;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Salary for Update is '||V_EmpRec.Sal||'
of '||V_EmpRec.Ename||'.');
V_FromSal := V_EmpRec.Sal;
V_CurrentRow := V_EmpRec.ROWID;
UPDATE Emp
SET
Sal = Sal + (V_EmpRec.Sal * 1.10)
WHERE CURRENT OF SalCursor;
SELECT Sal INTO V_ToSal
FROM Emp WHERE ROWID = V_CurrentRow;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Updated Salary Value is from
'||V_FromSal||' To '||V_ToSal ||' Confirm The Update Before it is
Committed.');
END LOOP;
END;
/
SQL> CREATE TABLE MyEmp
AS
SELECT * FROM Emp;
SQL> DECLARE
CURSOR SalCursor
IS
SELECT ROWID, Sal
FROM MyEmp
WHERE Deptno = 30
FOR UPDATE OF Sal NOWAIT;
BEGIN
FOR EmpRec IN SalCursor
LOOP
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Present ROWID For Updation is :

'||EmpRec.ROWID);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Now The Row Will Be Locked...For Data
Deletion.');
DELETE MyEmp
WHERE CURRENT OF SalCursor;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Data Deletion is Successful Hence Releasing
The ROW Lock.');
END LOOP;
END;
/
SQL> CREATE TABLE EmpSalGraph
AS
SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, Comm, Ename SalGraph
FROM Emp
WHERE 1 = 2
/
SQL> ALTER TABLE EmpSalGraph
MODIFY SalGraph VARCHAR2(70)
/
SQL> INSERT INTO
EmpSalGraph(Empno, Ename, Sal, Comm)
SELECT Empno, Ename, Sal, Comm FROM Emp
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Asterisk EmpSalGraph.SalGraph%TYPE := NULL;
CURSOR EmpCursor
IS
SELECT NVL(ROUND(Sal/100),0) Sal
FROM EmpSalGraph
FOR UPDATE;
BEGIN
FOR EmpSalGraphRec IN EmpCursor
LOOP
FOR MyIndex IN 1..EmpSalGraphRec.Sal
LOOP
V_Asterisk := V_Asterisk||'*';
END LOOP;
UPDATE EmpSalGraph
SET
SalGraph = V_Asterisk
WHERE CURRENT OF EmpCursor;
V_Asterisk := NULL;
END LOOP;
COMMIT;
END;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Cursors With Sub Queries

A CURSOR Can Be Constructed Upon The Result Provided Through A

SUBQUERY.

The Sub Query Can Be An Ordinary One OR A Correlated Sub Query.

The Sub Query When Evaluated Can Provide A Value On A Set of Values To
The Statement.

SQL> DECLARE
V_Deptno Dept.Deptno%TYPE;
V_Dname Dept.DnaME%TYPE;
V_Staff NUMBER(4);
CURSOR StaffCountCursor IS
SELECT T1.Deptno, T1.Dname, T2.Staff
FROM Dept T1, (SELECT Deptno, COUNT(*) Staff
FROM Emp
GROUP BY Deptno) T2
WHERE T1.Deptno = T2.Deptno AND T2.Staff >= 5;
BEGIN
OPEN StaffCountCursor;
LOOP
FETCH StaffCountCursor
INTO V_Deptno, V_Dname, V_Staff;
EXIT WHEN StaffCountCursor%NOTFOUND;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Deptno||' '||V_Dname||' '||V_Staff);
END LOOP;
CLOSE StaffCountCursor;
END;
/

Cursor Variables

A Cursor Variable is A Data Structure That Points To A Cursor Object, Which

in Turn Points To The Cursor's Result Set.

We Can Use Cursor Variables To More Easily Retrieve Rows in A Result Set
From Client And Server Programs.

We Can Also Use Cursor Variables To Hide Minor Variations in Queries.

To Use Cursor Variables, We Must First Create A Ref_Cursor Type, Then

Declare A Cursor Variable Based on That Type.

Syntax 1 : Strong Cursor

TYPE Ref_Cursor_Name
IS REF CURSOR [RETURN Record_Type];

A REF CURSOR With A RETURN Clause Define A "Strong" REF CURSOR.

Cursor Variables on A Strong REF CURSOR Can Associate With Queries With
Result Sets That Match The Number And Data Type of The Record Structure.

Syntax 2 : Weak Cursor

TYPE Ref_Cursor_Name
IS REF CURSOR;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

If We Do Not Include A RETURN Clause in The Cursor, Then it is A Weak REF

CURSOR.

Cursor Variables Declared From Weak REF Cursors Can Be Associated With
Any Query At Runtime.

Example 1
TYPE EmpCursorType
IS REF CURSOR
RETURN Emp%ROWTYPE;

Create The Variable Based on The REF CURSOR.

Employee_Cur
EmpCursorType;
Example 2
TYPE Any_CursorType
IS REF CURSOR;

This Cursor is Called As a Generic Cursor Variable of Any_CursorType.

Syntax To OPEN A Cursor Variable

OPEN Cursor_Name
FOR
Select_Statement;

FETCH And CLOSE of a Cursor Variable Uses The Same Syntax As For Explicit
Cursors.

Restrictions on Cursor Variables

Cursor Variables Cannot Be Declared in A Package Since They Do Not Have A

Persistent State.

We Cannot Use The FOR UPDATE Clause With Cursor Variables.

We Cannot Assign NULLS To A Cursor Variable Nor Use Comparison

Operators To Test For Equality, Inequality, OR Nullity.

Neither Database Columns Nor Collections Can Store Cursor Variables.

We Cannot Use RPCS To Pass Cursor Variables From One Server To Another.

Cursor Variables Cannot Be Used With The Dynamic SQL Built-in Package
DBMS_SQL.

SQL> DECLARE
TYPE EmpRefCurso
IS REF CURSOR;
V_EmpRefCursor EmpRefCursor;
V_Ename Emp.Ename%TYPE;
BEGIN
OPEN V_EmpRefCursor
FOR
SELECT Ename FROM Emp;
LOOP
FETCH V_EmpRefCursor INTO V_Ename;
EXIT WHEN V_EmpRefCursor%NOTFOUND;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Number
'||TO_CHAR(V_EmpRefCursor%ROWCOUNT, '09')||' : '||V_Ename);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

END LOOP;
CLOSE V_EmpRefCursor;
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_RowCount NUMBER(4);
TYPE GenericCursor
IS REF CURSOR;
V_GenericCursor GenericCursor;
TYPE TablesRecordType IS RECORD
(
EmpRecord Emp%ROWTYPE
);
V_EmpRecordType TablesRecordType;
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.ENABLE(1000000);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD(LPAD('Employees Information', 49,
'*'), 80, '*'));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('-', 80,'-'));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('EmpNo', 8)|| RPAD('Ename',
12)||RPAD('Job', 12)||RPAD('Deptno', 8)||RPAD('Mgr',
10)||RPAD('Hiredate', 12)||RPAD('Sal', 12)||RPAD('Comm', 10));
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD('-', 80,'-'));
FOR LoopIndex IN (
SELECT Deptno, Dname
FROM Dept
)
LOOP
OPEN V_GenericCursor
FOR
SELECT *
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = LoopIndex.Deptno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('----------------------------------------------------------------------------');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Now Printing The Employees of
Department : '||LoopIndex.Dname);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('----------------------------------------------------------------------------');
V_RoWCount := 0;
LOOP
FETCH V_GenericCursor
INTO V_EmpRecordType.EmpRecord;
EXIT WHEN V_GenericCursor%NOTFOUND;
V_RoWCount := V_GenericCursor%ROWCOUNT;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(RPAD(V_EmpRecordType.EmpRec
ord.Empno, 8)
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

||RPAD(V_EmpRecordType.EmpRecord.Ename,
12)||RPAD(V_EmpRecordType.EmpRecord.Job,
12)||RPAD(V_EmpRecordType.EmpRecord.Deptno,
8)||NVL(TO_CHAR(RPAD(V_EmpRecordType.EmpRecord.MG
R, 10)),'No
Manager')||RPAD(V_EmpRecordType.EmpRecord.Hiredate,
12)||RPAD(V_EmpRecordType.EmpRecord.Sal,
12)||NVL(TO_CHAR(RPAD(V_EmpRecordType.EmpRecord.C
omm, 12)),'-NA-'));
END LOOP;
CLOSE V_GenericCursor;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_RowCount||' Rows Processed So Far...');
END LOOP;
END;

BULK COLLECT For Multiple Row Query

The BULK COLLECT Statement Retrieves Multiple Rows of Data Through

Either An Implicit OR An Explicit Query With A Single Round Trip To And
From The Database.

BULK COLLECT Reduces The Number of I/O Cycles Between The PL/SQL And
SQL Engines And Reduces The Overhead of Retrieving Data.

SQL> DECLARE
TYPE EmpTableType
IS TABLE OF
Emp%ROWTYPE;
V_EmpTableType EmpTableType;
BEGIN
SELECT *
BULK COLLECT INTO V_EmpTableType
FROM Emp;
FOR IndexVariable IN V_EmpTableType.FIRST .. V_EmpTableType.LAST
LOOP
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_EmpTableType(IndexVariable).Ename || '
is Fixed With A Salary of ' || V_EmpTableType(IndexVariable).Sal);
END LOOP;
END;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Exception Handling In PL/SQL

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Exception is An IDENTIFIER in PL/SQL, Raised During The Execution of A

PL/SQL Block.

Once An EXCEPTION Arises It Terminates The Main Body of Actions

Performed By The PL/SQL Block.

A PL/SQL Block Immediately Terminates When PL/SQL Raises An Exception,

By Specifying An EXCEPTION HANDLER We Can Avoid This Abrupt
Termination And Perform Final Action For The Business Logic.

Methods To Raise An Exception

An ORACLE ERROR OCCURS And The Associated EXCEPTION is Raised

Automatically OR Implicitly By Oracle.

RAISE The EXCEPTION Explicitly By Issuing The RAISE Statement Within

The Execution Block of PL/SQL.

The RAISED EXCEPTION Can Be Either USER DEFINED OR PREDEFINED.

Exception Handling

Exception Handling Can Happen in Two Ways

Exception Trapping

Exception Propagation

Exception Trapping

If An Exception is Raised in The EXECUTABLE Section of The PL/SQL Block

Then Process That EXCEPTION To The Corresponding EXCEPTION HANDLER
in The EXCEPTION Section of The Same Block.

If The EXCEPTION is Successfully Handled Then The EXCEPTION Does Not

Propagate To The Enclosing Block of Programming Environment.

If EXCEPTION is Trapped And Handled Successfully Then The PL/SQL Block

Terminates Successfully.

Exception Propagation

If An EXCEPTION is Raised in The EXECUTABLE SECTION of The PL/SQL

Block And There is No Corresponding EXCEPTION HANDLER Then The
PL/SQL Block Terminates With Failure And The EXCEPTION is PROPAGATED
To The
Calling Environment.

Exception Trapping
SQL> DECLARE
BEGIN
Exception Raised;
EXCEPTION
Exception Trapped;
END;
Exception Propagation
SQL> DECLARE
BEGIN
Exception Raised;
EXCEPTION
Exception Not Trapped
END;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Exception Propagating To The Enclosing Blocks

Types of Exceptions

As Per PL/SQL Exceptions Are Considered To Be of Three Types

Pre Defined Oracle Server Errors.

Non Pre Defined Oracle Server Errors.

User Defined Errors

The PL/SQL Programmer Can Program For EXCEPTIONS To Avoid Disruption

At Runtime.

Specifications of Exceptions
1. Exception Type

Predefined Oracle Server Errors.

Description

These Are One of Appropriately 20 Errors That Occur Most Often in

PL/SQL Code.

Handling Tip:

Do Not Declare The Exception And Allow The Oracle Server To

Then Implicitly.

RAISE

But The Programmer Should Handle it Using The Proper EXCEPTION

Handle.

2. Exception Type

Non-Predefined Oracle Server Errors.

Description

It is Any Other Standard Oracle Server Error.

Handling Tip

Declare The EXCEPTION Identifier With in The Declarative Section And

Allow The Oracle Server To RAISE Them Implicitly.

But The Programmer Should Handle it Using The

EXCEPTION Handle Declared in The Declarative Section.

User

Defined

3. Exception Type

User Defined Errors.

Description

It is Any Condition That The Developer Determines, Which is Abnormal

According To The Business Rule.

Handling Tip

Declare EXCEPTION Identifier Within The Declarative Section And RAISE

The EXCEPTION Explicitly Using The RAISE Statement.

Trapping Exceptions

Including A Corresponding Exceptional Handling Routine Within The

EXCEPTION Handling Section of The PL/SQL Block Can Trap Any Errors
Raised While Running A PL/SQL Block.

Each Exception Handler Consists of A WHEN Clause Which Specifies An

EXCEPTION That Has To Be Handled.

Each EXCEPTION is Followed By A Sequence of Statements To Be Executed

When That Exception is Raised.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Syntax
EXCEPTION
WHEN Exception1[OR Exception2] THEN
Statement1;
Statement2;
WHEN OTHERS THEN
Statement1;
Statement2;
END;

OTHERS is An Optional EXCEPTION Handling Clause That Traps Unspecified

Exceptions.

WHEN OTHERS Exception Handler

The EXCEPTION Handling Section Taps Only Those Exceptions That Are
Specified By The Programmer Using Proper Exception Handler.

Any Other Exceptions Are Propagated Which Are Not Trapped, Unless The
OTHERS EXCEPTION Handle is Used.

The OTHERS Should Be The Last Exception Handle in The Definition.

Trapping Exceptions Guidelines

Begin The EXCEPTION Handling Section of The Block With The Keywords
EXCEPTION.

Define Several EXCEPTION HANDLERS, Each With its Own Set of Action For
The Block.

When An EXCEPTION Occurs PL/SQL Processes Only One Handle Before

Leaving The Block.

Place The OTHERS Clause After All Other Exception Handling Clauses.

We Can Have At Most One OTHERS Clause Only.

Exceptions Cannot Appear in Argument Statement OR SQL Statements.

Handling Predefined Exceptions

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

EXCEPTION
WHEN VALUE_ERROR OR INVALID_NUMBER THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('There is some Error in the Data
inputs (OR) Data outputs, Please Check, Debug the
Source.');
END;
EXCEPTION
WHEN NO_DATA_FOUND THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Given Information is Missing in the
Database, Check for Proper Values.');
END;
/

Trapping Non-Predefined Oracle Server Errors

The Non-Predefined Oracle Server Error is Trapped By Declaring it First OR

By Using The OTHERS Exception Handle.

The Declared EXCEPTION is RAISED Implicitly By The Oracle Server.

THE PL/SQL PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT Can Be Used For Associating

EXCEPTION Name With An Oracle Error Number.

The PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT Tells The PL/SQL Engine Completely To

Associate An EXCEPTION Name With An Oracle Error Number.

The PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT Allows Programmer To Refer To Any Internal

EXCEPTION By The Name And Associate That To Specific Handles.

PRAGMA is Also Called As PSEUDO INSTRUCTION, And is A Key Word That

Signifies, That The Statement is A Compiler Directive.

The Statement is Not Processed When That PL/SQL Block is Executed Rather
The PRAGMA Directs The PL/SQL Compiler To Interpret All Occurrences of
The EXCEPTION Name Within The Block As The Associated Oracle Server
Error Number.
DECLARE

EXCEPTION Name

Associate

Reference

Declarative Section

EXCEPTION Handling Section

Code The PRAGMA

EXCEPTION

Handle The RAISED EXCEPTION

Syntax

Declaring The Name For The EXCEPTION With in The Declarative Section.

ExceptionIdentifier EXCEPTION;

Associate The Declared EXCEPTION With PRAGMA.

PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT(ExceptionIdentifier, ErrorNumber);

Reference The Declared EXCEPTION Within The Corresponding EXCEPTION

Handle At Runtime.

Illustration
SQL> DECLARE
E_EmpRemaining EXCEPTION;
PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT(E_EmpRemaining, -2292);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
E_EmpRemaining EXCEPTION;
PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT(E_EmpRemaining, -2292);
V_Deptno Emp.Deptno%TYPE := &GiveDeptno;
BEGIN
DELETE FROM Dept
WHERE Deptno = V_Deptno;
IF SQL%NOTFOUND THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Given Information is Missing in the
Database, Check for Proper Values.');
END IF;
ROLLBACK;
EXCEPTION
WHEN E_EmpRemaining THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Unable to Delete the Department Number
'||V_Deptno||' as the Employees are Existing. Validate Your Relations
and then Try Once Again.');
WHEN NO_DATA_FOUND THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Given Information is Missing in the
Database, Check for Proper Values.');
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
E_EmpExists EXCEPTION;
V_Count NUMBER(2);
V_SalSum NUMBER(6);
PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT(E_EmpExists, -2292);
V_Empno Emp.Empno%TYPE := &GiveEmpno;
BEGIN
DELETE FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
IF SQL%NOTFOUND THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Given Employee Number '||V_Empno||'
is Missing in the Database, Check for Proper Values.');
ROLLBACK;
ELSE
COMMIT;
END IF;
EXCEPTION
WHEN E_EmpExists THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Unable to Delete the Employee Details
'||V_Empno||' as the Employees are Existing. Validate Your Relations
and then Try Once Again.');
WHEN NO_DATA_FOUND THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Given Information is Missing in the
Database, Check for Proper Values.');
END;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
E_NotNULLViolation EXCEPTION;
PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT(E_NotNULLViolation, -1400);
BEGIN
INSERT INTO Emp(Empno, Ename, Job, Sal, Comm, Deptno)
VALUES(&Empno, 'SATISH', 'ANALYST', 25000, NULL, &Deptno);
COMMIT;
EXCEPTION
WHEN E_NotNULLViolation THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('A Field which
attended, Please Check Properly...');

Cannot

NULL,

not

END;
/
SQL> ALTER TABLE Emp
ADD CONSTRAINT EmpEnameCHK CHECK(Ename = UPPER(Ename))
ADD CONSTRAINT EmpJobCHK CHECK(Job = UPPER(Job))
/
SQL> DECLARE
E_NotNULLViolation EXCEPTION;
PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT(E_NotNULLViolation, -1400);
E_CheckViolation EXCEPTION;
PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT(E_CheckViolation, -2290);
BEGIN
INSERT INTO Emp(Empno, Ename, Job, Sal, Comm, Deptno)
VALUES(&Empno, '&Ename', '&Job', 25000, NULL, &Deptno);
COMMIT;
EXCEPTION
WHEN E_CheckViolation THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('A Field with Check Constraint is not Attended
Properly, Please Check Properly.');
WHEN E_NotNULLViolation THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('A Field
attended, Please Check Properly.');

which

Cannot

NULL,

not

END;
/

Functions For Trapping EXCEPTIONS

When An EXCEPTION Occurs We Can Identify The Associated ERROR CODE

OR ERROR MESSAGE By Using The Exception Trapping Functions.

Based on The Values of The Code OR Message We Can Decide What

Subsequent Action Has To Be Taken Based Upon The Error.

SQLCODE Function

It Returns The Numeric Value For The Internal Oracle Errors.

It Can Be Assigned To A NUMBER Variable.

SQLERRM Function

An Error Number Can Be Passed To SQLERRM.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQLERRM Returns The Message Associated With The Error Number.

It Can Be Assigned To A VARCHAR2 Variable.

The Maximum Length of A Message Returned By The SQLERRM Function is

512 Bytes.

SQLCODE Values

0 No Exception Has Encountered.

1 User Defined Exception.
+100 NO_DATA_FOUND Exception.
These Functions Are More Specific Usage When We Use OTHERS THEN
Exception Handle, Such That The Unknown Error Can Be Treated And
Handled in A More Proper Way.
As Per The Standards of Object Oriented Theory EXCEPTION is Any Event
That is Either Successful OR Failure, Which Can Be Properly Handled With
EXCEPTION Handling Routines.

Pseudo Syntax
SQL> DECLARE
V_ErroeCode NUMBER;
V_ErrorMessage VARCHAR2(255);
BEGIN
/*Executional Code Here*/
EXCEPTION
WHEN OTHERS THEN
ROLLBACK;
V_ErrorCode := SQLCODE;
V_ErrorMessage := SQLERRM;
INSERT INTO Errors
VALUES(V_ErrorCode, V_ErrorMessage);
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_ErrorCode NUMBER(6);
V_ErrorMessage VARCHAR2(200);
BEGIN
INSERT INTO Dept
VALUES(&DeptNumber, '&DeptName', '&DeptLocation');
EXCEPTION
WHEN OTHERS THEN
V_ErrorCode := SQLCODE;
V_ErrorMessage := SUBSTR(SQLERRM, 1, 200);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Error Code Traced is : '||V_ErrorCode);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Error Message Traced is :
'||V_ErrorMessage);
END;
/
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> DECLARE
V_Empno Emp.Empno%TYPE := &EmpNumber;
V_EName Emp.EName%TYPE;
V_Job Emp.Job%TYPE;
V_Sal Emp.Sal%TYPE;
V_ErrorCode NUMBER(6);
V_ErrorMessage VARCHAr2(200);
BEGIN
SELECT Ename, Job, Sal
INTO
V_EName, V_Job, V_Sal
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_Ename||'

'||V_Job||'

'||V_Sal);

EXCEPTION
WHEN OTHERS THEN
V_ErrorCode := SQLCODE;
V_ErrorMessage := SUBSTR(SQLERRM, 1, 200);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Error Code Traced is : '||V_ErrorCode);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Error Message Traced is :
'||V_ErrorMessage);
END;
/

Trapping User Defined Exceptions:

PL/SQL Helps To Determine Customized EXCEPTIONS.

User Defined PL/SQL EXCEPTIONS Must Be

Declared in The DECLARE Section of The PL/SQL Block.

RAISED Explicitly With RAISE Statements.

The User Defined EXCEPTIONS Should Be Planned When The EXCEPTIONS

Related To Business Process Have To Be Maintained.

The User Defined EXCEPTIONS Are The Intelligence of Domain Expertise.

The General Process Followed is As Follows

DECLARE

RAISE

Reference

EXCEPTION Name

Explicitly RAISE The

Exception By Using The
RAISE Statement

Handle The RAISED

Exception

Declarative Section

Executable Section

EXCEPTION Handling
Section

The Steps Followed Are

1. Declare The Name For The User Defined Exception
Syntax
ExceptionIdentifier EXCEPTION
2. Use The RAISE Statement To Raise The Exception Writing in
The Executable Section.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Syntax
RAISE ExceptionIdentifier;
3. Reference The Declared Exception Within The Corresponding
Exception Handling Runtime.
SQL> DECLARE
V_DeptNo Dept.Deptno%TYPE := &DeptNumber;
V_DeptName Dept.Dname%TYPE := '&DeptName';
V_DeptLoc Dept.Loc%TYPE := '&DeptLocation';
E_InvalidDept EXCEPTION;
BEGIN
UPDATE Dept
SET Dname = V_DeptName,
Loc = V_DeptLoc
WHERE Deptno = V_DeptNo;
IF SQL%NOTFOUND THEN
RAISE E_InvalidDept;
END IF;
COMMIT;
EXCEPTION
WHEN E_InvalidDept THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Specific Department Number
'||V_DeptNo||' you wanted to Update is not Found. Please Confirm the
Data.');
INSERT INTO MyAudit(UserName, ModDate, Message)
VALUES(USER, SYSDATE, 'Tried Illegal Update.');
END;
/
SQL> DECLARE
V_Ename Emp.Ename%TYPE;
V_Job Emp.Job%TYPE;
E_ManyEmployees EXCEPTION;
CURSOR EmpCursor IS
SELECT MGR, COUNT(*) Tot_Emp
FROM Emp
WHERE MGR IS NOT NULL
GROUP BY MGR;
BEGIN
FOR MgrRecord IN EmpCursor
LOOP
BEGIN
SELECT Ename, Job INTO
V_Ename, V_Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = MgrRecord.Mgr;
IF MgrRecord.Tot_Emp > 3 THEN
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

RAISE E_ManyEmployees;
ELSE
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee, '||V_Ename||' Manages
'||MgrRecord.Tot_Emp||' Employees.');
END IF;
EXCEPTION
WHEN E_ManyEmployees THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee, '||V_EName||' Manages Many
Employees, Chance of decreasing his Performance, Recommend for
Extra Allowances or Emoluments.');
END;
END LOOP;
END;
/

Exception Propagation

Instead of Trapping An EXCEPTION Within The PL/SQL Block We Can

Propagate The EXCEPTION To Allow The Calling Environment To Handle It.

Each Calling Environment Has Its Own Way of Displaying And Accessing
Errors.

If A PL/SQL RAISES An EXCEPTION And The Current Block Does Not Have A
Handle Then The EXCEPTION PROPAGATES into Successive Enclosing Blocks
Until It Finds A Corresponding Handle.

Illustration 1
SQL> DECLARE
V_TestVariable CHAR(5) := '&String';
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE ('This is A Test Line.');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_TestVariable);
EXCEPTION
WHEN INVALID_NUMBER OR VALUE_ERROR THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('An Error Raised.');
END;

Converting Propagation into Trapping

SQL> BEGIN
DECLARE
V_TestVariable CHAR(5) := '&String';
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE ('This is A Test Line.');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(V_TestVariable);
EXCEPTION
WHEN INVALID_NUMBER OR VALUE_ERROR THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('An Error Raised.');
END;
EXCEPTION
WHEN INVALID_NUMBER OR VALUE_ERROR THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('An Error Raised.');
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

END;

Re-Raising An Exception

It is A Situation Where We Want To Handle An Exception in The Inner Block

And Pass It To The Outer Block.

In The Outer Block The Same Exception is Raised Once Again.

When An EXCEPTION is Re-Raised Then We Should Not Supply The

EXCEPTION Name Once Again Along With The RAISE Statement.

Re-Raising of EXCEPTION is Very Rare But, It is Very Important As Per The

EXCEPTION Concepts.

Illustration
SQL> DECLARE
E_Exception EXCEPTION;
BEGIN
RAISE E_Exception;
EXCEPTION
WHEN E_Exception THEN
RAISE;
END;
EXCEPTION
WHEN E_Exception THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(An Error Occurred);
END;

RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR Procedure

RAISE APPLICATION_ERROR is A Procedure That Lets

USER_DEFINED Error Messages From Stored Sub Programs.

Issue

It is Used To Communicate A Predefined Exception Interactively By

Returning A Non Standard Error Code And Error Message.

Using This Procedure We Can Report Error To Application And Avoid

Returning Unhandled Exceptions.

Syntax:
RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR(ErrorNumber, Message
[,{TRUE|FALSE}]);

ErrorNumber is A User Specified Number For The Exception Between -20000

And -20999.

Message is The User Specified Message For The Exception. It Can Be Up To

2048 Bytes.

TRUE/FALSE is Optional Boolean Parameters, If TRUE The Error is Placed On

The Stack of Previous Error. If FALSE By Default The Error Replaces All
Previous Errors.

SQL> BEGIN
DECLARE
V_Deptno Dept.Deptno%TYPE := &Deptno;
V_TotEmp NUMBER;
E_InvalidDept EXCEPTION;
BEGIN
IF V_Deptno NOT IN (10, 20, 30, 40) THEN
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

RAISE E_InvalidDept;
ELSE
SELECT COUNT(*) INTO
V_TotEmp FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = V_Deptno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Total Employees in '||V_Deptno||'
are '||V_TotEmp||'.');
END IF;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('No Exception was Raised...');
EXCEPTION
WHEN E_InvalidDept THEN
RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR(-20220, 'Sorry There is no Such
Department...as You requested.');
END;
EXCEPTION
WHEN OTHERS THEN
RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR(-20220, 'Sorry Fatal Error.');
END;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Modular Programming Through

Sub-Programmed Blocks

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Working With Procedures

Benefits of Modular Coding

It is More Reusable.
It is More Manageable.

Block Structure

Block Structure is Common For All Modules Designed And Developed in

PL/SQL.

Every PL/SQL Block Begins With A

Header (For Named Block Only)

Name of The Module
The Parameter List If Used

The Declaration Section, Consisting of

Local Variable Declarations.
Explicit Cursor Declarations.
Sub Blocks.

The Main Part of The Module is The Execution Section

Contains All Calculations And Processing Logic.
IFTHENELSE Statements.
Iterative Loops.
CASE Statements.
Data Manipulation Statements.
Calls To Other PL/SQL Modules.

The Last Section is EXCEPTION Handling.

Procedures in PL/SQL

A Procedure is A Module Performing One OR More Actions Associated To

Business Logic.

A Procedure Does Not Need To Return Any Values.

Syntax
CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE
ProcedureName(ParName1 [MODE] ParType,)
IS
Local Variable Declaration;
BEGIN
Executable Statements;
EXCEPTION
Exception Handlers;
END ProcedureName;

PROCEDURE Can Have 0 OR Many Parameters.

Every PROCEDURE Consists of Two Parts

The Header of The Procedure.
The Body of The Procedure.

The Header

It Comes Before The AS Keyword.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

It Contains The PROCEDURE NAME And The PARAMETER LIST.

The Body

It is Any Thing OR Every Thing That is Existing After The AS Keyword.

The Word REPLACE is Optional.

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE MyBonus

AS
CURSOR DeptCursor IS
SELECT Deptno FROM Dept;
BEGIN
FOR R_GroupBonus IN DeptCursor LOOP
UPDATE Emp
SET Sal = Sal * 0.95
WHERE Deptno = R_GroupBonus.DeptNo;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINe('The Bonus Information is
'||R_GroupBonus.Deptno);
END LOOP;
END MyBonus;

To Execute A Procedure We Can Follow Any One of The Following Method.

Use EXECUTE Procedure in SQL*Plus

SQL> EXECUTE MyBonus;

Call The Procedure in Another PL/SQL Block

SQL> Begin
MyBonus;
END;

The Information Upon PROCEDURES is Provided in

USER_OBJECTS View.
USER_SOURCE View.

To See The Procedure Availability

SQL> SELECT
Object_Name,
Object_Type,
Status
FROM USER_OBJECTS
WHERE OBJECT_NAME = MYBONUS;

To See The Procedure Source Code

SQL> SELECT
TO_CHAR(Line, 99)||'>', Text
FROM USER_SOURCE
WHERE NAME = MYBONUS;

Recompile An Existing Procedure

Syntax
SQL> ALTER PROCEDURE ProcedureName Compile;
Illustration
SQL> ALTER Procedure MyBonus Compile;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Illustrative Examples
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE
GetEnameSalJob00
(
PEmpno

Emp.Empno%TYPE

)
AS
V_Ename

Emp.Ename%TYPE;

V_Sal

Emp.Sal%TYPE;

V_Job

Emp.Job%TYPE;

BEGIN
SELECT
Ename, Sal, Job
INTO
V_Ename, V_Sal, V_Job
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = PEmpno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Details of Employee '||PEmpno||'
Are...');
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Name of The Employee is : '||V_Ename);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Salary of The Employee is : '||V_Sal);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Job of The Employee is : '||V_Job);
END GetEnameSalJob00;
/
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE
EmpInsert
(
P_Empno Emp.Empno%TYPE,
P_Ename Emp.Ename%TYPE,
P_Sal Emp.Sal%TYPE,
P_Deptno Emp.Deptno%TYPE,
P_Job

Emp.Job%TYPE,

P_Comm

Emp.Comm%TYPE,

P_HireDate Emp.HireDate%TYPE,
P_MGR

Emp.MGR%TYPE

)
AS
BEGIN
INSERT INTO
Emp (Empno, Ename, Sal, Deptno, Job, Comm, HireDate, MGR)
VALUES(P_Empno, UPPER(P_Ename), P_Sal, P_Deptno, UPPER(P_Job),
P_Comm, P_HireDate, P_MGR);
COMMIT;
Exception
WHEN DUP_VAL_ON_INDEX THEN
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Passing Parameters IN And OUT of Procedures

PARAMETERS Are The Mean To Pass Values TO And FROM The Calling
Environments To The Oracle Server.

PARAMETERS Are The Values That Will Be Processed OR Returned Via The
EXECUTION of The PROCEDURE.

A PL/SQL Procedure Can Be of Three Types

IN Mode.
OUT Mode.
INOUT Mode.

The MODES Upon A Procedure Specify Whether The Parameters Passed In

Are READ IN OR A RECEPTACLE For What Comes Out of The Procedure.

FORMAL And ACTUAL Parameters

FORMAL PARAMETERS Are The Names Specified With in The Parenthesis As

Part of The HEADER of The Module.

ACTUAL PARAMETERS Are The Values, OR Expressions Specified With in

Parenthesis As A Parameter List When A Call is Made To The Module.

The FORMAL PARAMETER And The Related ACTUAL PARAMETER Must Be of

The Same Compliable Data Types.

FORMAL PARAMETERS Do Not Require Constraints Declaration, They Require

Only Data Type Declaration But Not The Width.

The Constraint Upon The Data is Made When The Procedure is Called At
Runtime From The Executable Environment.

There Are Two Types of Methods Match ACTUAL

When Calling The Procedure

And FORMAL Parameters

Positional Notation.
Named Notation.

Positional Notation

It is Simply An Association of The Values By POSITION of The Arguments At

Call Time With That of Declaration in The Header of The Procedure Creation.

The Order of The Parameters Used When Executing The Procedure Should
Match The Order in The PROCEDURES HEADER Exactly.

Named Notation

It is An Explicit Association Using The Symbol =>.

Syntax
FormalParameterName => ArgValue

In Named Notation The Order of Parameters in Does Not Matter.

If The Notation is Mixed Then Position Notation Should Be Used First Then
The Named Notation Should Be Used.

Mode: IN

Passes A Value Into The Program, From The Calling Environment.

It is READ ONLY Value.

Best Suitable For Constants, Literals, Expressions.

Cannot Be Changed Within Program.

It is The Default Mode of Procedures.

Mode: Out

Passes A Valued Back From The Program To The Calling Environment.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

It is WRITE ONLY Values.

Cannot Be Assigned Default Values.

Value Assigned Only If The Program Is Successful.

Mode: INOUT

Passes Values IN But Also Sends Values Back To The Calling Environments.

It Has To Be A Variable, And Cannot Be A Constant

Values Will Be READ From The Calling Environment And Then WRITTEN To
The Calling Environment .

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE

OddNumber(Num1 NUMBER, Num2 NUMBER)
IS
MyNum NUMBER(4);
BEGIN
MyNum := Num1;
WHILE MyNum < Num2 LOOP
IF MOD(MyNum,2) != 0 THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Odd Number : '||MyNum);
End IF;
MyNum := MyNum +1;
END LOOP;
END;
/
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE
FindEmp
(I_Empno IN NUMBER,
O_Ename OUT VARCHAR2,
O_Job OUT VARCHAR2)
AS
BEGIN
SELECT Ename, Job INTO O_Ename, O_Job
FROM Emp WHERE Empno = I_Empno;
EXCEPTION
WHEN NO_DATA_FOUND THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Error in Finding the Details of Employee
Number : '|| I_Empno);
END FindEmp;
/

Calling Routine For The Above Procedure

SQL> DECLARE
V_Ename Emp.Ename%TYPE;
V_Job Emp.Job%TYPE;
BEGIN
FindEmp(7839, V_Ename, V_Job);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee 7839 is : '|| V_Ename||',
'||V_Job||'.');
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

END;
/
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE
EmpInfo(I_Deptno IN NUMBER)
AS
CURSOR EmpInfoCursor IS
SELECT Ename, Job, Sal, Comm
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = I_Deptno;
EmpRecord EmpInfoCursor%ROWTYPE;
NEmployees NUMBER := 0;
TSalary NUMBER := 0;
AVGSalary NUMBER(7,2) := 0;
MAXSalary NUMBER(7,2) := 0;
BEGIN
OPEN EmpInfoCursor;
LOOP
FETCH EmpInfoCursor INTO EmpRecord;
EXIT WHEN EmpInfoCursor%NOTFOUND;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Name : '||EmpRecord.Ename);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Job : '||EmpRecord.Job);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Salary : '||EmpRecord.Sal);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Comission : '||EmpRecord.Comm);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('************************************
');
TSalary := TSalary + EmpRecord.Sal;
NEmployees := NEmployees + 1;
IF EmpRecord.Sal > MAXSalary THEN
MAXSalary := EmpRecord.Sal;
END IF;
END LOOP;
AVGSalary := TSalary / NEmployees;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Number of Employees : '||NEmployees);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Total Salary : '||TSalary);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Maximum Salary : '||MAXSalary);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Average Salary : '||AVGSalary);
CLOSE EmpInfoCursor;
END EmpInfo;
/

Working With User Defined Functions

Functions in PL/SQL Are Stored Code And Are Similar To PROCEDURES.

The FUNCTION is A PL/SQL Block That Returns A Single Value.

FUNCTION Can Accept One OR Many OR No Parameters But A FUNCTION

Must Have A RETURN Clause in The EXECUTABLE Section of A FUNCTION.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Data Type of The Return Values Must Be Declared in The Header of The
Function.

A Function is Not A Stand Alone Executable Module As A Procedure. It Has

To Be Used in Some Context of Implementation.

A Function Has Output That Needs To Be Assigned To A Variable OR It Can

Be Used in A SELECT Statement.

A FUNCTION Should RETURN Value For All The Varying Possible Execution
Streams.

The RETURN Statement Need Not Appear As The Last Line of The Main
Execution Section.

A FUNCTION Can Contain More Than One RETURN Statement, Each Exception
Should Have A RETURN Statement.

The Parameters of A Function Can Be Either IN, OUT OR INOUT Mode.

Syntax
CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION FuncName(Parameter List)
RETURN DataType
IS
Local Variables
BEGIN
<Body>
RETURN(Return Value);
EXCEPTION
<Defined Pragmas>
END;
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION Factorial(Num NUMBER)
RETURN NUMBER
IS
Fact NUMBER(4) := 1;
BEGIN
FOR MyIndex IN REVERSE 1..Num
LOOP
Fact := Fact * MyIndex;
END LOOP;
RETURN Fact;
END;
/

Calling Routine For The Above Function

SQL> DECLARE
V_Factorial NUMBER(4) := 0;
BEGIN
V_Factorial := Factorial(5);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Factorial is : '||V_Factorial);
END;
/
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION

Combination(Num1 NUMBER, Num2 NUMBER)
RETURN NUMBER
IS
Combi NUMBER(4,2) := 1;
BEGIN
Combi := (Factorial(Num1) / (Factorial(Num1 - Num2) *
Factorial(Num2)));
RETURN Combi;
END;
/
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION
EmpExp(V_Empno NUMBER)
RETURN NUMBER
IS
V_HireDate Emp.HireDate%TYPE;
V_Exp NUMBER(4,2) := 1;
BEGIN
SELECT HireDate INTO V_HireDate
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
V_Exp := MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE,V_HireDate) / 12;
RETURN V_Exp;
END;
/
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE
EmpInfo(I_Deptno IN NUMBER)
AS
CURSOR EmpInfoCursor IS
SELECT Empno, Ename, Job, Sal, Comm
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = I_Deptno;
EmpRecord EmpInfoCursor%ROWTYPE;
NEmployees NUMBER := 0;
TSalary NUMBER := 0;
AVGSalary NUMBER(7,2) := 0;
MAXSalary NUMBER(7,2) := 0;
V_Exp NUMBER(4,2) := 1;
BEGIN
OPEN EmpInfoCursor;
LOOP
FETCH EmpInfoCursor INTO EmpRecord;
EXIT WHEN EmpInfoCursor%NOTFOUND;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Name : '||EmpRecord.Ename);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Job : '||EmpRecord.Job);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Salary : '||EmpRecord.Sal);

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Comission : '||EmpRecord.Comm);
V_Exp := EmpExp(EmpRecord.Empno);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee''s Experiance : '||V_Exp);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('************************************
');
TSalary := TSalary + EmpRecord.Sal;
NEmployees := NEmployees + 1;
IF EmpRecord.Sal > MAXSalary THEN
MAXSalary := EmpRecord.Sal;
END IF;
END LOOP;
AVGSalary := TSalary / NEmployees;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Number of Employees : '||NEmployees);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Total Salary : '||TSalary);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Maximum Salary : '||MAXSalary);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Average Salary : '||AVGSalary);
CLOSE EmpInfoCursor;
END EmpInfo;
/

Working With Packages

Package is A Method To Handle All The Required Functions And Procedures

Together.

A Well Designed Package is A Logical Grouping of Objects Such As

Functions.
Procedure.
Global Variables.
Cursors.

All of The Code is Loaded on The First Call of The PACKAGE.

The First Call To The Package is Very Expensive But All Subsequent Calls Will
Result in An Improved Performance.

Packages Should Be Taken Very Seriously in All Such Applications Where

Procedures And Functions Are Used Repeatedly.

Packages Does Not Provide Any Additional Level of Security.

The Structure of A PACKAGE Encourages The TOP-DOWN Approach.

Every Package Has Two Parts, Which Are Individually Coded.

Package Specification.
Package Body.

Package Specification

The PACKAGE SPECIFICATION Contains Information About The Contents of

The PACKAGE.

PACKAGE
Variables.

Anything Placed in The Declarative Section of A PL/SQL Block Can Be Coded

in The PACKAGE SPECIFICATION.

SPECIFICATION

Contains

Declarations

GLOBAL/PUBLIC

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

All Objects Placed in The PACKAGE SPECIFICATION

OBJECTS.

Are Called PUBLIC

Any Function OR Procedure Not in The Package Specification, But Coded in

The PACKAGE BODY is Called A Private Function OR Procedure.

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE EmpManagement

AS
PROCEDURE EmpFind
(I_Empno IN Emp.Empno%TYPE,
O_Ename OUT Emp.Ename%TYPE,
O_Job OUT Emp.Job%TYPE);
FUNCTION EmpExp (V_empno NUMBER)
RETURN NUMBER;
END EmpManagement;

The Package Body

The PACKAGE BODY Contains The Actual Executable Code For The OBJECTS
Described in The PACKAGE SPECIFICATION.

The PACKAGE BODY Contain Code For All Procedures And Function Described
in The Specification And May Additionally Contain Code For Object Not
Declared in The Specification.

When Creating Stored Package The Package Specification And Body Can Be
Compiled Separately.

Rules For Package Body

There Must Be An Exact Match Between

The CURSOR And
HEADERS And The Definition is The PACKAGE SPECIFICATION.

MODULE

We Should Not Repeat The Declaration of Variables, Exceptions, TYPE OR

Constants in The Specification Again in The Body.

Any Element Declared in The Specifications Can Be Reused in The Body.

Referencing Package Elements

When An Element is Called From Outside The Package It is Referenced As

PackageName.Element

We Need Not Qualify Elements When Declared And Referenced Inside The
Body of The Package OR When Declared In A Specification And Referenced
Inside The Body of The Same Package.

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE MathsBody

IS
FUNCTION Factorial(Num NUMBER)
RETURN NUMBER;
FUNCTION Combination(Num1 NUMBER, Num2 NUMBER)
RETURN NUMBER;
PROCEDURE ProdSeries(StartRange NUMBER);
PROCEDURE PrintEvenOdd(Num1 NUMBER, Num2 NUMBER);
PROCEDURE SquareArea(Side IN NUMBER);
PROCEDURE CubeVolume(Radius IN NUMBER);
END MathsBody;
/

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY MathsBody

AS
FUNCTION Factorial(Num NUMBER)
RETURN NUMBER
IS
Fact NUMBER(4) := 1;
BEGIN
FOR MyIndex IN REVERSE 1..Num
LOOP
Fact := Fact * MyIndex;
END LOOP;
RETURN Fact;
END Factorial;
FUNCTION Combination(Num1 NUMBER, Num2 NUMBER)
RETURN NUMBER
IS
Combi NUMBER(4,2) := 1;
BEGIN
Combi := (Factorial(Num1) /( Factorial(Num1-Num2) *
Factorial(Num2)));
RETURN Combi;
END Combination;
PROCEDURE ProdSeries(StartRange NUMBER)
IS
Result NUMBER;
BEGIN
FOR MyIndex IN 1..5 LOOP
Result := StartRange * MyIndex;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(StartRange||' X '||MyIndex||' = '|| Result);
END LOOP;
END ProdSeries;
PROCEDURE PrintEvenOdd(Num1 NUMBER, Num2 NUMBER)
IS
V_Num1 NUMBER;
EvenValue VARCHAR2(1000);
OddValue VARCHAR2(1000);
BEGIN
V_Num1 := Num1;
WHILE V_Num1 < Num1
LOOP
IF MOD(V_Num1,2) != 0 THEN
OddValue := OddValue||' '||V_Num1;
ELSE
EvenValue := EvenValue||' '||V_Num1;
END IF;
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

V_Num1 := V_Num1 + 1;
END LOOP;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Odd Numbers in The Series are :
'||OddValue);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('The Even Numbers in The Series are :
'||EvenValue);
END PrintEvenOdd;
PROCEDURE SquareArea(Side IN NUMBER)
IS
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Area of The Square = ' || (Side * Side) );
END;
PROCEDURE CubeVolume(Radius IN NUMBER)
IS
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Volume of The Cube = ' || (Radius * Radius *
Radius));
END;
END MathsBody;
/
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE EmpPackage
IS
PROCEDURE MyBonus;
PROCEDURE FindEmp
(I_Empno IN NUMBER,
O_Ename OUT VARCHAR2,
O_Job OUT VARCHAR2);
PROCEDURE EmpInfo(I_Deptno IN NUMBER);
FUNCTION EmpExp(V_Empno NUMBER)
RETURN NUMBER;
FUNCTION EmpGrade(I_Grade NUMBER)
RETURN VARCHAR2;
END EmpPackage;
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY EmpPackage
IS
PROCEDURE MyBonus
AS
CURSOR DeptCursor IS
SELECT Deptno FROm Dept;
BEGIN
FOR R_GroupBonus IN DeptCursor LOOP
UPDATE Emp
SET Sal = Sal * 0.95
WHERE Deptno = R_GroupBonus.DeptNo;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINe('The Bonus Information is
'||R_GroupBonus.Deptno);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

END LOOP;
END MyBonus;
PROCEDURE FindEmp
(I_Empno IN NUMBER,
O_Ename OUT VARCHAR2,
O_Job OUT VARCHAR2)
AS
BEGIN
SELECT Ename, Job INTO O_Ename, O_Job
FROM Emp WHERE Empno = I_Empno;
EXCEPTION
WHEN NO_DATA_FOUND THEN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Error in Finding the Details of Employee
Number : '|| I_Empno);
END FindEmp;
PROCEDURE EmpInfo(I_Deptno IN NUMBER)
AS
CURSOR EmpInfoCursor IS
SELECT Ename, Job, Sal, Comm
FROM Emp
WHERE Deptno = I_Deptno;
EmpRecord EmpInfoCursor%ROWTYPE;
NEmployees NUMBER := 0;
TSalary NUMBER := 0;
AVGSalary NUMBER(7,2) := 0;
MAXSalary NUMBER(7,2) := 0;
BEGIN
OPEN EmpInfoCursor;
LOOP
FETCH EmpInfoCursor INTO EmpRecord;
EXIT WHEN EmpInfoCursor%NOTFOUND;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Name : '||EmpRecord.Ename);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Job : '||EmpRecord.Job);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Salary : '||EmpRecord.Sal);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Employee Comission : '||EmpRecord.Comm);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('************************************
');
TSalary := TSalary + EmpRecord.Sal;
NEmployees := NEmployees + 1;
IF EmpRecord.Sal > MAXSalary THEN
MAXSalary := EmpRecord.Sal;
END IF;
END LOOP;
AVGSalary := TSalary / NEmployees;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Number of Employees : '||NEmployees);
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Total Salary : '||TSalary);

DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Maximum Salary : '||MAXSalary);
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('Average Salary : '||AVGSalary);
CLOSE EmpInfoCursor;
END EmpInfo;
FUNCTION EmpExp(V_Empno NUMBER)
RETURN NUMBER
IS
V_HireDate Emp.HireDate%TYPE;
V_Exp NUMBER(4,2) := 1;
BEGIN
SELECT HireDate INTO V_HireDate
FROM Emp
WHERE Empno = V_Empno;
V_Exp := MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE,V_HireDate) / 12;
RETURN V_Exp;
END EmpExp;
FUNCTION EmpGrade(I_Grade NUMBER)
RETURN VARCHAR2
IS
V_Num NUMBER(4);
BEGIN
SELECT COUNT(*) INTO V_Num
FROM Emp, SalGrade
WHERE Sal BETWEEN LoSal AND HiSal AND
Grade = I_Grade;
RETURN 'The Total Employees For The Grade Given By You Are :
'||V_Num;
END EmpGrade;
END EmpPackage;
/

Working With Triggers

A DATABASE TRIGGER is A Named PL/SQL Block Stored in A Database And

Executed Implicitly When TRIGGERING EVENT OCCURS.

An Act of Executing A Trigger is Referred To As Firing A Trigger.

A TRIGGEING EVENT is A DML Statement Associated With INSERT,

UPDATE OR DELETE Statement Executed Against A DATABASE TABLE.

A Trigger Can Fire BEFORE OR AFTER A Triggering Event.

A Trigger is Auto Executable Programmed Block, Waiting For The Event To

Take Place.

Syntax
CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER TriggerName
{BEFORE OR AFTER} EventType ON TableName
[FOR EACH ROW]
[WHEN Condition]
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

DECLARE
Declaration Statements;
BEGIN
Executable Statements;
EXCEPTION
Exception Handling;
END;

When A Database Table is Dropped Then The Associated Triggers Are Also
Dropped Automatically.

Advantages

Enforcing Complex Business Rules That Cannot Be Defined By Using

Integrity Constraints.

Maintaining Complex Security Rules.

Automatically Generating Values For Derived Columns OR PRIMARY KEY

Columns.

Collecting Statistical Information On Table Access.

Preventing Invalid Transactions.

Providing Value Auditing.

Restrictions

A TRIGGER May Not issue A Transactional Control Statement Like COMMIT,

SAVEPOINT And ROLLBACK.

Any FUNCTION OR PROCEDURE Called By A Trigger Cannot issue A

Transaction Control Statement.

It is Not Permitted To Declare LONG OR LONG RAW Variables in The Body

of A Trigger.

Before Triggers

These TRIGGERS Fire BEFORE Any Transactions Are Implemented

These TRIGGERS Can Be Classified As

BEFORE INSERT.
Before UPDATE.
Before DELETE.

Usage

When A Trigger Provides Values For Derived Columns BEFORE The INSERT
OR UPDATE Statement is Completed.

When A Trigger Determines Whether An INSERT, UPDATE OR DELETE

Statement Should Be Allowed To Complete.

After Triggers

These TRIGGERS Fire AFTER Any Transaction is Implemented.

These Triggers Can Be Classified As

After INSERT.
After DELETE.
After UPDATE.

Usage

When A TRIGGER Should Fire After A DML

Acknowledgement Purpose OR Auditing.

Statement is Executed For

When A Trigger Should Perform Actions Not Specified in A BEFORE Trigger .

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER WeekEndCheck

AFTER INSERT OR UPDATE OR DELETE
ON Emp
DECLARE
V_WeekDay VARCHAR2(100);
BEGIN
V_WeekDay := TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DY');
IF V_WeekDay = 'SAT' OR V_WeekDay = 'SUN' THEN
RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR(-20010,'An Illegal Intrusion into the
System was Detected.');
END IF;
END;
/
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER IllegalTime
BEFORE INSERT OR UPDATE OR DELETE
ON Emp
DECLARE
V_Time NUMBER;
BEGIN
V_Time := TO_CHAR(SYSDATE, 'HH24');
IF V_Time NOT BETWEEN 10 AND 17 THEN
RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR(-20011,' Illegal Intrusion, Not Business
Hours');
END IF;
END;
/

Instead of Triggers

The INSTEAD OF TRIGGERS Are Special Kind That Are Defined On DATABASE
Views.

The INSTEAD OF TRIGGER is Created As ROW TRIGGERS Only.

The INSTEAD OF TRIGGER Fires Instead of The TRIGGERING STATEMENT,

That Has Been Issued Against A View.

Syntax
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER TriggerName
INSTEAD OF TriggerEvent ON ViewName
FOR EACH ROW
BEGIN
Execution Statement;
END;
SQL> CREATE VIEW DeptView
AS
SELECT Deptno, Dname, Loc
FROM Dept
/
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER DeptDel

INSTEAD OF DELETE ON DeptView
FOR EACH ROW
BEGIN
DELETE FROM Dept
WHERE Deptno = :OLD.Deptno;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(Department Deleted);
END;
/

Row Triggers

A Row Triggers is Fired As Many Times As There Are Rows Affected By

Triggering Event.

When The Statement FOR EACH ROW is Present in The CREATE TRIGGER
Clause, The Trigger is A ROW Trigger.

Illustration
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER
DeptUpdate
AFTER UPDATE ON Dept
FOR EACH ROW

The ROW LEVEL TRIGGER Fires As Many Times As The Number of ROWS Are
Affected When The Transaction Takes Place.

Statement Level Triggers

A Statement Trigger is Fired Once For The Entire Triggering Statement.

This TRIGGER Fires Once, Regardless of The Number of Rows Affected By

The TRIGGERING Statement.

Illustration
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER
DeptDelete
AFTER DELETE ON Dept

Statement Trigger Should Be Used When The Operations Performed By The

Trigger Do Not By On The Data in The Individual Records.

Correlation Identifiers in Row Level

As A ROW LEVEL TRIGGER Fires Once Per Row Inside The TRIGGER We Can
Access The Data In The ROW THAT IS CURRENTLYTY BEING PROCESSED.

The Two Correlation Identifiers Provided By PL/SQL Are :OLD And :NEW.

A Correlation Identifier is A Special Kind of PL/SQL Bind Variable.

The PL/SQL Compiler Treats The Correlation Identifiers As RECORDS of Type

Triggering_Table%ROWTYPE;

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The Specifications
Transaction

:OLD

:NEW

INSERT

Undefined:
All Fields Are NULL

Values That Will Be Inserted When

The Statement is Complete.

UPDATE

DELETE

Original Values For The New Values That Will Be Updated

Row Before The Update. When The Statement is Complete.
Original Values Before
The Row is Deleted

Undefined:
All Fields Are NULL

SQL> CREATE TABLE RecycleBin

(
Empno NUMBER(6),
Ename VARCHAR2(20),
Job VARCHAR(20),
MGR NUMBER(6),
HireDate DATE,
Sal NUMBEr(7,2),
Comm NUMBER(7,2),
Deptno NUMBER(2)
)
/
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER EmpRBin
BEFORE DELETE
ON Emp
FOR EACH ROW
BEGIN
INSERT INTO RecycleBin
VALUES(:OLD.Empno, :OLD.Ename, :OLD.Job, :OLD.MGR, :OLD.HireDate,
:OLD.Sal, :OLD.Comm, :OLD.Deptno);
END;
/

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Some Good Stuff To Practice

Q.1)

Display the details of all employees

Q.2)

Display the depart information from department table

Q.3)

Display the name and job for all the employees

Q.4)

Display the name and salary for all the employees

Q.5)

Display the employee no and totalsalary for all the employees

Q.6)

Display the employee name and annual salary for all employees.

Q.7)

Display the names of

department number 10.

Q.8)

Display the names of all the employees who are working as clerks and
drawing a salary more than 3000.

Q.9)

Display the employee number and name who are earning comm.

Q.10)

Display the employee number and name who do not earn any comm.

Q.11)

Display the names of employees who are working as clerks, salesman

or analyst and drawing a salary more than 3000.

Q.12)

Display the names of the employees who are working in the company
for the past 5 years;

Q.13)

Display the list of employees who have joined the company before 30jun-90 or after 31-dec-90.

all

the

employees

who

are

working

Q.14)

Display current date.

Q.15)

Display the list of all users in your database(use catalog table).

Q.16)

Display the names of all tables from current user;

Q.17)

Display the name of the current user.

Q.18)

Display the names of employees working in depart number 10 or 20 or

40 or employees working as clerks,salesman or analyst.

Q.19)

Display the names of employees whose name starts with alphabet s.

Q.20)

Display the employee names for employees whose name ends with
alphabet s.

Q.21)

Display the names of employees whose names have second alphabet a

in their names.

Q.22)

Select the names of the employee whose names is exactly five

characters in length.

Q.23)

Display the names of the employee who are not working as managers.

Q.24)

Display the names of the employee who are not working as salesman
or clerk or analyst.

Q.25)

Display all rows from emp table. the system should wait after every
screen full of information.

Q.26)

Display the total number of employee working in the company.

Q.27)

Display the total salary being paid to all employees.

Q.28)

Display the maximum salary from emp table.

Q.29)

Display the minimum salary from emp table.

Q.30)

Display the average salary from emp table.

Q.31)

Display the maximum salary being paid to clerk.

Q.32)

Display the maximum salary being paid to depart number 20.

Q.33)

Display the minimum salary being paid to any salesman.

Q.34)

Display the average salary drawn by managers.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.35)

Display the total salary drawn by analyst working in depart number

40.

Q.36)

Display the names of the employee in order of salary i.e the name of

Q.37)

The employee earning lowest salary should salary appear first.

Q.38)

Display the names of the employee in descending order of salary.

Q.39)

Display the names of the employee in order of employee name.

Q.40)

Display empno,ename,deptno,sal sort the output first base on name

and

Q.41)

Within name by deptno and with in deptno by sal.

Q.42)

Display the name of the employee along with their annual

salary(sal*12).the name of the employee earning highest annual
salary should appear first.

Q.43)

Display name,salary,hra,pf,da,total salary for each employee. The

output should be in the order of total salary,hra 15% of salary,da 10%
of salary,pf 5% salary,total salary will be(salary+hra+da)-pf.

Q.44)

Display depart numbers and total number of employees working in

each department.

Q.45)

Display the various jobs and total number of employees within each
job group.

Q.46)

Display the depart numbers and total salary for each department.

Q.47)

Display the depart numbers and max salary for each department.

Q.48)

Display the various jobs and total salary for each job

Q.49)

Display the depart numbers with more than three employees in each
dept.

Q.50)

Display the various jobs along with total salary for each of the jobs
where total salary is greater than 40000.

Q.51)

Display the various jobs along with total number of employees in each
job. the output should contain only those jobs with more than three
employees.

Q.52)

Display the name of the employee who earns highest salary.

Q.53)

Display the employee number and name for employee working as clerk
and earning highest salary among clerks.

Q.54)

Display the names of salesman who earns a salary more than the
highest salary of any clerk.

Q.55)

Display the names of clerks who earn a salary more than the lowest
salary of any salesman.

Q.56)

Display the names of employees who earn a salary more than that of
jones or that of salary greater than that of scott.

Q.57)

Display the names of the employees who earn highest salary in their
respective departments.

Q.58)

Display the names of the employees who earn highest salaries in their
respective job groups.

Q.59)

Display the
department.

Q.60)

Display the employee names who are working in Chicago.

Q.61)

Display the job groups having total salary greater than the maximum
salary for managers.

Q.62)

Display the names of employees from department number 10 with

salary greater than that of any employee working in other department.

employee

names

who

are

working

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

accounting

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.63)

Display the names of the employees from department number 10 with

salary greater than that of all employee working in other departments.

Q.64)

Display the names of the employees in uppercase.

Q.65)

Display the names of the employees in lowercase.

Q.66)

Display the names of the employees in proper case.

Q.67)

Display the length of your name using appropriate function.

Q.68)

Display the length of all the employee names.

Q.69)

Select name of the employee concatenate with employee number.

Q.70)

Use appropriate function and extract 3 characters starting from 2

characters from the following string 'oracle'. I.e the out put should be
'ac'.

Q.71)

Find the first occurrence of character 'a' from the following string i.e
'computer maintenance corporation'.

Q.72)

Replace every occurrence of alphabet a with b in the string allens(use

translate function)

Q.73)

Display the information from emp table. where job manager is found it
should be displayed as boos(use replace function).

Q.74)

Display empno,ename,deptno from emp table. instead of display

department numbers display the related department name(use decode
function).

Q.75)

Display your age in days.

Q.76)

Display your age in months.

Q.77)

Display the current date as 15th august Friday nineteen ninety seven.

Q.78)

Display the following output for each row from emp table.

Q.79)

Scott has joined the company on Wednesday 13th august nineteen

ninety.

Q.80)

Find the date for nearest Saturday after current date.

Q.81)

display current time.

Q.82)

Display the date three months before the current date.

Q.83)

Display the common jobs from department number 10 and 20.

Q.84)

Display the jobs found in department 10 and 20 eliminate duplicate

jobs.

Q.85)

Display the jobs which are unique to department 10.

Q.86)

Display the details of those who do not have any person working
under them.

Q.87)

Display the details of those employees who are in sales department

and grade is 3.

Q.88)

Display those who are not managers and who are managers to any
one.

Q.89)

Display the managers names

Q.90)

Display the who are not managers

Q.91)

Display those employee whose name contains not less than 4

characters.

Q.92)

Display those department whose name start with "s" while the
location

Q.93)

Display employees whose names end with "k".

Q.94)

Display those employees whose manager name is jones.

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.95)

Display those employees whose salary is more than 3000 after giving
20% increment.

Q.96)

Display all employees while their dept names;

Q.97)

Display ename who are working in sales dept.

Q.98)

Display employee name,deptname,salary and comm for those sal in

between 2000 to 5000 while location is chicago.

Q.99)

Display those employees whose salary greter than his manager salary.

Q.100)

Display those employees who are working in the same dept where his
manager is work.

Q.101)

Display those employees who are not working under any manager.

Q.102)

Display grade and employees name for the dept no 10 or 30 but grade
is not 4 while joined the company before 31-dec-82.

Q.103)

Update the salary of each employee by 10% increment who are not
eligible for commission.

Q.104)

Select those employee who joined the company before 31-dec-82

while their dept location is network or chicago.

Q.105)

Display employee name,job,department,location

working as manager?

Q.106)

Display those employees whose manager name is jones? [and also

display their manager name]?

Q.107)

Display name and salary of ford if his salary is equal to hisal of his
grade

Q.108)

Display employee name,job,depart name ,manager name,his grade and

make out an order under department wise?

Q.109)

List out all employees name,job,salary,grade and depart name for

every

Q.110)

One in the company except 'clerk. sort on salary display the highest
salary?

Q.111)

Display the employee name,job and

employee who are without manager?

Q.112)

Find out the top 5 earners of company?

Q.113)

Display name of those employee who are getting the highest salary?

Q.114)

Display those employee whose salary is equal to average of maximum

and minimum?

Q.115)

Select count of employee in each department where count greater

than 3?

Q.116)

Display dname where at least 3 are working and display only

department name?

Q.117)

Display name of those managers name whose salary is more than

average salary of his company?

Q.118)

Display those managers name whose salary is more than average

salary of his employee?

Q.119)

Display employee name,sal,comm and net pay for those employee

Q.120)

Whose net pay is greter than or equal to any other employee salary of
the company?

Q.121)

Display all employees names with total sal of company with each
employee name?

Q.122)

Find out last 5(least)earners of the company.?

Q.123)

Find out the number of employees whose salary is greater than their

his

for

manager.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

all

who

display

are

also

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.124)

Manager salary?

Q.125)

Display those department where no employee working?

Q.126)

Display those employee whose salary is odd value?

Q.127)

Display those employee whose salary contains atleast 3 digits?

Q.128)

Display those employee who joined in the company in the month of

DEC?

Q.129)

Display those employees whose name contains "a"?

Q.130)

Display those employee whose deptno is available in salary?

Q.131)

Display those employee whose first 2 characters from hiredate - last 2

characters of salary?

Q.132)

Display those employee whose 10% of salary is equal to the year of

joining?

Q.133)

Display those employee who are working in sales or research?

Q.134)

Display the grade of jones?

Q.135)

Display those employees who joined the company before 15 of the

month?

Q.136)

Display those employee who has joined before 15th of the month.

Q.137)

Delete those records where

department is less than 3.

Q.138)

Display the name of the department where no employee working.

employees

particular

Q.139)

Display those employees who are working as manager.

Q.140)

Display those employees whose grade is equal to any number of sal

but not equal to first number of sal?

Q.141)

Print the details of all the employees who are sub-ordinate to Blake?

Q.142)

Display employee name and his salary whose salary is greater than

Q.143)

Highest average of department number?

Q.144)

Display the 10th record of emp table(without using rowid)

Q.145)

Display the half of the ename's in upper case and remaining

lowercase?

Q.146)

Display the 10th record of emp table without using group by and
rowid?

Q.147)

Create a copy of emp table;

Q.148)

Select ename if ename exists more than once.

Q.149)

Display all enames in reverse order?(smith:htims).

Q.150)

Display those employee whose joining of month and grade is equal.

Q.151)

Display those employee whose joining date is available in deptno.

Q.152)

Display those employees name as follows

Q.153)

A allen

Q.154)
Q.155)

B blake
List out the employees ename,sal,pf(20% of sal) from emp;

Q.156)

Create table emp with only one column empno;

Q.157)

Add the column to emp table with name as ename varachar2(20).

Q.158)

Oops i forgot give the primary key constraint. Add it now.

Q.159)

Now increase the length of ename column to 30 characters.

Q.160)

Add salary column to emp table.

Q.161)

I want to give a validation saying that salary cannot be greater 10,000

(note give a name to this constraint)
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.162)

For the time being i have decided that i will not impose this validation.
my boss has agreed to pay more than 10,000.

Q.163)

My boss has changed his mind. Now he doesn't want to pay more than
10,000.so revoke that salary constraint.

Q.164)

Add column called as mgr to your emp table;

Q.165)

Oh! This column should be related to empno. Give a command to add

this constraint.

Q.166)

Add deptno column to your emp table;

Q.167)

This deptno column should be related to deptno column of dept table;

give the command to add the constraint.

Q.168)

Create table called as newemp. Using single command create this table
as well as get data into this table(use create table as);

Q.169)

Create table called as newemp. This table should contain only

empno,ename,dname.

Q.170)

Delete the rows of employees who are working in the company for
more than 2 years.

Q.171)

Provide a commission(10% comm of sal) to employees who are not

earning any commission.

Q.172)

If any employee has commission

incremented by 10% of his salary.

his

commission

should

Q.173)

Display employee name and department name for each employee.

Q.174)

Display employee number,name and location of the department in

which he is working.

Q.175)

Display ename,dname even if there are no employees working in a

particular department(use outer join).

Q.176)

Display employee name and his manager name.

Q.177)

Display the department name and total number of employees in each

department.

Q.178)

Display the
department.

Q.179)

Display itemname and total sales amount for each item.

Q.180)

Write a query to delete the repeated rows from emp table;

department

name

along

with

total

salary

each

Q.181)

Write a query to display 5 to 7 rows from a table

Q.182)

Write a query to display top n rows from table?

Q.183)

Write a query to display top 3 salaries from emp;

Q.184)

Write a query to display 9th from the emp table?

Q.185)

Write a query to list all the employees who are working as clerk

Q.186)

Write a query to list the employees who are working as clerks or

managers with the minimum salary of 4000

Q.187)

Write a query o list the employees who are having experience more
than 4 years

Q.188)

Write a query to list the employees who hired in the last seven days

Q.189)

Write a query to list the employees whose salaries are within the
range of 5000 and 10000

Q.190)

Write a query to list the employees who have joined in the month of
march99

Q.191)

Write a query to list the employees whose salaries are not within the
range of 10000 and 13000
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.192)

Write a query who are getting 1000, 2000, 3000

Q.193)

Write a query to list all employees except who are joined on 11- sep2001, 31-mar-2001 and 30-jan-2001(it also compares time).

Q.194)

Write a query to list all the employees whose names are having o as
second character

Q.195)

Write a query to list all the employees whose names are having r as
last character

Q.196)

Write a query to list all the employees whose names are starting with
r and ending with o

Q.197)

Display those employees who's joining of month and grade is equal?

Q.198)

Display the half of the ename's in upper case and the remaining in
lower case?

Q.199)

Use the variable in a statement which finds all employees who can
earn $30,000 a year of more?

Q.200)

Find out how many managers are there without listing them?

Q.201)

Find out the average salary and average total remuneration for each
job type remember salesman earn comm?

Q.202)

Find out the job that was filled in the first half of 1983 and same job
that was filled during the same period on 1984?

Q.203)

Findout all the employees who joined the company before their
manager?

Q.204)

List out all the employees by name and number along with their
managers name and number, also display king who has no manager?

Q.205)

Find out the employees who earn the highest salary in each job type.
sort in descending sal order?

Q.206)

Find out the most recently hired employees in each department. Order
by hiredate?

Q.207)

Display ename salary and deptno for each employee who earn a salary
greater than the average for their department order by deptno?

Q.208)

Display the department where there are no employees?

Q.209)

Display
deptno
compensation?

Q.210)

Display average salary figure for the department?

Q.211)

Display employees
department 30?

Q.212)

Find employees
department 30?

Q.213)

Select department name,deptno and sum of salary?

Q.214)

Find all departments which have more than three employees?

with

highest

who

can

annual

earn

remuneration

than

bill

salary

employee

lowest

every

Q.215)

List lowest paid employees working for each manager? Exclude any

Q.216)

Groups where the minimum salary is less than 1000 sort the output by
salary?

Q.217)

Delete those records from emp table whose deptno not available in
dept table?

Q.218)

Display name of those emp who are going to retire 31-dec-1999. I the
maximum job period is 30 years?

Q.219)

Display those emp whose salary is odd value?

Q.220)

Display those employees whose salary is contains at least 3 digits?

Q.221)

Display those emp who join in the company in the month of DEC?
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.222)

Display those emp who's name contains "a"?

Q.223)

Display those emp who's deptno is available in salary?

Q.224)

Display those emp who's 10% of salary is equals to the year of

joining?

Q.225)

Display those emp who joined the company before 15th of the month?

Q.226)

Delete those emp who joined company of 10years back from today?

Q.227)

Display those emp who are working as manager?

Q.228)

Find the errors if any.

1. SELECT ,ename,job,sal salary FROM emp;
2. SELECT * FROM salgrade
3. SELECT empno,ename, sal*12 annual salary FROM emp;
4. SELECT empno,ename,distinct sal, job FROM emp;
5. SELECT empno,ename,sal,job*12 FROM emp;

Q.229)

Create a query to display unique jobs from the emp table.

Q.230)

Display the name concatenated with the job, separated by a comma

and space, and name the column as employees and title.

Q.231)

Create a query to display all the data from emp table. Separate each
Column by a comma. Name the column the_output.

Q.232)

Display all records in following format (for all record) on

Employee<name>works in department <number> and appointed on
<date>

Some Common Questions Asked on DBMS Theory

Q.1)

What is a database?
A dbms is a complex softwaresystem that is used to manage,store and
manipulate data and metadata used to describe the data.

Q.2)

What is a key?what are different keys in database?

A key is nothing but a attribute or group of attributes.they are used to
perform some specific operation depending on their operation.the keys
are classified into primary key,secondary key,alternative keysuper
key,candidate key,compound or concatinated or composite key.

Q.3)

What is a primary key?

Primary key:an attribute to identify a record uniquely is considered to be
primary key.for eg in the student table student_no is the primary key
because it can be used to identify unique record or unique student.

Q.4)

What is a secondary key?

An attribute used to identify a group of records satisfying a given
condition is said to be a secondary key.in the employee table
designation is a secondary key because more than one employee can
have the same designation.

Q.5)

What is a candidate key?

Register no usually alloted in the exams is also unique for each student
in that case for identifying a student uniquely either student_no or
register_no can be used.here two different candidates are contesting for
primary key post.any of them can be selected as primary key.

Q.6)

What is an alternate key?

If any one of the candidate keys among the different candidate keys
available is selected as primary key then remaining keys are called
alternate key.

Q.7)

What is a super key?

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

With primary key if any other attribute is added then that combination is
called super key in other words,primary key is the minimum possible
super key.in the student table student_no+student_name is one the
super key.
Q.8)

What is a composite key?

If the primary key is combination of more than one key then it is called
the composite key.in the table called marks student_no+subject is the
composite key.

Q.9)

What is a relation?
A relation consists of a homogeneous set of tuples.

Q.10) What is a table?

It is the representation of a relation having records as rows and
attributes as columns.
Q.11) What is an attribute?
An object or entity is characterized by its properties or attributes. in
relational database systems attributes corresponds to fields.
Q.12) What is a domain?
The set of allowable value for the attribute is the domain of the
attribute.
Q.13) What is a tuple?
Tuples are the members of a relation. an entity type having attributes
can be represented by set of these attributes called tuple.
Q.14) What is a selection?
An operation that selects only some of the tuples in the relation is
known as selection operation.the selection operation yields a horizontal
subset of a given relation.
Q.15) What is a join operation?
The join operation allows the combination of two relations to form a
new relation.
Q.16) What are base operations in relational algebra?
Union:
The term of the relation as performed by combining the tuples from
one relation with those
a second relation to produce a third relation.
duplicate tuples are eliminated. the relation must be union compatible.
Difference:
The difference of two relations is a third relation having tuples that
occur in the first relation but not in the second relation.
Intersection:
The intersection operation selects the common tuples from the two
relations.
Cartesian product:
The Cartesian product of two relations is the concatenation of tuples
belonging to the two relations. a new resultant scheme is created
consisting of concatenation of all possible combination of tuples.
Q.17) What are different dbms facilities? OR How many types of facilities are
provided by a dbms?
1)the data definition facility or data definition language(DDL)
2)the data manipulation facility or data manipulation language(DML)
3)the data control facility(DCL)
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.18) What is data definition language?

Data scheme is specified by a set of definitions which are expressed b a
special language called a DDL.
Q.19) What is a data directory or data dictionary?
The result of compilation of DDL statements is a set of tables which are
stored in a special file called data dictionary or data directory.
A data directory is a file that contains metadata i.e data about data. this
file is consulted before actual is read or modified in the database
system.
Q.20) What is a DML?
A DML is a language that enables users to access or manipulate data as
organised by the appropriate data mobel.there are basically two types:
1)procedural DML require a user to specify what data is needed and how
to get it.
2)non procedural dimly require a user to specify what data is needed
without specifying how to get it.
Q.21) What is a query?
A query is a statement requesting the retrieval of information.
Q.22) What is a query language?
The portion of dimly that involves information retrieval is called a query
language.
Q.23) What are the advantages of dbms?
Reduction of redundancies,integrity,security,conflict resolution,data
independence,shared data,data quality enhanced.
Q.24) What is a SQL?
Structured query language(SQL) originated in 1974 at IBM. SQL was the
data definition and manipulation language.
Q.25) What are the features of SQL?
Portability, client server architecture,dynamic data definition,multiple
views of data,complete data base language,interactive,high level
structure and SQL standards.
Q.26) How SQL organizes the data?
SQL organizes data as DATABASES,TABLES,INDEXES,VIEWS.
Q.27) What is data definition?
SQL lets a user to define the data structure and relationship at the
stored data.
Q.28) What is data retrieval?
Allows a user or an application program to retrieve the stored data.
Q.29) What is data sharing?
Data can be shared by more than one user.
Q.30) What are data manipulation operations?
Remove,append,create,delete.
Q.31) Data definition is done through which statement?
Data definition in SQL is via the create statement. the statement can be
used to create a table, index or view.
Q.32) What is the command to alter the structure of the table?

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

The definition of the existing relation can be altered by using alter

statement. this statement allows a new column to be added to an
existing relation.
Q.33) What is a view?
It is an object of SQL. a query can be defined,storedand named. this is
called view.
Q.34) What is a first normal form?
A relation which contains no mulivalued attributes.
Q.35) What is a second normal form?
A relation is in second normal form for if it is first normal form and
every nonkey attribute is fully functionally dependent on primary key.
Q.36) What is a third normal form?
A relation is in third normal form if for every functional dependency
f : x->y is a Key.
Q.37) What is BCNF?
Boyce-code normal form.
Q.38) What is fifth normal form?
A relation which eliminates join dependencies.
Q.39) What is the command to delete a record in the table?
DELETE.
Q.40) What is the command to delete a table?
DROP Table.
Q.41) What is the command to insert a record?
INSERT INTO.
Q.42) What is the command to alter table values in SQL?
UPDATE.
Q.43) What is time stamping?
In the time stamping based method, a serial order is created among the
concurrent transactions by assigning to each transaction a unique
nondecreasing numbers. you will be allocating fixed time for each
transaction.
Q.44) What is data base schema?
It is the description of the database i.e its data structure and not the
detail.
Q.45) What is a self join?
Joining the table to the same table.
Q.46) What are the different aggregate functions in SQL?
AVG(), MIN(), MAX(), COUNT(), SUM().
Q.47) What is data integrity?
Data must satisfy the integrity constraints of the system for Data
Quality.
Q.48) What is data independence?
A database system keeps data separate from software data structures.
Q.49) What is dead locking?
It is the situation where two transactions are waiting for other to
release a lock on an item.
Q.50) what is decryption?
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Taking encoded text and converting it into text that you are able to read.
Q.51) What is a distributed database?
A database in which the data is contained with in a number of separate
subsystems usually in different locations.
Q.52) What is an entity?
It represents a real world object.
Q.53) What is a conceptual data model?
A conceptual data model is concerned with the general description of
the data base without concern for how the data may be organised.
Q.54) What is two phase locking?
It is a most common mechanism that is used to control concurrency in
two phases for achieving the serializability. the two phases are growing
and shrinking.
1)a transaction acquires locks on data items it will need to complete the
transaction. this is called growing process. a transaction may obtain lock
but may not release any lock.
2)one lock is released no other lock may be acquired. this is called
shrinking process. a transaction may release locks but may not obtain
any new locks.
Q.55) What is projection?
The projection of a relation is defined as projection of all its tuples over
a set of attributes. it yields vertical subset of the relation. the projection
operation is used to View the number of attributes in the resultant
relation or to reorder attributes.
Q.56) What is encryption?
Encryption is the coding or scrambling of data so that humans can not
read them directly.
Q.57) What is cardinality?
The no of instances of each entity involved in an instance of a relation of
a relation ship describe how often an entity can participate in relation
ship.(1:1,1:many,many:many)

Attempt These Concepts

Q.1)

Which is the subset of SQL commands used to manipulate Oracle

Database structures, including tables?

Q.2)

What operator performs pattern matching?

Q.3)

What operator tests column for the absence of data?

Q.4)

Which command executes the contents of a specified file?

Q.5)

What is the parameter substitution symbol used with INSERT INTO

command?

Q.6)

Which command displays the SQL command in the SQL buffer, and then
executes it?

Q.7)

What are the wildcards used for pattern matching?

Q.8)

State true or false. EXISTS, SOME, ANY are operators in SQL.

Q.9)

State true or false. !=, <>, ^= all denote the same operation.

Q.10) What are the privileges that can be granted on a table by a user to
others?
Q.11) What command is used to get back the privileges offered by the GRANT
command?
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.12) Which system tables contain information on privileges granted and

privileges obtained?
Q.13) Which system table contains information on constraints on all the tables
created?
Q.14) TRUNCATE TABLE EMP;
Q.15) DELETE FROM EMP;
Q.16) Will the outputs of the above two commands differ?
Q.17) What is the difference between TRUNCATE and DELETE commands?
Q.18) What command is used to create a table by copying the structure of
another table?
Q.19) What will be the output of the following query?
SELECT REPLACE(TRANSLATE(LTRIM(RTRIM('!! ATHEN !!','!'), '!'), 'AN',
'**'),'*','TROUBLE') FROM DUAL;
Q.20) What will be the output of the following query?
SELECT DECODE(TRANSLATE('A','1234567890','1111111111'), '1','YES',
'NO' );
Q.21) What does the following query do?
SELECT SAL + NVL(COMM,0) FROM EMP;
Q.22) Which date function is used to find the difference between two dates?
Q.23) Why does the following command give a compilation error?
Q.24) What is the advantage of specifying WITH GRANT OPTION in the GRANT
command?
Q.25) What is the use of the DROP option in the ALTER TABLE command?
Q.26) What is the value of comm and sal after executing the following query
if the initial value of sal is 10000?
Q.27) UPDATE EMP SET SAL = SAL + 1000, COMM = SAL*0.1;
Q.28) What is the use of DESC in SQL?
Q.29) What is the use of CASCADE CONSTRAINTS?
Q.30) When this clause is used with the DROP command, a parent table can be
dropped even when a child table exists.
Q.31) Which function is used to find the largest integer less than or equal to a
specific value?
Q.32) What is the output of the following query?
SELECT TRUNC(1234.5678,-2) FROM DUAL;

Study The Following SCHEMAS

Table 1: STUDIES
PNAME (VARCHAR), SPLACE (VARCHAR), COURSE (VARCHAR), CCOST
(NUMBER)

Table 2 : SOFTWARE
PNAME (VARCHAR), TITLE (VARCHAR), DEVIN (VARCHAR), SCOST
(NUMBER), DCOST (NUMBER), SOLD (NUMBER)

Table 3 : PROGRAMMER
PNAME (VARCHAR), DOB (DATE), DOJ (DATE), SEX (CHAR), PROF1
(VARCHAR), PROF2 (VARCHAR), SAL (NUMBER)
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

LEGEND
PNAME Programmer Name, SPLACE Study Place, CCOST Course Cost,
DEVIN Developed in, SCOST Software Cost, DCOST Development Cost,
PROF1 Proficiency 1

Attempt The Following Queries

Q.1)

Find out the selling cost average for packages developed in Oracle.

Q.2)

Display the names, ages and experience of all programmers.

Q.3)

Display the names of those who have done the PGDCA course.

Q.4)

What is the highest number of copies sold by a package?

Q.5)

Display the names and date of birth of all programmers born in April.

Q.6)

Display the lowest course fee.

Q.7)

How many programmers have done the DCA course.

Q.8)

How much revenue has been earned through the sale of packages
developed in C.

Q.9)

Display the details of software developed by Rakesh.

Q.10) How many programmers studied at Pentafour.

Q.11) Display the details of packages whose sales crossed the 5000 mark.
Q.12) 12. Find out the number of copies which should be sold in order to
recover the development cost of each package.
Q.13) 13. Display the details of packages for which the development cost has
been recovered.
Q.14) What is the price of costliest software developed in VB?
Q.15) How many packages were developed in Oracle ?
Q.16) How many programmers studied at PRAGATHI?
Q.17) How many programmers paid 10000 to 15000 for the course?
Q.18) What is the average course fee?
Q.19) Display the details of programmers knowing C.
Q.20) How many programmers know either C or Pascal?
Q.21) How many programmers dont know C and C++?
Q.22) How old is the oldest male programmer?
Q.23) What is the average age of female programmers?
Q.24) Calculate the experience in years for each programmer and display
along with their names in descending order.
Q.25) Who are the programmers who celebrate their birthdays during the
current month?
Q.26) How many female programmers are there?
Q.27) What are the languages known by the male programmers?
Q.28) What is the average salary?
Q.29) How many people draw 5000 to 7500?
Q.30) Display the details of those who dont know C, C++ or Pascal.
Q.31) Display the costliest package developed by each programmer.
Q.32) Produce the following output for all the male programmers Programmer
Mr. Arvind has 15 years of experience

Attempt These Combinations on SCOTT User

Q.1)

Display MGR and ENAME from EMP table.

Q.2)

Display the records where the job is either SALESMAN or DEPT NO =20.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.3)

Display the record where MGR is blank.

Q.4)

Display all the records where names begin with A.

Q.5)

Display the records whose ENAME begins with the letter in between K
to M.

Q.6)

Display all the records whose ENAME contain 5 characters.

Q.7)

Display total number of employees department wise.

Q.8)

Display the department that contains maximum employees.

Q.9)

Display the employee who getting maximum salary.

Q.10) Display the last 4 character of each employee

Q.11) Display the year and the total number of employee hired during a year.
Q.12) Display the year and the total number of employee for the year in which
maximum numbers of employee were hired.
Q.13) Display the record for all employees who have the same job as EMP
NO=7838.
Q.14) Display all the records where job contain the letter E
Q.15) Display the record where the salary of the employee is greater than the
salary obtained by TURNER
Q.16) Select all employee who are either clerk or salesman and have salary
greater than 1500.
Q.17) Select all the employee whose names start with Th or Lh.
Q.18) Display names ,annual salary ,comm. of those salesperson whose
monthly salary >comm..
Q.19) Select employees who are with the company for more than 25 years
Q.20) Display details of those employees who have join the company on same
date.
Q.21) Display details of highest paid employee in the EMP table.
Q.22) Display the 2nd highest paid employee in the EMP table
Q.23) Display DEPT NO which do not have clerk.
Q.24) Update sal of all employees by 2000 who are working in the company for
more than 15 years and drawing sal<4000.
Q.25) Display ENAME , HIREDATE in ascending order.
Q.26) Suppose a table contain thousand data and you are needed to select the
2nd last record from the table .write the query.
Q.27) Print the list of employees displaying last salary if exactly 1500 .display
on target if less than 1500.
Q.28) Display DEPT NO and the name of the employee who gets minimum
salary in each department.
Q.29) Display ENAME ,annual salary and comm. Of every employee in DEPT NO
30 and fill the comm. Field with 0 if it doesnt contain any value.
Q.30) Display details of that employee who have no manager.
Q.31) Display details of those employees who are clerk and whose salary lies
between 1000 and 2000
Q.32) List the employee by name , salary, and department name for every
employee in the company except clerks , sort on salary , displaying the
highest salary first.
Q.33) Display Name and Total Remuneration for all employees.
Q.34) List the employee name and salary increased by 20%.
Oracle By Sathish Yellanki
Database Consultant SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
For Online Training And Real Time Project Training Contact
+91-9290289904, +91-040-23710047, 64640047
Mail: [email protected] (OR) My Blog www.skyess.info

Page 1 of 396

Material Prepared By Sathish Yellanki For SkyEss Techno Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Oracle SQL*Plus And PL/SQL

Q.35) Display each employee name with hire date and salary review date
.assuming review date is first year after hire date
Q.36) Find out how many managers are there without listing them.
Q.37) Find the average salary and avg Total Remuneration for each job types.
Remember Salesman earn comm..
Q.38) Find the job that was filled in the first half of 1983 and the same job that
was filled during the same period of 1984.
Q.39) List all employees by NAME and NUMBER along with their managers
details.
Q.40) Write the query to display details for any employee who earns a salary
greater that the average for their department .Sort in Department
Number order.
Q.41) Find out the employee name , salary , dept no, who earns greater than
every employee in Department no 30.
Q.42) Find the Department having maximum employees.
Q.43) Find the employee who earns more than MILLER
Q.44) Find all the person who are not MANAGERS
Q.45) Find the name of person getting same salary in different department .
Q.46) Find the job whose average salary is equal to maximum average salary
of any job.
Q.47) Find out the details of all the person who have been assigned same job
in different DEPT NO.
Q.48) Find the department which has more than 3 employees.
Q.49) Write a query which will return the day of the week ,for any date
entered in format :DD:MM:YY.
Q.50) Check whether all employee number are indeed unique.
Q.51) List lowest paid employees working for each manager. Exclude any
group where the min salary is <1000.Sort the output by salary.
Q.52) Show the records of employees working in DALLAS location.
Q.53) List the following details for employees who earn $36,000 a year or who
are clerk.
Q.54) List all the employees by name, and number along with their managers
name and number.
Q.55) Find the employees who joined the company before their managers.
Q.56) Find the job with the highest average salary.
Q.57) Find the employees who have at least one person reporting to them.
Q.58) Find all employees whose department is not in DEPT table.
Q.59) Find Department which has no employees.
Q.60) Display the following information for the department with the highest
annual remuneration bill.
Q.61) In which year did most people join the company? Display the year and
number of employees.

Oracle By Sathish Yellanki

Page 1 of 396

Proposals That Work A Guide For Planning Dissertations and Grant Proposals by Lawrence F. Locke, Waneen W. Spirduso, Stephen J. Silverman
No ratings yet
Proposals That Work A Guide For Planning Dissertations and Grant Proposals by Lawrence F. Locke, Waneen W. Spirduso, Stephen J. Silverman
144 pages
Apache Cassandra Administrator Associate - Exam Practice Tests
From Everand
Apache Cassandra Administrator Associate - Exam Practice Tests
Cristian Scutaru
No ratings yet
Lab Exercise 10-11-12 - PLSQL
No ratings yet
Lab Exercise 10-11-12 - PLSQL
24 pages
SnapLogic Second Edition
From Everand
SnapLogic Second Edition
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
Valor Core Rulebook v0.8.3
No ratings yet
Valor Core Rulebook v0.8.3
63 pages
Recursive Form of The Eigensystem Realization Algorithm For System Identification
No ratings yet
Recursive Form of The Eigensystem Realization Algorithm For System Identification
6 pages
Oracle PL SQL Developer Program Analyst in Chicago IL Resume Sheetal Sood
No ratings yet
Oracle PL SQL Developer Program Analyst in Chicago IL Resume Sheetal Sood
6 pages
Srivatsa's - Resume (5 Years of Experience On Oracle Apex +SQL &PLSQL)
No ratings yet
Srivatsa's - Resume (5 Years of Experience On Oracle Apex +SQL &PLSQL)
5 pages
Oracle Syllabus
No ratings yet
Oracle Syllabus
7 pages
Scenario: Executive Summary of Class Scheduler System
No ratings yet
Scenario: Executive Summary of Class Scheduler System
8 pages
SQL PLSQL Material Ramanjanayalu
100% (1)
SQL PLSQL Material Ramanjanayalu
323 pages
PL SQL Developer
No ratings yet
PL SQL Developer
3 pages
Anish Oracle PLSQL 5.4+yrs
No ratings yet
Anish Oracle PLSQL 5.4+yrs
4 pages
Oracle PLSQL Examples
No ratings yet
Oracle PLSQL Examples
33 pages
SkyEssPythonSyllabus 1
No ratings yet
SkyEssPythonSyllabus 1
10 pages
Triggers
No ratings yet
Triggers
23 pages
Oracle Notes
No ratings yet
Oracle Notes
64 pages
Imran SQL Resume
No ratings yet
Imran SQL Resume
5 pages
PLSQL
No ratings yet
PLSQL
61 pages
Oracle SQL and PLSQL Training Course Syllabus
No ratings yet
Oracle SQL and PLSQL Training Course Syllabus
5 pages
Oracle DBA Syllabus
No ratings yet
Oracle DBA Syllabus
7 pages
PLSQL
No ratings yet
PLSQL
131 pages
Oracle Joins
No ratings yet
Oracle Joins
11 pages
PLSQL - Cursor Online Session Notes PDF
No ratings yet
PLSQL - Cursor Online Session Notes PDF
35 pages
Project Details
No ratings yet
Project Details
4 pages
PLSQL Programs
0% (1)
PLSQL Programs
8 pages
Badugu VaraKumar PLSQL
No ratings yet
Badugu VaraKumar PLSQL
5 pages
Exception
No ratings yet
Exception
188 pages
PLSQL For Beginners 4
No ratings yet
PLSQL For Beginners 4
48 pages
Oracle PL SQL Sample Resume 1
No ratings yet
Oracle PL SQL Sample Resume 1
4 pages
PL SQL Developer 1548848446
No ratings yet
PL SQL Developer 1548848446
2 pages
SQL PDF
No ratings yet
SQL PDF
173 pages
PLSQL Notes Modified
No ratings yet
PLSQL Notes Modified
124 pages
PLSQL Resume
No ratings yet
PLSQL Resume
4 pages
PLSQL
100% (1)
PLSQL
195 pages
PL/SQL Examples 1) / Displaying The First Fifty Even Numbers by Using PL/SQL Block
100% (6)
PL/SQL Examples 1) / Displaying The First Fifty Even Numbers by Using PL/SQL Block
47 pages
Ariharan PLSQL Resume..
No ratings yet
Ariharan PLSQL Resume..
3 pages
Introduction To PL/SQL: Sen Zhang
No ratings yet
Introduction To PL/SQL: Sen Zhang
98 pages
Y.Ramesh Kumar: Tata Consultancy Services
No ratings yet
Y.Ramesh Kumar: Tata Consultancy Services
4 pages
PLSQL
No ratings yet
PLSQL
196 pages
Interview Questions
No ratings yet
Interview Questions
96 pages
Oracle Developer Syllabus
No ratings yet
Oracle Developer Syllabus
15 pages
PLSQL PPT 18 19
No ratings yet
PLSQL PPT 18 19
43 pages
PL SQL-4
No ratings yet
PL SQL-4
188 pages
ORACLE PLSQL Interview Document
No ratings yet
ORACLE PLSQL Interview Document
60 pages
PLSQL Interview Questions 1
No ratings yet
PLSQL Interview Questions 1
6 pages
Assessment PL-SQL
100% (1)
Assessment PL-SQL
13 pages
Ashok 2+
No ratings yet
Ashok 2+
4 pages
Oracle PL Harender
No ratings yet
Oracle PL Harender
5 pages
PL SQL Exercises Questions On PL SQL
No ratings yet
PL SQL Exercises Questions On PL SQL
3 pages
PLSQL Cursor
No ratings yet
PLSQL Cursor
2 pages
PLSQL For All
No ratings yet
PLSQL For All
154 pages
Oracle PLSQL Tutorial
No ratings yet
Oracle PLSQL Tutorial
33 pages
PL SQL Exercises
No ratings yet
PL SQL Exercises
4 pages
Oracle SQL
No ratings yet
Oracle SQL
75 pages
ORACLE 12C Complete Self-Assessment Guide
From Everand
ORACLE 12C Complete Self-Assessment Guide
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
Oracle E-Business Suite Manufacturing & Supply Chain Management
From Everand
Oracle E-Business Suite Manufacturing & Supply Chain Management
Bastin Gerald
No ratings yet
Oracle SOA BPEL Process Manager 11gR1 A Hands-on Tutorial
From Everand
Oracle SOA BPEL Process Manager 11gR1 A Hands-on Tutorial
Ravi Saraswathi
5/5 (1)
Instant Pentaho Data Integration Kitchen
From Everand
Instant Pentaho Data Integration Kitchen
Sergio Ramazzina
No ratings yet
Oracle Essbase 9 Implementation Guide
From Everand
Oracle Essbase 9 Implementation Guide
Joseph Sydney Gomez
No ratings yet
Oracle Data Guard A Clear and Concise Reference
From Everand
Oracle Data Guard A Clear and Concise Reference
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
Sql Plsql Oracle
From Everand
Sql Plsql Oracle
Andrew Igla
No ratings yet
Basic DBA Query v.1: Oracle Database
From Everand
Basic DBA Query v.1: Oracle Database
Oraclesql-plsql
5/5 (1)
Big Data Testing: What You Need To Know
No ratings yet
Big Data Testing: What You Need To Know
4 pages
Knowledge TransitionTemplate
No ratings yet
Knowledge TransitionTemplate
6 pages
Big Data Testing: What You Need To Know
No ratings yet
Big Data Testing: What You Need To Know
4 pages
Diagnosis 8729 Diagnosis Medical Exam 6143 Medical Exam Medical Test 147936 Medical Test Medication 80881 Medication
No ratings yet
Diagnosis 8729 Diagnosis Medical Exam 6143 Medical Exam Medical Test 147936 Medical Test Medication 80881 Medication
2 pages
Kcb-Edwh&Bi Testing Check List
No ratings yet
Kcb-Edwh&Bi Testing Check List
4 pages
Apica
No ratings yet
Apica
1 page
DM Tool
No ratings yet
DM Tool
2 pages
DWH Testing Guide
No ratings yet
DWH Testing Guide
8 pages
Database Testing
No ratings yet
Database Testing
6 pages
Dator vs. Omb Carpio-Morales - Adm Jurisdiction
No ratings yet
Dator vs. Omb Carpio-Morales - Adm Jurisdiction
13 pages
What Is SWOT Analysis
No ratings yet
What Is SWOT Analysis
4 pages
Electronic Devices and Circuits Lab: Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering
No ratings yet
Electronic Devices and Circuits Lab: Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering
14 pages
Statitics Tamil English WWW - Governmentexams.co - in PDF
No ratings yet
Statitics Tamil English WWW - Governmentexams.co - in PDF
12 pages
Strength Training For Women
100% (1)
Strength Training For Women
232 pages
Jacobson V Massachusetts, 197 U.S. 11 (1905)
No ratings yet
Jacobson V Massachusetts, 197 U.S. 11 (1905)
30 pages
Product-Oriented: Performance-Based Assessment
No ratings yet
Product-Oriented: Performance-Based Assessment
6 pages
Chapter - 1 Explain CIA Model
No ratings yet
Chapter - 1 Explain CIA Model
68 pages
MSC Thesis - Devleoping A Simulation Model For Airport Check-In
100% (3)
MSC Thesis - Devleoping A Simulation Model For Airport Check-In
99 pages
ITO, Toyo (1971) - Logic of Uselessness in Daniell, Thomas (Org), Tarzans in The Media Forest (2011)
No ratings yet
ITO, Toyo (1971) - Logic of Uselessness in Daniell, Thomas (Org), Tarzans in The Media Forest (2011)
4 pages
Born From Darkness by Maryjessie Pacheco
No ratings yet
Born From Darkness by Maryjessie Pacheco
17 pages
Leshy PDF
100% (2)
Leshy PDF
2 pages
Chapter 16 - Smart Plan Better Future
No ratings yet
Chapter 16 - Smart Plan Better Future
9 pages
PR in Hospitals
No ratings yet
PR in Hospitals
6 pages
Kumpulan Cerpen Baru
No ratings yet
Kumpulan Cerpen Baru
3 pages
Falling Water Dimensions
No ratings yet
Falling Water Dimensions
1 page
Paper-5 Analysis of Integrating External Trustworthiness Software & Study On Information Retrieval Systems
No ratings yet
Paper-5 Analysis of Integrating External Trustworthiness Software & Study On Information Retrieval Systems
8 pages
Marketing Aspect: Learning Outcomes
No ratings yet
Marketing Aspect: Learning Outcomes
23 pages
Chapter 7
No ratings yet
Chapter 7
14 pages
Case Analysis: Name of The Case: - Tea Board, India vs. I.T.C. Limited Decided On: - 24 August, 2011 Citation No
No ratings yet
Case Analysis: Name of The Case: - Tea Board, India vs. I.T.C. Limited Decided On: - 24 August, 2011 Citation No
8 pages
Edvantage: "Online Learning Is Not The Next Big Thing, It Is The New Big Thing"
No ratings yet
Edvantage: "Online Learning Is Not The Next Big Thing, It Is The New Big Thing"
2 pages
Tartuffe
No ratings yet
Tartuffe
11 pages
7.1 Coyne2019 - Ludwig Von Mises On War and The Economy
No ratings yet
7.1 Coyne2019 - Ludwig Von Mises On War and The Economy
14 pages
Findings: Planning, Risk Coverage and Securities
No ratings yet
Findings: Planning, Risk Coverage and Securities
3 pages
Grand Jeans Case (Assign 2)
No ratings yet
Grand Jeans Case (Assign 2)
5 pages
Numbers and Arithmetic
No ratings yet
Numbers and Arithmetic
57 pages
Good Good Father G
No ratings yet
Good Good Father G
1 page